Samsung 24" LED HDTV Монитор серии 3 T24B301 T24B301EW - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels- Samsung

Описание	Дата выпуска	Язык	Файл
руководство пользователя	2012.06.29	Русский	10.6 MB
руководство пользователя	2012.06.29	АНГЛИЙСКИЙ	10.4 MB

http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/LT24B301EWH/CI-downloads

http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120629104248077/BN46-00196T-Rus.pdf

http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120629100902967/BN46-00196T-Eng.pdf

Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :

Samsung-ME40A-TP40-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-UA40ES5500-UA40ES5500R-Chine-Manuels

Samsung-700TSn-2-SSD-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-ME46A-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-NC190-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-320TSN-3D-SSD-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P5110-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-E1720NR-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels

Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels

Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels

SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels

Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels

Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels

Samsung-910MP-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels

Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels

Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels

Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels

Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels

Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels

Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels

Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels

Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels

Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels

Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels

Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels

Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel

Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels

Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels

Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels

Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels

Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels

Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels

Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels

Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels

Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels

Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels

Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels

Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels

17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels

40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels

CLX-3185FW Manuels

Galaxy Ace GT-S5830

Galaxy S II GT-I9100

Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16

Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16

Galaxy YGT-S5360

LE32C350 LE32C350D1W

LE40C630 LE40C630K1W

MM-C330D

MM-D330D

Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels

N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels

N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels

RSH5UEPN

SGH-F490

Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000

Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000

Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels

T23A550 T23A550

UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS

UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels

Wave 575 GT-S5750E

Wave II GT-S8530

16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung

16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung

samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels

Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels

Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir

Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U

Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B

SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste

Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu

Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD

Samsung B5722 Double SIM

Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles

Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310

Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB

Samsung batterie IA-BP420E

Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST

Samsung batterie SLB-10A

Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS

Samsung BD-E5300

Samsung BD-E5500 3D

Samsung BD-E8300 3D

Samsung C3050 Stratus

Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"

Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung

Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX

Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100

Samsung CB20A12

Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir

Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB

Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir

Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung CLP-C300A

Samsung CLP-K300A

Samsung CLP-M300A

Samsung CLP-Y300A

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet

Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S

Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series

Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX

Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose

Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi

Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi

Samsung E1150 - Silver

Samsung E2550

Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur

Samsung ES30 Noir

Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go

Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir

Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir

Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir

Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Flash SEF15A

Samsung Flash SEF20A

Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)

Samsung Galaxy Note

Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G

Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67

Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung HT-D330

Samsung HT-D350

Samsung HT-D423

Samsung HT-D4500

Samsung HT-D5000 3D

Samsung HT-E4200 3D

Samsung HT-E4500 3D

Samsung HT-E5200 3D

Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi

Samsung HW-E450

Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)

Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220

Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm

Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm

Samsung LE40D550

Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir

Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB

SAMSUNG ME106V-SX

Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction

SAMSUNG ME82V-SX

SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002

Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500

Samsung ML-2010D3

Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi

Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung MLT-D1052S

Samsung MLT-D1082S

Samsung MLT-D1092S

Samsung MM-D430D

Samsung MV800 Noir

Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir

Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED

Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED

Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200

Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100

Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S

Samsung PL170 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go

Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge

Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal

Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir

Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante

Samsung PS43D450

Samsung PS43E450

Samsung PS43E490 3D

Samsung PS51E450

Samsung PS51E490 3D

Samsung PS59D530

Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go

Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED

Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED

Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes

Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT

Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED

Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D

Samsung S23B350H 23" LED

Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED

Samsung S27B350H 27" LED

Samsung SC4340 noir ébène

Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge

Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi

Samsung SCX-4200A

Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0

Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0

Samsung SLB07A pour ST50

Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000

Samsung ST65 Noir

Samsung ST65 Rouge

Samsung station d'accueil

Samsung station d'accueil HD2

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR

Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED

Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED

Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D

Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED

Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX

Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT

Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir

Samsung UE19D4010 LED

Samsung UE19ES4000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5410 LED

Samsung UE26EH4000 LED

Samsung UE26EH4500 LED

Samsung UE32D5000 LED

Samsung UE32EH4000 LED

Samsung UE32EH5000 LED

Samsung UE32ES5500 LED

Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE40D5000 LED

Samsung UE40D5710 LED

Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D

Samsung UE40EH5000 LED

Samsung UE40ES5500 LED

Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D

Samsung UE46EH5000 LED

Samsung UE46ES5500 LED

Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10

Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi

Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi

Samsung WB700 Noir

Samsung WB750 Noir

Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter

Samsung WMN250M accroche murale

Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose

Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go

LED TV MONITOR (MFM TV) user manual Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register TB300 TB350English 2 Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance. Product design and specifications may be changed without notice. Digital LED display notice 1. Functionalities related to Digital TV (DVB) are only available in countries/areas where DVB-T (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AVC) digital terrestrial signals are broadcasted or where you are able to access to a compatible DVB-C (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AAC) cable-TV service. Please check with your local dealer the possibility to receive DVB-T or DVB-C signal. 2. DVB-T is the DVB European consortium standard for the broadcast transmission of digital terrestrial television and DVB-C is that for the broadcast transmission of digital LED display over cable. 3. Although this LED display set meets the latest DVB-T and DVB-C standards, as of [August, 2008], the compatibility with future DVB-T digital terrestrial and DVB-C digital cable broadcasts cannot be guaranteed. 4. Depending on the countries/areas where this LED display set is used some cable-TV providers may charge an additional fee for such a service and you may be required to agree to terms and conditions of their business. 5. Some Digital LED display functions might be unavailable in some countries or regions and DVB-C might not work correctly with some cable service providers. 6. For more information, please contact your local Samsung customer care centre. ✎ The reception quality of LED display may be affected due to differences in broadcasting method between the countries. Please check the LED display performance in the local SAMSUNG Authorized Dealer, or the Samsung Call Centre whether it can be improved by reconfiguring LED display setting or not. Still image warning Avoid displaying still images (like jpeg picture files) or still image element (like LED display programme logo, panorama or 4:3 image format, stock or news bar at screen bottom etc.) on the screen. Constant displaying of still picture can cause ghosting of screen, which will affect image quality. To reduce risk of this effect, please follow below recommendations: • Avoid displaying the same LED display channel for long periods. • Always try do display any image on full screen, use LED display set picture format menu for best possible match. • Reduce brightness and contrast values to minimum required to achieve desired picture quality, exceeded values may speed up the burnout process. • Frequently use all LED display features designed to reduce image retention and screen burnout, refer to proper user manual section for details. Securing the Installation Space Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation. Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product. ✎ The actual appearance of the LED display may differ from the images in this manual, depending on the model. ✎ Be careful when you touch the LED display. Some parts can be somewhat hot. Installation with a stand. Installation with a wall-mount. • An administration fee may be charged if either – (a) an engineer is called out at your request and there is no defect in the product (i.e. where you have failed to read this user manual). – (b) you bring the unit to a repair centre and there is no defect in the product (i.e. where you have failed to read this user manual). • The amount of such administration charge will be advised to you before any work or home visit is carried out. 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm3 ENGLISH English Check the Symbol! This function can be used by pressing the t TOOLST button on the remote control. Note Indicates additional information. Contents Getting Started 4 4 Safety Precautions 11 Accessories 12 Viewing the Control Panel 13 Viewing the Remote Control Connections 14 14 Connecting to an Antenna 14 Setup (Initial Setup) 15 Connecting to an AV Device 16 Connecting to a COMMON INTERFACE slot 17 Connecting to a Audio device and PC 19 Changing the Input Source Basic Features 19 19 How to Navigate Menus 20 Using the INFO button (Now & Next guide) 20 Using the Channel Menu 22 Channel Menu 23 Picture Menu 25 Sound Menu 27 System Menu 30 Support Menu Advanced Features 31 31 Using the Media Play Other Information 38 38 Analogue Channel Teletext Feature 39 Attaching a Wall Mount/Desktop Stand 40 Anti-theft Kensington Lock 41 Troubleshooting 45 Specifications4 Getting Started English Safety Precautions Icons used for safety precautions WARNING Failing to follow the precautions marked with this sign may result in a serious injury or even a fatality. CAUTION Failing to follow the precautions marked with this sign may result in a personal injury or property damage. Do not perform. Must be followed. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). THERE ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER ALL SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. This symbol indicates that high voltage is present inside. It is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any internal part of this product. This symbol alerts you that important literature concerning operation and maintenance has been included with this product. ¦ Power Related ✎ The following images are for your reference and may differ depending on models and countries. Warning Avoid using a damaged power cord or plug or a loose power outlet. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire. Avoid connecting multiple electric appliances to a single wall outlet. x Otherwise, it may result in fire due to overheating of the wall outlet. Avoid plugging in or unplugging the power supply with wet hands. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock. ! Plug the power plug in firmly. x Otherwise, it may result in fire. ! Make sure to connect the power cord to a grounded wall outlet (for insulation class 1 equipment only). x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or injury. Avoid bending or twisting the power cord excessively and avoid placing heavy objects on the cord. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire due to a damaged power cord. Getting Started5 Getting Started English Keep the power cord and the product away from a heater. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire. ! If the pins of the power plug or the wall outlet are covered in dust, clean it using a dry cloth. x Otherwise, it may result in fire. Caution Avoid unplugging the power plug while the product is operating. x Otherwise, it may damage the product due to electric shock. ! Make sure to use only the power cord supplied by our company. In addition, do not use the power cord of another electric appliance. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire. ! When unplugging the power plug from the wall outlet, make sure to hold it by the plug and not by the cord. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire. ! Connect the power plug to a wall outlet that can be easily reached. x When a problem occurs with the product, you must unplug the power plug to cut the power off completely. You cannot cut the power off completely using only the power button on the product. ¦ Installation Related Warning Avoid placing burning candles, mosquitorepellentor cigarettes on the product. x Otherwise, it may result in fire. ! Ask an installation engineer or relevant company to install the product onto the wall. x Otherwise, it may result in injury. x Make sure to use the specified wall mount. Avoid installing the product in a badly-ventilated location such as inside a bookshelf or closet. x Otherwise, it may result in fire due to internal over-heating. ! Keep the plastic bags used to pack the product away from children. x If children place the plastic bags over their heads, they may suffocate. Avoid installing the product in a location that is unstable or exposed to excessive vibration such as on an unstable or slanted shelf. x The product may fall and this may result in damage to the product or injury. x If you use the product in a location exposed to excessive vibrations, it may result in a problem with the product or fire. ! Avoid installing the product in a location exposed to dust, moisture (sauna), oil, smoke or water (rain drops) and installing it within a vehicle. x This may result in electric shock or fire.6 Getting Started English Avoid installing the product in a location exposed to direct sunlight and installing the product near a heat source such as a fireplace or heater. x This may shorten the product life cycle or cause fire. Avoid installing the product where children may reach it. x If a child touches the product, the product may fall and this may result in injury. x Since the front part is heavier, install the product on a flat and stable surface. ! Bend the outdoor antenna cable downwards at the location where it comes in the house so that rainwater does not flow in. x If rainwater enters the product, it may result in electric shock or fire. ! Install the antenna far away from any high voltage cables. x If the antenna touches or falls onto a high voltage cable, it may result in electric shock or fire. Caution ! Do not let the product drop while moving it. x This may result in a problem with the product or injury. Do not place the product face down on the floor. x This may damage the panel of the product. When installing the product on a console or shelf, make sure that the front of the product does not protrude out of the console or shelf. x Otherwise, this may cause the product to fall off and result in a malfunction or injury. x Make sure to use a cabinet or shelf suitable to the size of the product. ! When putting the product down, handle it gently. x Otherwise, it may result in a problem with the product or injury. SAMSUNG ! If the product is installed in a location where the operating conditions vary considerably, a serious quality problem may occur due to the surrounding environment. In this case, install the product only after consulting one of our service engineers about the matter. x Places exposed to microscopic dust, chemicals, too high or low temperature, high humidity, airports or stations where the product is continuously used.7 Getting Started English ¦ Cleaning Related Warning ! Before cleaning the product, unplug the power cord. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire. When cleaning the product, do not spray water directly over the product parts. x Make sure that water does not enter the product. x Otherwise, it may result in fire, electric shock or a problem with the product. Caution Avoid spraying cleansing agent directly onto the product. x This may result in discoloration or cracking of the exterior of the product or the panel coming off. ! When cleaning the product, disconnect the power cord and clean the product with the supplied cleaning cloth. x Avoid using chemicals such as wax, benzene, alcohol, thinner, mosquitorepellent, fragrance, lubrication or cleansing agent when cleaning the product.
This may result in the exterior being deformed or the print being removed. ! If you can't get the product clean with just the supplied cloth, use a soft, damp cloth with a "monitorexclusive cleansing agent" and wipe the product with it. x If no monitor-exclusive cleansing agent is available, dilute a cleansing agent with water at a ratio of 1:10 before cleaning the product. ! Since the exterior of the product is easily scratched, be sure to use the supplied cleansing cloth. ¦ Usage Related Warning Since a high voltage runs through the product, never disassemble, repair or modify the product yourself. x Otherwise, it may result in fire or electric shock. x If the product needs to be fixed, contact a service centre. ! To move the product, turn the power off and unplug the power cord, the antenna cable and any other wires connected to the product. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire due to the damaged power cord.8 Getting Started English ! If the product generates a strange noise, a burning smell, or smoke, unplug the power plug immediately and contact a service centre. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire. Avoid letting children hang or climb onto the product. x Otherwise, it may result in the product falling and this may result in injury or death. If you drop the product or the case is damaged, turn the power off and unplug the power cord. Contact a service centre. x Otherwise, it may result in fire or electric shock. Avoid placing objects such as toys and cookies on top of the product. x If a child hangs over the product to grab an object, the object or the product may fall and this may result in injury or even death. ! When thunder or lighting occurs, unplug the power cord and under no circumstance touch the antenna cable as this is dangerous. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire. ! Avoid dropping an object over the product or cause impact to the product. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire. Avoid moving the product by pulling the power cord or antenna cable. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock, fire or a problem with the product due to damage to the cable. ! GAS When a gas leak occurs, do not touch the product or the power plug and ventilate immediately. x A spark may result in an explosion or fire. x During a thunder or lighting storm, do not touch the power cord or antenna cable. Avoid lifting up or moving the product by holding only the power cord or signal cable. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock, fire or a problem with the product due to damage to the cable. ! Avoid using or placing inflammable spray or objects near the product. x This may result in an explosion or fire. Take care not to block the vent by a table cloth or curtain. x Otherwise, it may result in fire due to internal overheating. 100 Avoid inserting metal objects such as a chopsticks, coins or hairpins, or inflammable objects into the product (the vents, ports, etc). x If water or substances enters the product, turn the power off, unplug the power cord and contact a service centre. x Otherwise, it may result in a problem with the product, electric shock or fire.9 Getting Started English Avoid placing a liquid container such as a vase, flowerpot, beverage, cosmetics or drugs, or a metal object over the product. x If water or substances enter the product, turn the power off, unplug the power cord and contact a service centre. x Otherwise, it may result in a problem with the product, electric shock or fire. Do not press down hard on the product. The product may become deformed or damaged. Caution ! Displaying a still image for a long time may create a persistent image or stain on the screen. x If you do not use the product for a long time, use the power-saving mode or set the screensaver to the moving picture mode. -_- ! When not using the product for a long time such as leaving your home, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. x Otherwise, it may cause dust accumulation and result in fire caused by overheating or short circuit or result in an electric shock. ! Set the appropriate resolution and frequency for the product. x Otherwise, it may result in eye strain. Avoid turning the product upside down or move the product holding only the stand. x This may cause the product to fall, resulting in damage to the product or injury. ! Watching the product from too close a distance continuously may damage your eyesight. Avoid using a humidifier or cooker near the product. x Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire. ! It is important to give your eyes some rest (5 minutes every hour) when viewing the product screen for long periods of time. x This will alleviate any eye strain. Since the display panel is hot after using it for a long time, do not touch the product.10 Getting Started English ! Keep the small accessories in a location out of the reach of children. ! Take care when adjusting the angle of the product or the height of the stand. x If your hand or finger is caught, you may be injured. x If the product is tilted excessively, the product may fall and this may result in injury. Avoid placing a heavy object over the product. x Otherwise, it may result in a problem with the product or injury. When using headphones or earphones, do not turn the volume too high. x Having the sound too loud may damage your hearing. Be careful that children do not place the batteries in their mouths when removed from the remote control. Place the battery in a location that children or infants cannot reach. x If children have had the battery in their mouths, consult your doctor immediately. ! When replacing the batteries, insert them with right polarity (+, -). x Otherwise, the battery may become damaged or it may cause fire, personal injury or damage due to leakage of the internal liquid. Use only specified standard batteries. Do not use new and used batteries together. x This may cause a battery to break or leak and may cause fire, injury, or contamination (damage). ! The batteries (and rechargeable batteries) are not ordinary refuse and must be returned for recycling purposes. The customer is responsible for returning the used or rechargeable batteries for recycling. x The customer can return used or rechargeable batteries to a nearby public recycling centre or to a store selling the same type of the battery or rechargeable battery.11 Getting Started English Accessories ✎Please make sure the following items are included with your LED display. If any items are missing, contact your dealer. ✎The items’ colours and shapes may vary depending on the models. ✎Cables not included in the package contents can be purchased separately. ✎Check that there is no accessory hidden behind packing materials when you open the box. [CAUTION: INSERT SECURELY LEST SHOULD BE DETACHED IN SET x User Manual x Quick Setup Guide x Remote Control & Batteries (AAA x 2) x Cleaning Cloth x Warranty Card / Safety Guide (Not available in some locations) x Power Cord y Stand Connector y Stand Base y D-Sub Cable y Stereo Cable Input Cables (Sold Separately) y HDMI to DVI Cable y Audio Cable y Component Cable y Optical Cable y HDMI Cable12 Getting Started English Viewing the Control Panel ✎The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model. SOURCE E Toggles between all the available input sources. In the on-screen menu, use this button as you would use the ENTERE button on the remote control. MENU Displays an on-screen menu, the OSD (on screen display) of your LED display's features. Y Adjusts the volume. In the OSD, use the Y buttons as you would use the l and r z buttons on the remote control. Changes the channels. In the OSD, use the z buttons as you would use the u and d buttons on the remote control. P (Power) Turns the LED display on or off. Power Indicator Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in standby mode. Remote control sensor Aim the remote control towards this spot on the LED display. Standby mode Do not leave your LED display in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on a holiday, for example). A small amount of electric power is still consumed even when the power button is turned off. It is best to unplug the power cord. Control Panel13 Getting Started English Viewing the Remote Control ✎This is a special remote control for the visually impaired and has Braille points on the Channel and Number buttons. Installing batteries (Battery size: AAA) Turns the TV on and off. Have direct access to channels. Alternately select Teletext ON, Double, Mix or OFF. Displays the Content Home, which includes Channel List, Guide, Media Play, Schedule Manager, and Source. Quickly select frequently used functions. Displays the main on-screen menu. Returns to the previous menu. PIP: Turns the PIP on or off. P.SIZE: Selects the Picture Size. AD/SUBT.: Turns the audio description on and off (not available in some locations). / Displays digital subtitles. Move the cursor and select an item. Confirm the setting. Use these buttons according to the direction on screen. Adjusts the volume. Displays and selects the available video sources. Returns to the previous channel. Cuts off the sound temporarily. Displays channel lists on the screen. Displays the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide). Displays information on the TV screen. Exits the menu. Using these buttons in Media Play mode. Changes channels.Connections Connecting to an Antenna When the LED display is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically. ✎Preset: Connecting the mains and antenna. ANT OUT Power Input Setup (Initial Setup) English 14 When the LED display is initially powered on, a sequence of on-screen prompts will assist in configuring basic settings. Press the POWERP button. Setup is available only when the Input Source is set to TV. ✎Before turning on the LED display, make sure the antenna cable is connected. 1 Selecting a menu language Press the u or d button to select a menu language. Press ENTERE button 2 or Selecting Home Use Store Demo twice when done. Press the x Select the u or Home Use d button, then press the mode. Store Demo ENTER Mode is for retail environments. E button. P x To return the unit’s settings from Store Demo to Home Use (standard): Press the volume button on the LED display. When you see the volume OSD, press and hold MENU for 5 sec. x Store Demo is only for shop display. If you select it, several functions are not able to use. Please select Home Use when you watch at home. 3 Selecting an area Press the ENTERE button. Select the appropriate area by pressing the u or d button. Press the ENTERE button to confirm your choice. 4 Auto Tuning Press the u or d button to select correct option, and then press ENTERE button twice. Let’s find and store channels on your TV. Do you need to search for channels? x Yes, I need to. All the channels available will be found and stored on your TV. (Auto Tuning necessary) x No, I don’t need to. My set-top box provides all the channels that are available, so I don't need to search for channels. ✎ You can complete Setup by selecting it. x Air / Cable: Select the antenna source to memorise. Digital & Analogue / Digital / Analogue: Select the channel source to memorise. ✎ You can check more details on page22. 5 Setting the Clock Mode Set the Clock Mode automatically or manually. x Auto: Select the time zone (depending on the country) where you are located. x Manual: Allows you to manually set the current date and time. ✎ If the customer chooses "No, I don’t need to." in step 4, the clock just can be set manually. 6 Complete Press the ENTERE button. If You Want to Reset This Feature... Select System - Setup (Initial Setup). Enter your 4 digit PIN number. The default PIN number is “0-0-0-0”. If you want to change the PIN number, use the Change PIN function. You should do Setup (MENU → System) again at home although you did in shop. ✎If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence in Standby mode, which resets the PIN to “0-0-0-0”: POWER (off) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (on).English 15 Connections Connecting to an AV Device Using an HDMI or an HDMI to DVI cable (up to 1080p) Available devices: DVD, Blu-ray player, HD cable box, HD STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver, VCR ✎HDMI IN(DVI) / PC/DVI AUDIO IN x If an HDMI to DVI cable is connected to the HDMI IN(DVI) port, the audio does not work. x The picture may not display normally (if at all) or the audio may not work if an external device that uses an older version of HDMI mode is connected to the LED display. If such a problem occurs, ask the manufacturer of the external device about the HDMI version and, if out of date, request an upgrade. x Be sure to purchase a certified HDMI cable. Otherwise, the picture may not display or a connection error may occur. x A basic high-speed HDMI cable or one with ethernet is recommended. This product does not support the ethernet function via HDMI. Using a Scart Cable Available devices: DVD, VCR ✎In Ext. mode, DTV Out supports MPEG SD Video and Audio only. DVI OUT HDMI OUT AUDIO OUT W R DVD / Blu-ray player DVD / Blu-ray player EXT (RGB) EXT VCR / DVDEnglish 16 Connections Using a Component (up to 1080p) or Audio/Video (480i only) Cable Available devices: DVD, Blu-ray player, cable box, STB satellite receiver, VCR PR PB COMPONENT / AV IN R W R AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L VIDEO OUT R W R B G R W R B G R W W W R B R R G Y Y AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y R W Y ✎When connecting to AV IN, the colour of the AV IN [Y/VIDEO] jack (green) will not match the video cable (yellow). ✎For better picture quality, the Component connection is recommended over the A/V connection. Connecting to a COMMON INTERFACE slot (Just for Europe, Turkey,Algeria,South Africa, and CIS area) Using the “CI or CI+ CARD” To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted. x If you don’t insert the “CI or CI+ CARD,” some channels will display the message “Scrambled Signal”. x The pairing information containing a telephone number, the “CI or CI+ CARD” ID the Host ID and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider. x When the configuration of channel information has finished, the message “Updating Completed” is displayed, indicating the channel list is updated. ✎NOTE x You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD” from a local cable service provider. x When removing the “CI or CI+ CARD”, carefully pull it out with your hands since dropping the “CI or CI+ CARD” may cause damage to it. x Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the direction marked on the card. x The location of the COMMON INTERFACE slot may be different depending on the model. x “CI or CI+ CARD” is not supported in some countries and regions; check with your authorized dealer. x If you have any problems, please contact a service provider. x Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” that supports the current antenna settings. The screen will be distorted or will not be seen. Audio Cable (Not Supplied) Video Cable (Not Supplied) Audio Cable (Not Supplied) Red White Red Bule Green Red White Yellow Device Device Component Cable (Not Supplied)English 17 Connections Digital audio system Connecting to a Audio device and PC Using an Optical (Digital) or a Headphone Connection DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) TB300 series have not headphone and Optical interface. ✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) x When a Digital Audio System is connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack, decrease the volume of both the LED display and the system. x 5.1 CH (channel) audio is available when the LED display is connected to an external device supporting 5.1 CH. x When the receiver (home theatre) is set to on, you can hear sound output from the TV’s optical jack. When the TV is receiving a DTV signal, the TV will send 5.1 CH sound to the home theatre receiver. When the source is a digital component such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 CH audio will be heard from the home theatre receiver. If you want to hear 5.1 CH audio, connect the digital audio out jack from your DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB satellite receiver directly to an amplifier or home theatre. ✎Headphones H: You can connect your headphones to the headphones output on your set. While the headphones are connected, the sound from the built-in speakers will be disabled. x Sound function may be restricted when connecting headphones to the LED display. x Headphone volume and LED display volume are adjusted separately. Using an HDMI cable or an HDMI to DVI cable or a D-sub cable ✎Connecting through the HDMI cable may not be supported depending on the PC. HDMI Cable (Not Supplied) HDMI to DVI (Not Supplied) Stereo Cable Stereo Cable D-Sub Cable English 18 Connections Display Modes (D-Sub and HDMI/DVI Input) Optimal resolution : 1366 x 768 pixels (T19B300 model only) Display Mode Horizontal Frequency (kHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Pixel Clock (MHz) Sync Polarity Mode Resolution (H/V) IBM 720 x 400 70Hz 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+ VESA DMT 640 x 480 60Hz 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/- MAC 640 x 480 67Hz 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/- VESA DMT 640 x 480 72Hz 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/- VESA DMT 640 x 480 75Hz 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/- VESA DMT 800 x 600 60Hz 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+ VESA DMT 800 x 600 72Hz 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+ VESA DMT 800 x 600 75Hz 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+ MAC 832 x 624 75Hz 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 60Hz 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 70Hz 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 75Hz 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+ VESA DMT 1280 x 720 60Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+ VESA DMT 1366 x 768 60Hz 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+ Optimal resolution : 1920 x 1080 pixels Display Mode Horizontal Frequency (kHz) Vertical Frequency(Hz) Pixel Clock (MHz) Sync Polarity (H/V) Mode Resolution IBM 720 x 400 70Hz 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+ VESA DMT 640 x 480 60Hz 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/- MAC 640 x 480 67Hz 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/- VESA DMT 640 x 480 72Hz 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/- VESA DMT 640 x 480 75Hz 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/- VESA DMT 800 x 600 60Hz 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+ VESA DMT 800 x 600 72Hz 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+ VESA DMT 800 x 600 75Hz 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+ MAC 832 x 624 75Hz 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 60Hz 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 70Hz 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 75Hz 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+ VESA DMT 1152 x 864 75Hz 67.500 75.000 108.000 +/+ MAC 1152 x 870 75Hz 68.681 75.062 100.000 -/- VESA DMT 1280 x 720 60Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+ VESA DMT 1280 x 800 60Hz 49.702 59.810 83.500 -/+ VESA DMT 1280 x 1024 60Hz 63.981 60.020 108.000 +/+ VESA DMT 1280 x 1024 75Hz 79.976 75.025 135.000 +/+ VESA DMT 1366 x 768 60Hz 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+ VESA DMT 1440 x 900 60Hz 55.935 59.887 106.500 -/+ VESA DMT 1600 x 900RB 60Hz 60.000 60.000 108.000 +/+ VESA DMT 1680 x 1050 60Hz 65.290 59.954 146.250 -/+ VESA DMT 1920 x 1080 60Hz 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+ ✎NOTE x The interlace mode is not supported. x The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected. x Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG(Sync On Green) is not supported.English 19 Connections Basic Features How to Navigate Menus Before using the LED display, follow the steps below to learn how to navigate the menu and select and adjust different functions. 1 ENTERE / Direction button: Move the cursor and select an item. Confirm the setting. 2 RETURN button: Returns to the previous menu. 3 MENU button: Displays the main on-screen menu. 4 EXIT button: Exits the on-screen menu. How to Operate the OSD (On Screen Display) The access step may differ depending on the selected menu. 1 MENU m The main menu options appear on the screen: Picture, Sound, Channel, System, Support. 2 ▲ / ▼ Select an icon with the ▲ or ▼ button. 3 ENTERE Press ENTERE to access the sub-menu. 4 ▲ / ▼ Select the desired submenu with the ▲ or ▼ button. 5 ◄ / ► Adjust the value of an item with the ◄ or ► button. The adjustment in the OSD may differ depending on the selected menu. 6 ENTERE Press ENTERE to complete the configuration. 7 EXIT e Press EXIT. Changing the Input Source Source SOURCE s→ Source Use to select LED display or an external input sources such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB satellite receiver. ■ TV / Ext. / PC / HDMI/DVI / AV / Component ✎In the Source, connected inputs will be highlighted. ✎TV, PC and Ext. always stay activated. Edit Name SOURCEs→ TOOLST → Edit Name → ENTERE In the Source, press the TOOLST button, and then you can set an external input sources name you want. ■ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI PC / DVI Devices / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA: Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier. ✎When connecting a PC to the HDMI IN (DVI) port with HDMI cable, you should set the LED display to PC mode under Edit Name. ✎When connecting a PC to the HDMI IN (DVI) port with HDMI to DVI cable, you should set the LED display to DVI PC mode under Edit Name. ✎When connecting an AV devices to the HDMI IN (DVI) port with HDMI to DVI cable, you should set the LED display to DVI Devices mode under Edit Name. Information SOURCEs→ TOOLST→ Information → ENTERE You can see detailed information about the selected external device. 2 4 3 1English 20 Basic Features Using the INFO button (Now & Next guide) The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video settings. The Now & Next guide shows daily LED display programme information for each channel according to the broadcasting time. x Scroll l / r to view information for a desired programme while watching the current channel. (Depending on the channels) x Scroll u / d to view information for other channels. If you want to move to the currently selected channel, press the ENTERE button. • The displayed image may differ depending on the model. No detailed information. No title 576i 4:3 SD Italian Stereo a Information 17.02 Tue 19 Jul DTV Air All Coming Soon 5 Using the Channel Menu Press the CONTENT button to select Contents Home, and then select the menu you want to use. Each screen will be displayed. • The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Contents Home Channel List Guide Media Play Schedule Manager Source R Return Guide CONTENT → Contents Home → Guide → ENTERE The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is provided by broadcasters. Using programme schedules provided by broadcasters, you can specify programmes you want to watch in advance so that the channel automatically changes to the selected programme channel at the specified time. Programme entries may appear blank or out of date depending on a channel status. Using Channel View x a Red (Sche. Mgr) : Displays the Schedule Manager. x b Green (-24 Hours): Viewing the list of programmes to be broadcasted before 24 hours. x { Yellow (+24 Hours): Viewing the list of programmes to be broadcasted after 24 hours. x } Blue (Ch. Mode): Select the type of channels you want to display on the Channel View window. x (Information): Displays details of the selected programme. x k (Page): Move to next or previous page. x E (Watch / Schedule) – When selecting the current programme, you can watch the selected programme. – When selecting the future programme, you can reserve to watch the selected programme. To cancel the schedule, press the ENTERE button again and select Cancel Schedule. Schedule Manager CONTENT → Contents Home → Schedule Manager → ENTERE You can view, modify or delete a channel you have reserved to watch. Using the Schedule Viewing You can set a desired channel to be displayed automatically at the intended time. Set the current time first to use this function. 1. Press the ENTERE button to select Schedule Manager. 2. Press the TOOLSTbutton or a button to add programme to schedule manually. The Schedule Viewing screen appears. 3. Press the u / d / l / r buttons to set the Aerial, Channel, Repeat, Date or Start Time. • The displayed image may differ depending on the model. IL MEDICO E LO STRGONE DTV Air 6 R4 DTT 16:55 - 17:55 IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE - 2 TEMPO a Sche. Mgr b -24 Hours { +24 Hours } Ch. Mode Information k Page E Watch Today 17:00 17:30 18:00 18:30 Guide 17:00 Tue 19 Jul Channel View - All No Information No Information No Information No Information IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE 1 1futech 2 24ore.tv 3 BBC World 4 Class News 5 Coming Soon 6 R4 DTT No Information TG 4 No Information 5 Coming SoonEnglish 21 Basic Features x Aerial: Select the desired antenna source. x Channel: Select the desired channel. x Repeat: Select Once, Manual, Sat~Sun, Mon~Fri or Everyday to set at your convenience. If you select Manual, you can set the day you want. ✎ The c mark indicates the date is selected. x Date: you can set desired date. ✎ It is available when you select Once in Repeat. x Start Time: You can set start time you want. ✎ On the Information screen, you can change or cancel a reserved information. x Cancel Schedule: Cancel a show you have reserved to watch. x Edit: Change a show you have reserved to watch. x Return: Return to the previous screen. Channel List CONTENT → Channel List → ENTERE You can view all the channel searched. • The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Channel List All 1 1futech 2 24ore.tv 3 BBC World 4 Class News 5 Coming Soon 6 R4 DTT IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE a1 C2 a2 C4 T Tools L Ch. Mode E Watch k Page ✎When you press the CH LIST button on the remote control, Channel List screen will be displayed at once. Using the operation buttons with the Channel List. ■ T (Tools): Press Tools button to check the following functions. x Programme View:Press the u/d buttons to select the desired programme, then press the ENTERE button. (Only for DIGITAL Channel) x Edit Favourites: Set channels you watch frequently as favourites. ✎ Select the Edit Favourites, then press the ENTERE button. – If the channel is already added to favourite channel, Edit Favourites will be shown. x Lock / Unlock: Lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed. ✎ This function is available only when the Channel Lock is set to On. ✎ The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4-digit PIN, the default of which is “0-0-0-0”. Change the PIN using the Change PIN option. x Edit Channel Name (Only for Analogue channels): Assign your own channel name. ✎ This function may not support depending on the region. x Edit Channel Number: Edit the number by pressing the number buttons desired. ✎ This function may not support depending on the region. x Delete: You can delete a channel to display the channels you want. x Information: Display the channel name, resolution, picture mode, language and so on.(Some just available for DTV) x Sort: Change the list ordered by channel name or channel number. (Only for DIGITAL Channel) x Change antenna: Switches to Air or Cable. x Edit Mode: You can select desired channels and edit it. ■ l r (Ch. Mode): Move to the type of channels you want to display on the Channel List screen. ✎ The option may differ depending on country. ■ E (Watch / Information): Watches the channel you select. / Displays details of the selected programme. ■ k (Page): Move to next or previous page. How to use Schedule Viewing in Channel List (Depending on the channels) When you set the Schedule Viewing in Channel List, you can only set the programme in Programme View. 1. Press the CH LIST button, then select a desired digital channel. 2. Press the TOOLST button and select Programme View. 3. Press the u / d buttons to select the desired programme, then press the E (Information) button. 4. Select Schedule Viewing, then press the ENTERE button when done. ✎If you want to cancel Schedule Viewing, follow steps 1 through 3. Select Cancel Schedule.English 22 Basic Features Channel Menu ¦ Retuning Channels MENUm→ Channel → ENTERE Before your television can begin memorizing the available Aerial (Air / Cable)t channels, you must specify the type of signal source that is connected to the LED display. Country (depending on the country) The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. ✎Select your country so that the LED display can correctly auto-tune the broadcasting channels. ■ Digital Channel: Change the country for digital channels. ■ Analogue Channel: Change the country for analogue channels. Auto Tuning (depending on the country) ✎Automatically allocated programme numbers may not correspond to actual or desired programme numbers. If a channel is locked using the Channel Lock function, the PIN input window appears. ■ Auto Tuning – Air / Cable: Select the antenna source to memorise. Digital & Analogue / Digital / Analogue: Select the channel source to memorise. ✎ When selecting Cable → Digital & Analogue or Digital: Provide a value to scan for cable channels. x Search Mode(Full / Network / Quick): Selects the Search Mode settings among Full / Network / Quick. x Network (Auto / Manual): Selects the Network ID setting mode among Auto or Manual. x Network ID: When Network is Manual, you can set up Network ID using the numeric buttons. x Frequency: Displays the frequency for the channel. (differs in each country) x Modulation: Displays available modulation values. x Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates. ■ Cable Search Option (depending on the country) Sets additional search options such as the frequency and symbol rate for a cable network search. – Start Frequency / Stop Frequency: Set the start or stop frequency (differs in each country). – Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates. – Modulation: Displays available modulation values. Manual Tuning Scans for a channel manually and stores in the LED display. ✎If a channel is locked using the Channel Lock function, the PIN input window appears. ■ Digital Channel Tuning: Scans for a digital channel. 1. Press the ENTERE button to select New. ✎ When selecting Aerial → Air: Channel, Frequency, Bandwidth ✎ When selecting Aerial → Cable: Frequency, Modulation, Symbol Rate 2. Press the d button to select Search. When scanning has finnished, a channel is updated in the channel list. ■ Analogue Channel Tuning: Scans for a analogue channel. 1. Press the ENTERE button to select New. 2. Set the Programme, Colour System, Sound System, Channel and Search. 3. Press the d button to select Store. When scanning has finnished, a channel is updated in the channel list. Transfer Channel List The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. Imports or exports the channel map. You should connect a USB storage to use this function. ■ Import from USB: Import channel list from USB. ■ Export to USB: Export channel list to USB. This function is available when USB is connected. ✎USB format should be FAT32. Fine Tune (analogue channels only) If the reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune the channel, as this is done automatically during the search and store operation. If the signal is weak or distorted, fine tune the channel manually. Scroll to the left or right until the image is clear. ✎Settings are applied to the channel you’re currently watching. ✎Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked with an asterisk “*” on the right-hand side of the channel number in the channel banner ✎To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset.English 23 Basic Features Picture Menu ¦ Changing the Preset Picture Mode MENUm→ Picture → Picture Mode → ENTERE Select your preferred picture type. Picture Mode t ✎When connecting a PC, the Picture Mode is only available the Standard and Entertain. ■ Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room. ■ Standard: Suitable for a normal environment. ■ Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room. ■ Entertain: Suitable for watching movies and games. ✎ It is only available when connecting a PC. ¦ Adjusting Picture Settings MENUm→ Picture → ENTERE Samsung MagicAngle Adjust screen viewing Angle to optimize screen quality according to your viewing position. ■ Samsung MagicAngle: When viewing the screen at an angle from below or above by setting the appropriate mode for each position you can obtain a similar picture quality as viewing the screen directly from the front. x Off: Select when viewing from the front position. x Lean back mode: Select when viewing from a slightly lower position. x Standing Mode: Select when viewing from the upper position. ■ Mode: Adjust screen viewing angle. ✎When Samsung MagicAngle is set to Lean back mode or Standing Mode, Gamma is not available. Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R) Your television has several setting options for picture quality control. ✎NOTE x In analogue TV, PC, AV modes of the PAL system, the Tint (G/R) function is not available. x When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to Backlight, Contrast, Brightness and Sharpness. x Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to the LED display. x Lowering picture brightness reduces power consumption. Screen Adjustment ■ Picture Size: Your cable box / satellite receiver may have its own set of screen sizes as well. However, we highly recommend you use 16:9 mode most of the time. Auto Wide: Automatically adjusts the picture size to the 16:9 aspect ratio. 16:9: Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode. Wide Zoom: Magnifies the picture size more than 4:3. ✎ Adjusts the Position by using u / d buttons. Zoom: Magnifies the 16:9 wide pictures vertically to fit the screen size. ✎ Adjusts the Zoom or Position by using u / d button. 4:3: Sets the picture to basic (4:3) mode. ✎ Do not watch in 4:3 format for a long time. Traces of borders displayed on the left, right and centre of the screen may cause image retention (screen burn) which are not covered by the warranty. Screen Fit: Displays the full image without any cut-off when HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) or Component (720p / 1080i / 1080p) signals are inputted. ✎ Adjusts the Position by using u / d / l / r button. ✎NOTE x Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary. x The available items may differ depending on the selected mode. x When connecting a PC, only 16:9 and 4:3 modes can be adjusted. x Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to an input on the LED display. x If you use the Screen Fit function with HDMI 720p input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and right as in the overscan function. ■ Zoom / Position:You can adjust picture size and position by u / d / l / r button. ✎ It's only available when picture size is set as Zoom and Wide Zoom. ✎ In Wide Zoom mode, you can only use Position adjustment. ✎ Reset: Reset the Zoom and Position to the default settings. ■ 4:3 Screen Size (16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3): Available only when picture size is set to Auto Wide. You can determine the desired picture size at the 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) size or the original size. Each European country requires different picture size. ✎ Not available in HDMI , Component, and HDMI/DVI mode.English 24 Basic Features ■ PC Screen Adjustment ✎ Available only PC mode. x Coarse / Fine: Removes or reduces picture noise. If the noise is not removed by Fine-tuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and Finetune again. After the noise has been reduced, readjust the picture so that it is aligned to the centre of screen. x Position: Adjusts the PC screen position with direction button (u / d / l / r). x Image Reset: Resets the image to default settings. Frequency values / position and fine tune are adjusted Auto Adjustmentt automatically. ✎It's only available in PC mode. Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP) Depending on the version of Windows and the video card, the actual screens on your PC may differ in which case the same basic set-up information will almost always be applied. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.) 1. Click on “Control Panel” on the Windows start menu. 2. Click on “Appearance and Themes” in the “Control Panel” window and a display dialog-box will appear. 3. Click on “Display” and a display dialog box will appear. 4. Navigate to the “Settings” tab on the display dialog-box. x The correct size setting (resolution) [Optimum: 1920 x 1080 pixels]. (T19B300: 1366 x 768 pixels) x If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct value is “60” or “60 Hz”. Otherwise, just click “OK” and exit the dialog box. Maintaining the Correct Posture when Using this Product Maintain the correct posture when using this product. x Straighten your back. x Keep a distance of 45~50 cm (15~19 inches) from your eyes to the screen. Look down at the screen and face the screen forwards. x Adjust the angle of the product so that light is not reflected onto the screen. x Keep your elbow at a right angle and keep your arm level with the back of your hand. x Keep your elbow at a right angle. x Place your heels flat on the ground while keeping your knees at an angle of 90 degrees or higher and maintain the position of your arm so that your arm is below your heart. ¦ Changing the Picture Options Advanced Settings MENUm→ Picture → Advanced Settings → ENTERE (Advanced Settings are available in Standard / Movie mode) Compared to previous models, new Samsung LED display have a more precise picture. ✎When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to White Balance. Advanced Settings RGB Only Mode Off Colour Space Native White Balance Gamma 0 Dynamic Contrast High Black Tone Off Flesh Tone 0 ■ Dynamic Contrast (Off / Low / Medium / High): Adjust the screen contrast. ■ Black Tone (Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest): Select the black level to adjust the screen depth. ■ Flesh Tone: Emphasize pink “Flesh Tone.” ■ RGB Only Mode (Off / Red / Green / Blue): Displays the Red, Green and Blue colour for making fine adjustments to the hue and saturation. ■ Colour Space (Auto / Native): Adjust the range of colours available to create the image. ■ White Balance: Adjust the colour temperature for a more natural picture. R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue) darkness. R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue) brightness. Reset: Resets the White Balance to it’s default settings. ■ Gamma: Adjust the primary colour intensity. ■ Motion Lighting (Off / On): Reduce power consumption by brightness control.English 25 Basic Features Picture Options MENUm→ Picture → Picture Options → ENTERE ✎When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to the Colour Tone. Picture Options Colour Tone Standard Digital Noise Filter Auto MPEG Noise Filter Auto HDMI Black Level Low Film Mode Off ■ Colour Tone (Cool / Standard / Warm1 / Warm2) ✎ Warm1 or Warm2 will be deactivated when the picture mode is Dynamic. ✎ Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to an input on the LED display. ■ Digital Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto / Auto Visualisation): If the broadcast signal received by your LED display is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Filter feature to reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the screen. ✎ When the signal is weak, try other options until the best picture is displayed. Auto Visualisation: When changing analogue channels, displays signal strength. ✎ Only available for analogue channels. ✎ When bar is green, you are receiving the best possible signal. ■ MPEG Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto): Reduces MPEG noise to provide improved picture quality. ■ HDMI Black Level (Low / Normal): Selects the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. ✎ Available only in HDMI mode (RGB signals). ■ Film Mode (Off / Auto1 / Auto2): Sets the LED display to automatically sense and process film signals from all sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality. ✎ Available in TV mode, HDMI (1080i). ✎ If the screen does not seem natural, change its option to Off / Auto1 / Auto2 in Film Mode. Reset Picture (Yes / No) Resets your current picture mode to its default settings. Sound Menu ¦ Changing the Preset Sound Mode MENUm→ Sound → Sound Mode → ENTERE Sound Mode t ■ Standard: Selects the normal sound mode. ■ Music: Emphasizes music over voices. ■ Movie: Provides the best sound for movies. ■ Clear Voice: Emphasizes voices over other sounds. ■ Amplify: Increase the intensity of high-frequency sound to allow a better listening experience for the hearing impaired. ✎If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker , Sound Mode is disabled. ¦ Adjusting Sound Settings Sound Effect MENUm→ Sound → Sound Effect → ENTERE (standard sound mode only)
This function provides a virtual 5.1 channel surround sound ■ SRS TruSurround HD(Off / On) t experience through a pair of speakers using HRTF (Head Related Transfer Function) technology. ■ SRS TruDialog (Off / On)
This function allows you to increase the intensity of a voice over background music or sound effects so that dialog can be heard more clearly. ■ Equalizer
Adjusts the sound mode. – Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker. 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Bandwidth Adjustment): Adjusts the level of specific bandwidth frequencies. – Reset: Resets the equaliser to its default settings.English 26 Basic Features ¦ Sound Systems, Etc. MENUm→ Sound → ENTERE Broadcast Audio Options ■ Audio Language
(digital channels only)
Change the default value for audio languages. ✎ The available language may differ depending on the broadcast. ■ Audio Format
(digital channels only)
Select the audio format. ■ Audio Description
(not available in all locations) (digital channels only)
This function handles the Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description) which is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. ✎ Audio Description (Off / On): Turn the audio description function on or off. ✎ Volume: Adjust the audio description volume. Additional Settings (digital channels only) ■ DTV Audio Level (MPEG / HE-AAC): This function allows you to reduce the disparity of a voice signal (which is one of the signals received during a digital TV broadcast) to a desired level. ✎ According to the type of broadcast signal, MPEG / HE-AAC can be adjusted between -10dB and 0dB. ✎ To increase or decrease the volume, adjust between the range 0 and -10 respectively. ■ SPDIF Output: SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace) is used to provide digital sound, reducing interference going to speakers and various digital devices such as a DVD player. – Audio Format: You can select the Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format. ✎ The available Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format may differ depending on the input source. – Audio Delay: Correct audio-video sync problems, when watching TV or video, and when listening to digital audio output using an external device such as an AV receiver (0ms ~ 250ms). ✎ It's not available for TB300 series. ■ Dolby Digital Comp (Line / RF): This function minimizes signal disparity between a dolby digital signal and a voice signal (i.e. MPEG Audio, HE-AAC, ATV Sound). ✎ Select Line to obtain dynamic sound, and RF to reduce the difference between loud and soft sounds at night time. Line: Set the output level for signals greater or less than -31dB (reference) to either -20dB or -31dB. RF: Set the output level for signals greater or less than -20dB (reference) to either -10dB or -20dB. Speaker Settings ■ Speaker Select (External Speaker / TV Speaker):A sound echo may occur due to a difference indecoding speed between the main speaker and theaudio receiver. In this case, set the TV to External Speaker. ✎ When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the volume and MUTE buttons will not operate and the sound settings will be limited. ✎ When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker. x TV Speaker: Off, External Speaker: On ✎ When Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker. x TV Speaker: On, External Speaker: On ✎ If there is no video signal, both speakers will be mute. ✎ It's not available for TB300 series. ■ Auto Volume (Off / Normal / Night): To equalize the volume level on each channel, set to Normal. Night: This mode provides an improved sound experience compared to Normal mode, making almost no noise. It is useful at night. Reset Sound (Yes / No) Reset all sound settings to the factory defaults. ¦ Selecting the Sound Mode t When you set to Dual fg, the current sound mode is displayed on the screen. Audio Type Dual f-g Default A2 Stereo Mono Mono Automatic Stereo Stereo ↔ Mono change Dual Dual f ↔ Dual g Dual f NICAM Stereo Mono Mono Automatic Stereo Mono ↔ Stereo change Dual Mono ↔ Dual f  Dual g  Dual f ✎If the Stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching, occurs, then switch to the Mono. ✎Only activated in stereo sound signal. ✎Only available when the input Source is set to TV.English 27 Basic Features System Menu ¦ Setting the Time MENUm→ System → ENTERE Time ■ Clock: Setting the clock is for using various timer features of the LED display. ✎ The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button. ✎ If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again. Clock Mode (Auto / Manual) x Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time from a digital channel. ✎ The antenna must be connected in order to set the time automatically. x Manual: Set the current time manually. ✎ Depending on the broadcast station and signal, the auto time set up may not be correct. In this case, set the time manually. Clock Set: Set the Day, Month, Year, Hour and Minute manually. ✎ Available only when Clock Mode is set to Manual. ✎ You can set the Day, Month, Year, Hour and Minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. Time Zone (Auto / Manual) (depending on the country): Select your time zone. ✎ This function is only available when the Clock Mode is set to Auto. – GMT(GMT-3:00~GMT-1:00 / GMT / GMT+1:00~GMT+ 12:00): Selects your time zone. ✎ This function is only available when the Time Zone is set to Manual. – DST(Daylight Saving Time) (Off / On): Switches the Daylight Saving Time function on or of off. ✎ This function is only available when the Time Zone is set to Manual. Using the Sleep Timer ■ Sleep Timer t: Automatically shuts off the LED display after a preset period of time. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes). ✎ To cancel Sleep Timer, select Off. Setting the On / Off Timer ■ On Timer On Timer 1 / On Timer 2 / On Timer 3: Three different on timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first. On Timer 1 Setup Off Time 0:00 Volume 20 Source TV Aerial DTV Channel 1 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat R Return Close Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual to set at your convenience. If you select Manual, you can set up the day you want to activate the timer. ✎ The c mark indicates the day you've selected. Time: Set the hour and minute. Volume: Set the desired volume level. Source: Select a desired input source when the LED display is turned on automatically. (USB can be selected only when a USB device is connected to the LED display) Aerial (when the Source is set to TV): Select ATV or DTV. Channel (when the Source is set to TV): Select the desired channel. Music / Photo (when the Source is set to USB): Select a folder in the USB device containing music or photo files to be played when the LED display is turned on automatically. ✎ NOTE x If there is no music file on the USB device or the folder containing a music file is not selected, the Timer function does not operate correctly. x When there is only one photo file in the USB, the Slide Show will not play. x If a folder name is too long, the folder cannot be selected. x Each USB you use is assigned its own folder. When using more than one of the same type of USB, make sure the folders assigned to each USB have different names. x It is recommended that you use a USB memory stick and a multi card reader when using On Timer. x The On Timer function may not work with USB devices with a built-in battery, MP3 players, or PMPs made by some manufacturers because these devices take a long time to be recognized.English 28 Basic Features ■ Off Timer Off Timer 1 / Off Timer 2 / Off Timer 3: Three different off timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first. Off Timer 1 Setup Off Time 0:00 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat R Return Close Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual to set at your convenience. If you select Manual, you can set up the day you want to activate the timer. ✎ The c mark indicates the day you've selected. Time: Set the hour and minute. ¦ Locking Programmes MENUm→ System → Security → ENTERE Security ✎The PIN input screen appears before the setup screen. ✎Enter your 4-digit PIN, the default of which is “0-0-0-0”. Change the PIN using the Change PIN option. ■ Channel Lock (Off / On): Lock channels in Channel Manager, to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme. ✎ Available only when the input Source is set to TV. ■ Program Rating Lock (depending on the country): Prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme with a user-defined 4-digit PIN code. If selected channel is locked, the “\” symbol will be displayed. ✎ The items of Program Rating Lock differs depending on the country. ■ Change PIN: The Change PIN screen will appear. Choose any 4 digits for your PIN and enter them. Change your personal ID number required to set up the LED display. Re-enter the same 4 digits. When the Confirm screen disappears, your PIN has been memorised. ¦ Economical Solutions MENUm→ System → Eco Solution → ENTERE Eco Solution ■ tEnergy Saving (Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off) : This adjusts the brightness of the LED display in order to reduce power consumption. If you select Picture Off, the screen is turned off, but the sound remains on. Press any button except volume button to turn on the screen. ■ No-Signal Power Off (Off / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min): To avoid unnecessary energy consumption, set how long you want the LED display to remain on if it’s not receiving a signal. ✎ Disabled when the PC is in power saving mode. ■ Auto Power Off (Off / On): Saves power by turning LED display off automatically when no user operation is received for 4 hours. ¦ Other Features MENUm→ System → ENTERE Language ■ Menu Language: Set the menu language. ■ Teletext Language: Set a desired language for teletext. ✎ English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. ■ Preferred Language (Primary Audio / Secondary Audio / Primary Subtitle / Secondary Subtitle): Select a language, which will be the default language when a channel is selected. Subtitle Use this menu to set the Subtitle mode. ■ Subtitle (Off / On): Switches subtitles on or off. ■ Subtitle Mode (Normal / Hearing Impaired): Sets the subtitle mode. ■ Subtitle Language: Sets the subtitle language. ✎ If the programme you are watching does not support the Hearing Impaired function, Preferred automatically activates even if the Hearing Impaired mode is selected. ✎ English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast.English 29 Basic Features Digital Text (Disable / Enable) (UK only) If the programme broadcasts with digital text, this feature is enabled. Auto Protection Time ■ Off / 2 hours / 4 hours / 8 hours / 10 hours: If the screen remains idle with a still image for a certain period of time defined by the user, the screen saver is activated to prevent the formation of ghost images on the screen. General ■ Max. Power Saving (Off / On): Turn off PC monitor when PC is not used for certain length of time to reduce power consumption. ■ Game Mode (Off / On): When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by selecting game mode. ✎NOTE x Precautions and limitations for game mode – To disconnect the game console and connect another external device, set Game Mode to Off in the setup menu. – If you display the LED display menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly. x Game Mode is not available when the input source is set to TV or PC. x After connecting the game console, set Game Mode to On. Unfortunately, you may notice reduced picture quality. x If Game Mode is On: – Picture mode is set to Standard and Sound mode is set to Movie. ■ Panel Lock (Off / On): Lock or unlock all the keys on the front panel at once. When Panel Lock is on, none of the keys on the front panel operate. ■ Boot Logo (Off / On): Display Samsung logo when the LED display is turned on. Common Interface ■ CI Menu: This enables the user to select from the CAMprovided menu. Select the CI Menu based on the menu PC Card. ■ Application Info: View information on the CAM inserted into the CI slot and on the “CI or CI+ CARD” which is inserted into the CAM. You can install the CAM anytime whether the LED display is on or off. 1. Purchase a CI CAM module at your nearest dealer or by phone. 2. Firmly insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the CAM in the direction of the arrow. 3. Insert the CAM with the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the common interface slot, in the direction of the arrow so that it aligns parallel with the slot. 4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel. ¦ Picture In Picture (PIP) MENUm→ System → PIP → ENTERE You can watch the LED display tuner and one external video PIP t source simultaneously. PIP (Picture-in-Picture) does not function in the same mode. ✎NOTE x For PIP sound, refer to the Sound Select instructions. x If you turn the LED display off while watching in PIP mode, the PIP window will disappear. x You may notice that the picture in the PIP window becomes slightly unnatural when you use the main screen to view a game or karaoke. x While Program Rating Lock is in operation, the PIP function cannot be used. x PIP settings Main picture Sub picture HDMI, HDMI(PC), Component, PC TV ■ PIP (Off / On): Activate or deactivate the PIP function. ■ Channel: Select the channel for the sub-screen. ■ Size (Õ / Ã): Select a size for the sub-picture. ■ Position (à / – / — / œ): Select a position for the sub-picture. ■ Sound Select (Main / Sub): You can choose the desired sound (Main / Sub) in PIP mode. ¦ DivX® Video On Demand Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect to the DivX web site and register, you can download the VOD registration file. If you play the VOD registration using Media contents, the registration is completed. ✎For more information on DivX® VOD, visit “http://vod.divx. com”.English 30 Basic Features Support Menu MENUm→ Support → ENTERE Self Diagnosis ✎Self Diagnosis might take few seconds, this is part of the normal operation of the LED display ■ Picture Test (Yes / No): Use to check for picture problems. Yes: If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern, select Yes. There may be a problem with the LED display. Contact Samsung’s Call Centre for assistance. No: If the test pattern is properly displayed, select No. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. ■ Sound Test (Yes / No): Use the built-in melody sound to check for sound problems. Yes: If you can hear sound only from one speaker or not at all during the sound test, select Yes. There may be a problem with the LED display. Contact Samsung’s Call Centre for assistance. No: If you can hear sound from the speakers, select No. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. ■ Signal Information: (digital channels only) An HD channel’s reception quality is either perfect or the channels are unavailable. Adjust your antenna to increase signal strength. ■ Reset: Restores all settings to factory defaults except network settings. Software Upgrade Software Upgrade can be performed via a broadcasting signal or downloading the latest firmware from “www.samsung.com,” to a USB memory device. Current Version the software already installed in the LED display. ✎Software is represented as “Year/Month/Day_Version”. Software Upgrade By USB By Channel Alternative Software Standby Mode Upgrade 2 hours later Installing the Latest Version ■ By USB: Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade file, downloaded from “www.samsung.com,” into the TV. Please be careful not to disconnect the power or remove the USB drive until upgrades are complete. The TV will be turned off and on automatically after completing the firmware upgrade. When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will return to their default settings. We advise you to write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade. ■ By Channel: Upgrade the software using the broadcasting signal. ✎ If the function is selected during the software transmission period, software will be automatically searched and downloaded. ✎ The time required to download the software is determined by the signal status. ■ Alternative Software: Replace the current software with the alternative. ■ Standby Mode Upgrade (Off / 1 hour later / 2 hours later / 00:00 / 02:00 / 12:00 / 14:00): A manual upgrade will be automatically performed at selected time. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the screen may be turned on slightly for the LED product. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the software upgrade is complete. Contact Samsung View this information when your LED display does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software. You can find information regarding our call centres, and how to download products and software. Contents Home You can enjoy useful and various contents. TV Side USB DriveEnglish 31 Advanced Features Enjoy videos, photos, music files saved on a USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) device. 1. Press the CONTENT button. 2. Press the l / r button to select desired menu (Media Play), then press the ENTERE button. CONTENT → Media Play → ENTERE Using the Media Play ¦ Connecting a USB Device 1. Turn on your TV. 2. Connect a USB device containing photo and music files to the USB jack on the side of the TV. 3. When USB is connected to the TV, popup window appears. Then you can select Device connected. ✎It might not work properly with unlicenced multimedia files. ✎Need-to-Know List before using Media Play. x MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported. x The file system supports FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS. x Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV. x Media Play only supports USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices. MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported). Devices should be connected directly to the TV’s USB port. x USB (HDD) is not supported. x Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss. x Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading. x The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen. x The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360 x 8640 pixels. x For unsupported or corrupted files, the “Not Supported File Format” message is displayed. x MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a technology that supports the creation, distribution and management of the content in an integrated and comprehensive way, including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers, the prevention of the illegal copying of contents, as well as managing billings and settlements. x If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time. x If more than two MSC devices are connected, some of them may not be recognized. A USB device that requires high power (more than 500mA or 5V) may not be supported. x If an over-power warning message is displayed while you are connecting or using a USB device, the device may not be recognized or may malfunction. Media Play / Videos / 3.23GB Free / 3.55GB Cruzer Blade Videos Photos Music R Return • The displayed image may differ depending on the model. TV Side USB DriveEnglish 32 Advanced Features x If the TV has been no input during time set in Auto Protection Time, the Screensaver will run. x The power-saving mode of some external hard disk drives may be released automatically when connected to the TV. x If a USB extension cable is used, the USB device may not be recognized or the files on the device may not be read. x If a USB device connected to the TV is not recognized, the list of files on the device is corrupted or a file in the list is not played, connect the USB device to the PC, format the device and check the connection. x Media Play only supports sequential jpeg format. ¦ Screen Display Move to the desired file using the u / d / l / r buttons and then press the ENTERE button. The file is played. Media Play screen may differ depending on the way to enter the screen. Contents mode: You can select the desired Content Category. Information: Displays the selected content category (Music, for example), device (USB drive,for example), folder/file name and page. Displays the selected file information. Upper Folder Video_02 1.Jan.2012 Video_02.AVI 1.Jan.2012 17.6MB Video_03 1.Jan.2012 Video_04 1.Jan.2012 Video_05 1.Jan.2012 Video_06 1.Jan.2012 Video_07 1.Jan.2012 Video_08 1.Jan.2012 Video_01 1.Jan.2012 Media Play / Videos / Cruzer.../Video_02.AVI 2 / 8 �µ Page Move E Play T Tools R Return Operation Buttons • �Turn to the previous page. Only available in Music. • µTurn to the next page. Only available in Music. • E Play: Play the media file. • T Tools: Displays the option menu. • R Return: Move to the previous step. • The displayed image may differ depending on the model.English 33 Advanced Features Videos Playing Video 1. Press the l / r / u / d button to select the desired video in the file list. 2. Press the ENTERE button or ∂ (Play) button. x The selected file name is displayed on the top with its playing time. x If video time information is unknown, play time and progress bar are not displayed. x During video playback, you can search using l and r button. x You can use π (REW) and µ (FF) buttons during playback. ✎ In this mode, you can enjoy movie clips contained on a Game, but you cannot play the Game itself. • The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Supported Subtitle Formats – External Name Extension MPEG-4 Timed text .ttxt SAMI .smi SubRip .srt SubViewer .sub Micro DVD .sub or .txt SubStation Alpha .ssa Advanced SubStation Alpha .ass Powerdivx .psb – Internal Name Container Xsub AVI SubStation Alpha MKV Advanced SubStation Alpha MKV SubRip MKV MPEG-4 Timed text MP4English 34 Advanced Features Supported Video Formats File Extension Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bit rate (Mbps) Comments Audio Codec *.avi *.mkv *.asf *.wmv *.mp4 *.3gp *.vro *.mpg *.mpeg *.ts *.tp *.trp *.m2ts *.mts *.divx AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GP VRO VOB PS TS DivX 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920 x 1080 30 20 [40] GMC Not Support AC3 LPCM ADMPCM(IMA, MS) AAC HE-AAC WMA DD+ MPEG(MP3) DTS Core Vorbis MPEG4 SP / ASP H.264 BP / MP / HP Not Include FMO / ASO / RS Support BP / MP / HP Level 4.1 H.263 Profile3, restricted up to SD resolution Motion JPEG 640 x 480 10 Window Media Video v9 1920 x 1080 20 [40] VC1 SP / MP / A P L3 Support, L4 Not Support Simple Profile Medium Level Main Profile High Level Advanced Profile Level 3 WMV9 support MPEG2 Hight Profile High Level MPEG1 MPEG-1 except D-pictureEnglish 35 Advanced Features Other Restrictions ✎NOTE x If there are problems with the contents of a codec, the codec will not be supported. x If the information for a Container is incorrect and the file is in error, the Container will not be able to play correctly. x Sound or video may not work if the contents have a standard bitrate/frame rate above the compatible Frame/ sec listed in the table above. x If the Index Table is in error, the Seek (Jump) function is not supported. x You may experience file stuttering while playing a video through a network connection. Name Format x Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1 x H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 and AVCHD are not supported. x MPEG4 SP, ASP: – Below 1280 x 720: 60 frame max – Above 1280 x 720: 30 frame max x GMC 2 over is not supported. x Supports up to WMA 7, 8, 9, STD x WMA 9 PRO does not support 2 channel excess multi channel or lossless audio. x WMA sampling rate 22050Hz mono is not supported. Photos Viewing a Photo (or Slide Show) 1. Press the u / d / l / r button to select the desired photo in the file list. 2. Press the ENTERE button. – When a selected photo is displayed, press the ENTERE button to start the slide show. – During the slide show, all files in the file list will be displayed in order. ✎Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the Background Music is set to On. ✎The Background Music cannot be changed until the BGM has finished loading. • The displayed image may differ depending on the model. 0801181247070.JPG 1.Jan.2012 663.0KB 1920 x 1080 �µPage Move E Play T Tools R Return Media Play / Photos / Cruzer... / Photos / 0801181... .JPG 7 / 1000 Upper Folder Supported Picture Formats File Extension Format Resolution *.jpg JPEG 15360 x 8640 *.bmp BMP 1920 x 1080 *.mpo MPO 15360 x 8640English 36 Advanced Features Music Playing Music 1. Press the u / d button to select the desired Music in the file list. 2. Press the ENTERE button. ✎Only displays the files with the file extension in following supported music formats list. Other file extensions are not displayed, even if they are saved on the same USB device. ✎If the sound is abnormal when playing MP3 files, adjust the Equaliser in the Sound menu. (An over-modulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem.) • The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Media Play / Music / Cruzer... / Music / Music_01.mp3 Music_01 Singer 1 Music_02 Singer 2 Music_01 Singer 1 2003 Fallen Other 2:36 / 5:00 Music_03 Singer 3 Music_04 Singer 4 Music_05 Singer 5 Music_06 Singer 6 Music_07 Singer 7 Music_08 Singer 8 Music_09 Singer 9 Upper Folder b{ Page Move EPlay T Tools R Return Playing selected music 1. Press the TOOLST button and select Play Selection. 2. Select the desired music. ✎ The c mark appears to the left of the selected files. 3. Press the TOOLST button and select Play Selection. ✎ You can select or deselect all music pressing the Select All / Deselect All. Supported Music Formats File Extension Type Codec *.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 *.m4a *.mpa *.aac *.3ga MPEG4 AAC *.flac FLAC FLAC *.ogg OGG Vorbis *.wma WMA WMAEnglish 37 Advanced Features ¦ Media Play - Additional Functions Videos/Photos/Music Play Option menu Press the TOOLST button and you can make the following operations. Category Operations Videos Photos Music Shuffle Mode You can play the music randomly. > Repeat Mode You can play media files repeatedly. > > Picture Mode You can adjust the picture setting. > > Sound Mode You can adjust the sound setting. > > > Start Slide Show / STOP Slide Show You can start or pause a Slide Show. > Slide Show Speed You can select the slide show speed during the slide show. > Background Music You can on/off background music when watching a Slide Show. > Background Music Setting You can select background music when watching a Slide Show. > Zoom You can zoom into images in full screen mode. > Rotate You can rotate images in full screen mode. > Information You can see detailed information about the played file. > > > Play Selection You can play the items what you selected. > > > Title Search You can move directly to another Title. > Time Search You can search the movie using l and r buttons at intervals of 1 minute. > Picture Size You can adjust the picture size to your preference. > Subtitle You can set the subtitle On / Off. > Subtitle Settings Play a video file with captions displayed. This option is available only when the caption file name matches the video file name. > Audio language View a video in a supported language of your choice. The option is available only when a stream-type file that supports multiple audio formats is played. >English 38 Other Information Analogue Channel Teletext Feature The index page of the Teletext service gives you information on how to use the service. For Teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some pages may not be displayed. ✎You can change Teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. 1 / (Teletext on/mix/off): Activates the Teletext mode for the current channel. Press the button twice to overlap the Teletext mode with the current broadcasting screen. Press it one more time to exit teletext. 2 8 (store): Stores the Teletext pages. 3 6 (index): Displays the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing Teletext. 4 4 (size): Displays the teletext on the upper half of the screen in double-size. To move the text to the lower half of the screen, press it again. For normal display, press it once again. 5 9 (hold): Holds the display at the current page, in the case that there are several secondary pages that follow automaticially. To undo, press it again. 6 Colour buttons (red, green, yellow, blue): If the FASTEXT system is used by the broadcasting company, the different topics on a Teletext page are colour-coded and can be selected by pressing the coloured buttons. Press the colour corresponding to the topic of your choice. A new colour-coded page is displayed. Items can be selected in the same way. To display the previous or next page, press the corresponding coloured button. 7 0 (mode): Selects the Teletext mode (LIST/ FLOF). If pressed during LIST mode, switches the mode to List save mode. In List save mode, you can save a Teletext page into a list using the 8(store) button. 8 1 (sub-page): Displays the available sub-page. 9 2 (page up): Displays the next Teletext page. 0 3 (page down): Displays the previous Teletext page. ! 5 (reveal): Displays the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display the normal screen, press it again. @ 7 (cancel): Shrinks the Teletext display to overlap with the current broadcast. Typical Teletext page Part Contents A Selected page number. B Broadcasting channel identity. C Current page number or search indications. D Date and time. E Text. F Status information. FASTEXT information. 7 8 9 0 ! @ 3 1 4 5 6 2English 39 Other Information Attaching a Wall Mount/Desktop Stand Preparing before installing Wall-Mount/Desktop Stand 1. Turn the product off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. 2. Place a soft cloth or cushion on a flat surface to protect the panel and place the product face down. 3. Hold the main body of the product with your hand. Pull the stand in the direction of the arrow as shown in the figure to separate it. Attaching a Wall Mount/Desktop Stand 1 A 2 3 4 A B Wall mount kit/desktop stand (not supplied) A Wall/Desktop Stand Mount B [ Caution Important For the installation of Wall-mount, please don’t use screws longer than 14mm(L14) of longitude. 4. Align wall mount/desktop stand to the Monitor/LED display and firmly fix the wall mount/desktop stand by fastening the screw. 5. Align the groove of the part of the product that is to be connected to the stand with the groove in the stand (desk-top stand, wall mount stand or another stand) and firmly fix the stand by fastening the screw.English 40 Other Information ✎NOTE x If you use screws that are longer than the standard specifications, the inside of the product may be damaged. x For wall mounts that are not compatible with the standard VESA specifications, the length of the screw may differ depending on the corresponding specifications. x Avoid using screws that are incompatible with the standard VESA specifications and avoid assembling them using excessive force. This may result in damage to the product or injury due to the product falling. Samsung shall not be held liable for any damage or injury. x Samsung shall not be held liable for any damage to the product or injury caused by using a wall mount/desktop stand that is not compatible with the specifications or due to an installation not performed by an authorized installation engineer. x When installing the product using a wall mount, purchase a wall mount that provides at least 10 cm (3.93 inches) of space from the wall. x Use the wall mount according to the international specifications. Anti-theft Kensington Lock The Kensington Lock is not supplied by Samsung. It is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public place. The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington Lock for additional information on proper use. ✎Please find a “K” icon on the rear of the LED display. A kensington slot is beside the “K” icon. To lock the product, follow these steps: 1. Wrap the Kensington lock cable around a large, stationary object such as desk or chair. 2. Slide the end of the cable with the lock attached through the looped end of the Kensington lock cable. 3. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the product (1). 4. Lock the lock. 1 ✎These are general instructions. For exact instructions, see the User manual supplied with the locking device. ✎The locking device has to be purchased separately. ✎The location of the Kensington slot may be different depending on the LED display model.English 41 Other Information Troubleshooting If you have any questions about the LED display, first refer to this list. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit “www. samsung.com,” then click on Support, or contact the call centre listed on the back-cover of this manual. Issues Solutions and Explanations Picture Quality First of all, please perform the Picture Test and confirm that your LED display is properly displaying test image. (go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture Test) If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may caused by the source or signal. The LED display image does not look as good as it did in the store. • If you have an analogue cable/set top box, upgrade to a digital set top box. Use HDMI to deliver HD (high definition) picture quality. • Cable/Satellite subscribers: Try HD stations from the channel line up. • Antenna connection: Try HD stations after performing Auto tuning. ✎ Many HD channels are up scaled from SD(Standard Definition) contents. • Adjust the Cable/Set top box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p. • Make sure you are watching the LED display at the minimum recommended distance based on the size and definition of the signal. The picture is distorted: macroblock error, small block, dots, pixelization • Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially in fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. • Low signal level or bad quality can cause picture distortion. This is not a LED display issue. • Mobile phones used close to the LED display (cca up to 1m) may cause noise in picture on analogue and digital LED display. There is poor colour or brightness. • Adjust the Picture options in the LED display menu. (go to Picture Mode / Colour / Brightness / Sharpness) • Adjust Energy Saving option in the LED display menu. (go to MENU - System - Eco Solution - Energy Saving) • Try resetting the picture to view the default picture settings. (go to MENU - Picture - Reset Picture) There is a dotted line on the edge of the screen. • If the picture size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9. • Change cable/satellite box resolution. When changing channels, the picture freezes or is distorted or delayed. • If connected with a cable box, please try to reset the cable box. Reconnect the AC cord and wait until the cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes. • Set the output resolution of the cable box to 1080i or 720p. Sound Quality First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your LED display audio is properly operating. (go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test) If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal. There is no sound or the sound is too low at maximum volume. • Please check the volume of the device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) connected to your LED display. The picture is good but there is no sound. • If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, LED display set does not support audio. • Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable. • If your LED display has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it. The speakers are making an inappropriate noise. • For antenna or cable connections, check the signal strength. Low signal level may cause sound distortion. No Picture, No Video The LED display will not turn on. • Make sure the AC power cord is securely plugged in to the wall outlet and the LED display. • Make sure the wall outlet is working. • Try pressing the POWER button on the LED display to make sure the problem is not the remote. If the LED display turns on, refer to “The remote control does not work” below. The LED display turns off automatically. • Ensure the Sleep Timer is set to Off in the Time menu. • If your PC is connected to the LED display, check your PC power settings. • Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the LED display. • When watching LED display from an antenna or cable connection, the LED display will turn off after 10 ~ 15 minutes if there is no signal.English 42 Other Information Issues Solutions and Explanations There is no picture/video. • Check cable connections (remove and reconnect all cables connected to the LED display and external devices). • Set your external devices’ (Cable/Set top Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video outputs to match the connections to the LED display input. For example, if an external device’s output is HDMI, it should be connected to an HDMI input on the LED display. • Make sure your connected devices are powered on. • Be sure to select the LED display correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the LED display remote. • Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable. RF(Cable/Antenna) Connection The LED display is not receiving all channels. • Make sure the Antenna cable is connected securely. • Please try Setup (Initial setup) to add available channels to the channel list. Go to MENU - System - Setup (Initial setup) and wait for all available channels to be stored. • Verify the Antenna is positioned correctly. The picture is distorted: macro block error small block, dots, pixelization. • Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion, especially on fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. • A low signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a LED display issue. Others The picture will not display in full screen. • HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying up scaled SD (4:3) contents. • Black bars on the top and bottom will appear during movies that have aspect ratios different from your LED display. • Adjust the picture size options on your external device or LED display to full screen. The remote control does not work. • Replace the remote control batteries with the poles (+/–) in the right direction. • Clean the sensor’s transmission window on the remote. • Try pointing the remote directly at the LED display from 5~6 feet away. The cable/set top box remote control doesn’t turn the LED display on or off, or adjust the volume. • Programme the Cable/Set top box remote control to operate the LED display. Refer to the Cable/Set user manual for the SAMSUNG LED display code. A “Mode Not Supported” message appears. • Check the supported resolution of the LED display, and adjust the external device’s output resolution accordingly. There is a plastic smell from the LED display. • This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. The LED display Signal Information is unavailable in the Self Diagnosis Test menu. • This function is only available with digital channels from an Antenna / RF / Coax connection. LED display is tilted to the right or left side. • Remove the stand base from the LED display and reassemble it. There are difficulties assembling the stand base. • Make sure the LED display is placed on a flat surface. If you can not remove the screws from the LED display, please use a magnetized screw driver. The Channel menu is grey out (unavailable). • The Channel menu is only available when the LED display source is selected. Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or every time the LED display is turned off. • If the LED display is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30 minutes. Change the settings from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Setup (Initial setup) procedure. Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, and go to MENU → System → Setup (Initial setup) → ENTERE. You have intermittent loss of audio or video. • Check the cable connections and reconnect them. • Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If mounting the LED display to the wall, we recommend using cables with 90 degree connectors. You see small particles when you look closely at the edge of the frame of the LED display. • This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect.English 43 Other Information Issues Solutions and Explanations The PIP menu is not available. • PIP functionality is only available when you are using a HDMI source. You turned the LED display off 45 minutes ago, and it turned on again. • It is normal. The LED display operates the OTA (Over The Aerial) function itself to upgrade firmware downloaded whilst your watching LED display. The message “Scramble signal” or “Weak Signal/No Signal” appears. • If you are using a CAM CARD (CI/CI+), check that it is installed into the common interface slot. • If there is still a problem, pull the CAM CARD out of the LED display and insert it into the slot again. There are recurrent picture/sound issues. • Check and change the signal/source. A reaction may occur between the rubber cushion pads on the base stand and the top finish of some furniture. • To prevent this, use felt pads on any surface of the LED display that comes in direct contact with furniture. ✎This panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. However, there may be a few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product. ¦ Storage and Maintenance ✎If you attched some stickers on the LED display screen, it remains some debris after removing the sticker. Please clean it to watch LED display. ✎The exterior and screen of the product can get scratched during cleaning. Be sure to wipe the exterior and screen carefully using the cloth provided or a soft cloth to prevent scratches. Do not spray water or a cleaning agent directly onto the product. Any liquid that goes into the product may cause a failure, fire, or electric shock. Clean the product with a soft cloth dapped in a small amount of water. [CAUTION If the height of " A" on one side is different from the other side, adjust the heights.English 44 Other Information ¦ Licence TheaterSound HD, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TheaterSound HD technology is incorporated under licence from SRS Labs, Inc. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2.0 Channel Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. (Only available in TB300 series) Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. (Only available in TB350 series) Open source licence notice In the case of using open source software, Open Source licence are available on the product menu. Open Source Licence Notice is written only English. ¦ WEEE Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system.English 45 Other Information Specifications Environmental considerations Operating Temperature : 50°F ~ 104°F (10°C ~ 40°C) Humidity : 10 % ~ 80 %, non-condensing Storage Temperature : -4°F ~ 113°F (-20°C ~ 45°C) Humidity : 5 % ~ 95 %, non-condensing Tilt -1°(±2°) ~ 20°(±2°) LED display System Analogue: B/G, D/K, L, I (Depending on your country selection) Digital: DVB-T/DVB-C Colour/Video System Analogue: PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43, NTSC-3.58, PAL60 Digital: MPEG-2 MP@ML, MPEG-4, H.264/AVC MP@L3, MP@L4.0, HP@L4.0 Sound System BG, DK, L, NICAM, MPEG1, DD, DD+, HEAAC HDMI IN Video: 1080 24p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 480p Audio: 2Ch Linear PCM 32/44.1/48kHz, 16/20/24bits. Model Name T19B300 T22B300 T24B300 T27B300 Screen Size (Diagonal) 18.5 inches (47 cm) 21.5 inches (55 cm) 23.6 inches (60 cm) 27 inches (69 cm) Display Resolution 1366 x 768 @ 60Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60Hz Sound (Output) 5W × 2 Dimensions (WxDxH) (Without Stand) 444.7 x 48.5 x 278.2 mm (17.5 x 1.9 x 11.0 inches) 509.7 x 47 x 318.2 mm (20.1 x 1.9 x 12.5 inches) 569.2 x 49 x 349.4 mm (22.4 x 1.9 x 13.8 inches) 643.3 x 49 x 397.9 mm (25.3 x 1.9 x 15.7 inches) (With Stand) 444.7 x 187 x 356.4 mm (17.5 x 7.4 x 14.0 inches) 509.7 x 195 x 396.6 mm (20.1 x 7.7 x 15.6 inches) 569.2 x 195 x 428 mm (22.4 x 7.7 x 16.9 inches) 643.3 x 252 x 476.5 mm (25.3 x 9.9 x 18.8 inches) Weight (Without Stand) 2.95 kg (6.5 Ibs) 3.7 kg (8.2 Ibs) 4.25 kg (9.4 Ibs) 5.1 kg (11.2 Ibs) (With Stand) 3.2 kg (7.1 Ibs) 3.95 kg (8.7 Ibs) 4.5 kg (9.9 Ibs) 5.6 kg (12.3 Ibs) Model Name T22B350 T23B350 T24B350 Screen Size (Diagonal) 21.5 inches (55 cm) 23 inches (58 cm) 24 inches (61 cm) Display Resolution 1920 x 1080 @ 60Hz Sound (Output) 5W × 2 Dimensions (WxDxH) (Without Stand) 509.7 x 47 x 318.2 mm (20.1 x 1.9 x 12.5 inches) 547.5 x 49 x 337.9 mm (21.6 x 1.9 x 13.3 inches) 569.2 x 49 x 349.4 mm (22.4 x 1.9 x 13.8 inches) (With Stand) 509.7 x 195 x 396.6 mm (20.1 x 7.7 x 15.6 inches) 547.5 x 195 x 416.1 mm (21.6 x 7.7 x 16.4 inches) 569.2 x 195 x 428 mm (22.4 x 7.7 x 16.9 inches) Weight (Without Stand) 3.7 kg (8.2 Ibs) 3.25 kg (7.2 Ibs) 4.15 kg (9.1 Ibs) (With Stand) 3.95 kg (8.7 Ibs) 3.5 kg (7.7 Ibs) 4.45 kg (9.8 Ibs) ✎NOTE x Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. x For information about power supply, and more about power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product. x Some models may not be available for purchase depending on the region. x If there is no power cut-off switch, the power consumption is "0" only when the power cord is disconnected. x DPM(Display Power Management) Function does not work if you used in conjunction with the HDMI IN (DVI) port of this product.País del Centro de atención al cliente Sitio web EUROPE ALBANIA 42 27 5755 http://www.samsung.com AUSTRIA 0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) http://www.samsung.com BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 http://www.samsung.com/be (Dutch) http://www.samsung.com/be_fr (French) BOSNIA 05 133 1999 http://www.samsung.com BULGARIA 07001 33 11 http://www.samsung.com CROATIA 062 SAMSUNG (062 726 7864) http://www.samsung.com CZECH 800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) http://www.samsung.com Samsung Electronics Czech and Slovak, s.r.o.,Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská 394/17, 180 00, Praha 8 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 http://www.samsung.com FINLAND 030 - 6227 515 http://www.samsung.com FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 http://www.samsung.com GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864, € 0,14/Min) http://www.samsung.com CYPRUS From landline : 8009 4000 http://www.samsung.com GREECE From landline : 80111-SAMSUNG (7267864) From landline & mobile : (+30)210 6897691 http://www.samsung.com HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com KOSOVO +381 0113216899 http://www.samsung.com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 http://www.samsung.com MACEDONIA 023 207 777 http://www.samsung.com MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 http://www.samsung.com NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) ( € 0,10/Min) http://www.samsung.com NORWAY 815-56 480 http://www.samsung.com POLAND 0 801-1SAMSUNG (172-678) +48 22 607-93-33 http://www.samsung.com PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG (808207267) http://www.samsung.com RUMANIA From landline : 08010-SAMSUNG (7267864) From landline & mobile : (+40)21 206 01 10 http://www.samsung.com SERBIA 0700 SAMSUNG (0700 726 7864) http://www.samsung.com SLOVAKIA 0800 - SAMSUNG (0800-726 786) www.samsung.com/sk SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) http://www.samsung.com SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) http://www.samsung.com SWITZERLAND 0848 - SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) http://www.samsung.com/ch http://www.samsung.com/ch_fr (French) U.K 0330 SAMSUNG (7267864) http://www.samsung.com EIRE 0818 717100 http://www.samsung.com LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 http://www.samsung.com LATVIA 8000-7267 http://www.samsung.com ESTONIA 800-7267 http://www.samsung.com TURKEY 444 77 11 http://www.samsung.com CIS RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 http://www.samsung.com GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 http://www.samsung.com ARMENIA 0-800-05-555 http://www.samsung.com AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 http://www.samsung.com KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500(GSM: 7799) http://www.samsung.com UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre.© 2012 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. BN46-00196T-02 País del Centro de atención al cliente Sitio web MONGOLIA http://www.samsung.com UKRAINE 0-800-502-000 http://www.samsung.com/ua http://www.samsung.com/ua_ru BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com ASIA PACIFIC AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 http://www.samsung.com NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) http://www.samsung.com CHINA 400-810-5858 http://www.samsung.com HONG KONG (852) 3698 - 4698 http://www.samsung.com/hk http://www.samsung.com/hk_en/ INDIA 1800 1100 11 3030 8282 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 http://www.samsung.com INDONESIA 0800-112-8888 021-5699-7777 http://www.samsung.com JAPAN 0120-327-527 http://www.samsung.com MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 http://www.samsung.com PHILIPPINES 1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864) for PLDT 1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Digitel 1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Globe02-5805777 http://www.samsung.com SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com THAILAND 1800-29-3232 02-689-3232 http://www.samsung.com TAIWAN 0800-329-999 0266-026-066 http://www.samsung.com VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 http://www.samsung.com MIDDLE EAST IRAN 021-8255 http://www.samsung.com OMAN 800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) http://www.samsung.com KUWAIT 183-2255 http://www.samsung.com BAHRAIN 8000-4726 http://www.samsung.com EGYPT 08000-726786 http://www.samsung.com JORDAN 800-22273 http://www.samsung.com MOROCCO 080 100 2255 http://www.samsung.com SAUDI ARABIA 9200-21230 http://www.samsung.com U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com AFRICA CAMEROON 7095- 0077 http://www.samsung.com COTE D’ IVOIRE 8000 0077 http://www.samsung.com GHANA 0800-10077 http://www.samsung.com 0302-200077 KENYA 0800 724 000 http://www.samsung.com NIGERIA 0800-726-7864 http://www.samsung.com SENEGAL 800-00-0077 http://www.samsung.com SOUTH AFRICA 0860-SAMSUNG(726-7864) http://www.samsung.com TANZANIA 0685 88 99 00 http://www.samsung.com UGANDA 0800 300 300 http://www.samsung.com Монитор LED TV (MFM TV) руководство пользователя Благодарим вас за приобретение этого изделия Samsung. Чтобы получить сервисное обслуживание в полном объеме, зарегистрируйте ваше изделие по адресу TB300 TB350Русский 2 Иллюстрации в данном руководстве приведены только для справки и могут отличаться от фактического внешнего вида изделия. Внешний вид и характеристики изделия могут изменяться без уведомления. Просмотр цифрового телевидения 1. Относящиеся к цифровому телевидению (DVB) функции доступны только в тех странах или регионах, в которых осуществляется вещание цифрового телевизионного сигнала DVB-T (MPEG2 и MPEG4 AVC) или в которых есть кабельное телевидение, совместимое со стандартом DVB-C (MPEG2 и MPEG4 AAC). По вопросам возможности приема сигнала DVB-T или DVB-C обращайтесь к местному дилеру. 2. DVB-T — это стандарт эфирного цифрового телевизионного вещания европейского консорциума DVB, а DVB-C — это стандарт кабельного цифрового телевизионного вещания. 3. Этот LED-дисплей соответствует новейшим стандартам DVB-T и DVB-C (по состоянию на август 2008 года), однако совместимость с будущими стандартами эфирного (DVB-T) и кабельного (DVB-C) цифрового вещания не гарантируется. 4. В некоторых странах или регионах провайдеры кабельного телевидения могут взимать дополнительную плату за такие услуги, и от вас может потребоваться согласие с условиями предоставления их услуг. 5. Некоторые функции цифрового телевидения могут быть недоступны в некоторых странах и регионах, а реализация стандарта DVB-C может оказаться не полностью совместимой с некоторыми провайдерами кабельного телевидения. 6. Для получения дополнительной информации обратитесь в местный сервисный центр Samsung. ✎ На качество приема могут оказывать влияние различия в методах трансляции, используемых в разных странах. Проверьте работу LED-дисплея у местного авторизованного дилера SAMSUNG или обратитесь в центр поддержки Samsung, чтобы узнать, можно ли улучшить качество приема, изменяя настройки телевизора. Просмотр неподвижных изображений — предупреждение Избегайте продолжительного отображения на дисплее неподвижных изображений (например, картинок в формате jpeg) или неподвижных элементов (например, логотипа телевизионной программы, изображения в панорамном формате или формате 4:3, строки новостей или котировок внизу экрана и т. д.). Постоянное отображение неподвижных изображений может вызвать появление ореола и повлиять на качество изображения. Чтобы снизить риск появления этого эффекта, выполняйте следующие рекомендации: • Не смотрите один и тот же канал в течение длительного времени. • Всегда старайтесь вывести изображение во весь экран, используйте меню формата изображения для выбора формата, который подходит лучше всего. • Снизьте яркость и контрастность до минимальных значений, необходимых для обеспечения требуемого качества изображения. Слишком большие значения могут ускорить процесс выгорания. • Часто используйте все функции LED-дисплея, предназначенные для предотвращения образования остаточного изображения и выгорания. Подробную информацию см. в соответствующем разделе руководства пользователя. Место установки Между изделием и другими объектами (например, стенами) должно быть достаточное свободное пространство, чтобы обеспечить необходимую вентиляцию. Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной возгорания или повреждения изделия из-за повышения внутренней температуры изделия. ✎ Фактический внешний вид LED-дисплея может отличаться от изображений в данном руководстве в зависимости от модели. ✎ Будьте осторожны, касаясь LED-дисплея. Некоторые детали могут быть достаточно горячими. Установка на подставке. Настенная установка. 10 см 10 см 10 см 10 см 10 см 10 см 10 см • Плата за обслуживание может взиматься в следующих случаях: – (a) Специалист прибыл по вашему запросу, но не была обнаружена неисправность изделия (например, вы не прочитали это руководство пользователя). – (b) Вы доставили изделие в сервисный центр, но не была обнаружена неисправность изделия (например, вы не прочитали это руководство пользователя). • Размер платы за обслуживание будет сообщен заранее перед выполнением любых работ или выездом специалиста на дом.3 РУССКИЙ Русский Проверьте символ! Эту функцию можно вызвать, нажав кнопку t TOOLST на пульте ДУ. Примечание. Указывает на дополнительную информацию. Содержание Приступая к работе 4 4 Меры предосторожности 11 Принадлежности 12 Панель управления — внешний вид 13 Пульт дистанционного управления — внешний вид Подключение 14 14 Подключение антенны 14 Настройка (первоначальная настройка) 15 Подключение к аудиовидеоустройству 16 Подключение к разъему «Общий интерфейс» 17 Подключение к аудиоустройству и ПК 19 Выбор источника сигнала Основные функции 19 19 Навигация в меню 20 Использование кнопки INFO (телегид текущих и следующих программ) 20 Использование меню «Канал» 22 Меню «Канал» 23 Меню «Изображение» 25 Меню «Звук» 27 Меню «Система» 30 Меню «Поддержка» Дополнительные функции 31 31 Использование функции Media Play Другая информация 38 38 Функция «Телетекст» для аналоговых каналов 39 Крепление кронштейна для настенного монтажа/настольной подставки 40 Замок «кенсингтон» для защиты от кражи 41 Устранение неполадок 45 Технические характеристики4 Приступая к работе Русский Меры предосторожности Символы, используемые для обозначения мер предосторожности ПРеДУПРежДеНИе Несоблюдение мер предосторожности, отмеченных этим символом, может привести к серьезным травмам или даже к смертельному исходу. ОСТОРОжНО Несоблюдение мер предосторожности, отмеченных этим символом, может стать причиной травм или материального ущерба. Не делать. Следует соблюдать. ОСТОРОЖНО ОПАСНОСТЬ ПОРАЖЕНИЯ ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ, НЕ ОТКРЫВАТЬ ОСТОРОжНО: ЧТОБЫ СНИЗИТЬ РИСК ПОРАжеНИЯ ЭЛеКТРИЧеСКИМ ТОКОМ, Не СНИМАЙТе КРЫШКУ (ИЛИ ЗАДНЮЮ СТеНКУ). ВНУТРИ НеТ УЗЛОВ, ПОДЛежАЩИХ ОБСЛУжИВАНИЮ. ВСе РАБОТЫ ПО СеРВИСНОМУ ОБСЛУжИВАНИЮ ДОЛжНЫ ВЫПОЛНЯТЬСЯ КВАЛИФИЦИРОВАННЫМ ПеРСОНАЛОМ. Этот символ означает, что внутри имеются узлы, находящиеся под высоким напряжением. Любой контакт с внутренними узлами данного изделия опасен. Этот символ информирует о том, что к изделию приложено руководство, содержащее важную информацию об эксплуатации и обслуживании изделия. ¦ Относится к электропитанию ✎ Приведенные далее изображения служат только для справки и могут отличаться в зависимости от модели и страны. Предупреждение Не используйте поврежденные кабель или вилку питания или плохо прикрепленную розетку электросети. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током или возгорания. Не подключайте несколько электроприборов к одной настенной розетке. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной возгорания из-за перегрева настенной розетки. Не подключайте и не отключайте электропитание влажными руками. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током. ! Надежно вставляйте вилку питания в розетку. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной возгорания. ! Подключайте кабель питания к заземленной настенной розетке (только для оборудования с классом изоляции 1). x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током или травм. Избегайте чрезмерного перегибания или скручивания кабеля питания и не кладите на кабель тяжелые предметы. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током из-за повреждения кабеля питания. Приступая к работе5 Приступая к работе Русский Размещайте кабель питания и изделие вдали от нагревателей. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током или возгорания. ! если контакты кабеля питания или сетевой розетки покрыты пылью, удалите ее, используя сухую ткань. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной возгорания. Осторожно Не отключайте кабель питания во время работы изделия. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной повреждения изделия из-за удара электрическим током. ! Используйте только кабель питания, поставляемый нашей компанией. Не используйте кабели питания от других электроприборов. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током или возгорания. ! При отключении кабеля питания от настенной розетки держите его за вилку, а не за кабель. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током или возгорания. ! Подключайте кабель питания к легкодоступной настенной розетке. x При возникновении проблем с изделием отключите кабель питания, чтобы полностью отключить электропитание. Нельзя полностью отключить электропитание, используя только кнопку питания изделия. ¦ Установка Предупреждение На ставьте на изделие горящие свечи или репелленты. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной возгорания. ! Для монтажа изделия на стене пригласите квалифицированного специалиста. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной травм. x Используйте указанное настенное крепление. Не устанавливайте изделие в местах с плохой вентиляцией, например на книжных полках или в шкафах. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной возгорания из-за внутреннего перегрева. ! Храните пластиковые пакеты, служившие для упаковки изделия, в недоступном для детей месте. x если ребенок наденет пластиковый пакет на голову, он может задохнуться. Не устанавливайте изделие в шатких или подверженных вибрации местах, например на неустойчивых или наклонных полках. x Падение изделия может стать причиной его повреждения или травм. x При использовании изделия в местах, подверженных сильной вибрации, возможны выход изделия из стоя или возгорание. ! Не устанавливайте изделие в запыленных местах, а также в тех местах, где в воздухе содержится влага (сауны), масляные пары, дым или вода (капли дождя). Не устанавливайте изделие в транспортных средствах. x Это может стать причиной поражения электрическим током или возгорания.6 Приступая к работе Русский Не устанавливайте изделие в местах, подверженных воздействию прямых солнечных лучей, и вблизи источников тепла, например каминов или обогревателей. x Это может сократить срок службы изделия и стать причиной возгорания. Устанавливайте изделие в месте, недоступном детям. x если ребенок опрокинет изделие, оно может упасть и стать причиной травм. x Так как передняя часть изделия тяжелее, устанавливайте его на плоскую устойчивую поверхность. ! Согните кабель внешней антенны вниз в месте его выхода из дома, чтобы дождевая вода не затекала по кабелю. x если дождевая вода попадет в изделие, возможно поражение электрическим током или возгорание. ! Устанавливайте антенну на значительном расстоянии от высоковольтных проводов. x если антенна коснется высоковольтных проводов или упадет на них, возможно поражение электрическим током или возгорание. Осторожно ! Не уроните изделие во время его переноски. x Это может стать причиной повреждения изделия или травм. Не кладите изделие на пол передней стороной вниз. x Это может повредить панель изделия. При установке изделия на кронштейне или на полке следите за тем, чтобы передняя сторона изделия не выступала вперед. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной падения изделия и его повреждения или травм. x Используйте шкаф или полку, размеры которых соответствуют размерам изделия. ! Бережно обращайтесь с изделием при его установке. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной повреждения изделия или травм. SAMSUNG ! При установке изделия в местах с сильно изменяющимися условиями окружающей среды возможны проблемы с работой изделия из- за этих условий. В таких случаях установка изделия возможна только после консультации со специалистом сервисной службы. x Места с содержанием в воздухе микроскопической пыли или химических веществ, с очень высокой или очень низкой температурой, с повышенной влажностью, вокзалы или аэропорты, в которых изделие эксплуатируется постоянно.7 Приступая к работе Русский ¦ Чистка Предупреждение ! Перед чисткой изделия отключите кабель питания. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током или возгорания. При чистке изделия не разбрызгивайте воду непосредственно на изделие. x Вода не должна попадать внутрь изделия. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной возгорания, поражения электрически током или повреждения изделия. Осторожно Не разбрызгивайте чистящее средство непосредственно на изделие. x Это может стать причиной обесцвечивания, растрескивания или отслоения внешних панелей изделия. ! При чистке изделия отключите кабель питания и почистите изделие прилагаемой чистящей салфеткой. x При чистке изделия не используйте химические вещества, например воск, бензин, спирт, растворители, репелленты, ароматизаторы, смазочные или моющие средства. Это может вызвать деформацию внешних панелей и смывание надписей. ! если не удается очистить изделие прилагаемой салфеткой, протрите изделие мягкой тканью, смоченной в специальном средстве для чистки мониторов. x если специального средства для чистки мониторов нет, перед чисткой изделия разведите чистящее средство в воде в соотношении 1:10. ! Так как поверхность изделия легко поцарапать, используйте прилагаемую чистящую салфетку. ¦ Использование Предупреждение В изделии имеются цепи, находящиеся под высоким напряжением, поэтому никогда не разбирайте, не ремонтируйте и не модифицируйте изделие самостоятельно. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной пожара или поражения электрическим током. x если необходимо отремонтировать изделие, обратитесь в сервисный центр. ! Чтобы переместить изделие, отключите питание и отсоедините кабель питания, антенный кабель и все другие проводные подключения. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током из-за повреждения кабеля питания.8 Приступая к работе Русский ! если изделие издает необычные звуки, чувствуется запах гари или из изделия идет дым, немедленно отключите вилку питания и обратитесь в сервисный центр. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током или возгорания. Не позволяйте детям виснуть на изделии или забираться не него. x При несоблюдении этого требования изделие может упасть, что может привести к травмам или летальному исходу. если вы уроните изделие или если будет поврежден его корпус, отключите питание и отсоедините кабель питания. Обратитесь в сервисный центр. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной пожара или поражения электрическим током. Не кладите на изделие игрушки или печенье. x если ребенок повиснет на изделии, чтобы достать такой предмет, то изделие может упасть и стать причиной травм или летального исхода. ! Во время грозы или молний отключайте кабель питания и ни в коем случае не касайтесь антенного кабеля, так как это опасно. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током или возгорания. ! Не роняйте на изделие посторонние предметы и берегите его от ударов. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током или возгорания. При перемещении изделия не тащите его за кабель питания или антенный кабель. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрически током, возгорания или повреждения изделия из- за повреждения кабеля. ! GAS При утечке газа не касайтесь изделия или кабеля питания и немедленно провентилируйте помещение. x Искра может стать причиной взрыва или возгорания. x Во время грозы или молний не касайтесь кабеля питания или антенного кабеля. Не поднимайте и не перемещайте изделие, держа его только за кабель питания или сигнальный кабель. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрически током, возгорания или повреждения изделия из- за повреждения кабеля. ! Не используйте рядом с изделием легковоспламеняющиеся спреи и не размещайте рядом с ним легковоспламеняющихся предметов. x Это может стать причиной взрыва или возгорания. Следите за тем, чтобы вентиляционные отверстия не были закрыты скатертями или занавесками. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной возгорания из-за внутреннего перегрева. 100 Не засовывайте в изделие (вентиляционные отверстия, порты и т. д.) металлические предметы, например столовые приборы, монеты или заколки для волос, или легковоспламеняющиеся предметы. x если в изделие попадет жидкость, выключите питание, отключите кабель питания и обратитесь в сервисную службу. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной повреждения изделия, поражения электрически током или возгорания.9 Приступая к работе Русский Не ставьте на изделие емкости с жидкостью, например вазы, цветочные горшки, напитки, косметику или лекарства, или металлические предметы. x если в изделие попадет жидкость, выключите питание, отключите кабель питания и обратитесь в сервисную службу. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной повреждения изделия, поражения электрически током или возгорания. Не нажимайте на изделие с чрезмерной силой. Возможно деформирование или повреждение изделия. Осторожно ! Отображение неподвижных изображений в течение длительного времени может стать причиной появления на экране постоянного изображения или пятен. x если изделие не используется в течение длительного времени, переключите его в режим энергосбережения или выберите заставку с движущимся изображением. -_- ! если изделие не используется в течение длительного времени, например когда вы уходите из дома, отключайте кабель питания от настенной розетки. x если это требование не соблюдается, то из-за накопления пыли и перегрева или короткого замыкания возможно возгорание или поражение электрическим током. ! Должным образом настройте разрешение и частоту обновления кадров в изделии. x При несоблюдении этой рекомендации возможно чрезмерное напряжение зрения. Не переворачивайте изделие и не перемещайте его, держа только за подставку. x Изделие может упасть, что может стать причиной его повреждения или травм. ! Постоянный просмотр изображения с близкого расстояния может привести к нарушениям зрения. Не используйте рядом с изделием увлажнители воздуха или кухонные плиты. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной поражения электрическим током или возгорания. ! При продолжительном просмотре экрана изделия важно периодически делать перерывы для отдыха глаз (5 минут каждый час). x Это снимает напряжение зрения. Панель изделия нагревается при продолжительном использовании, поэтому не касайтесь изделия.10 Приступая к работе Русский ! Храните мелкие аксессуары в недоступном для детей месте. ! Будьте осторожны при регулировке угла наклона изделия и высоты подставки. x если вы защемите руку или палец, возможны травмы. x если сильно наклонить изделие, оно может упасть и стать причиной травм. Не ставьте на изделие тяжелых предметов. x Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной повреждения изделия или травм. При использовании наушников или гарнитуры не выбирайте слишком большую громкость. x Слишком громкий звук может повредить слух. Следите за тем, чтобы дети не брали в рот батарейки, вынутые из пульта дистанционного управления. Храните батарейки в месте, недоступном для детей. x если дети положат батарейки в рот, немедленно обратитесь к врачу. ! При замене батареек соблюдайте полярность (+, -). x При несоблюдении этого требования возможно повреждение батареек или возгорание, травмы или повреждение из-за утечки электролита. Используйте только указанные стандартные батарейки. Не устанавливайте новые и использованные батарейки одновременно. x Это может стать причиной разрушения или протечки батарейки и привести к возгоранию, травмам или загрязнению (повреждению). ! Батарейки (и аккумуляторы) не должны утилизироваться с обычным мусором, их нужно возвращать для переработки. Покупатель ответственен за возврат использованных батареек или аккумуляторов для переработки. x Покупатель может вернуть использованные батарейки или аккумуляторы в ближайший общественный центр переработки или в магазин, продающий батарейки или аккумуляторы этого типа.11 Приступая к работе Русский Принадлежности ✎Убедитесь в том, что в комплект поставки LED-дисплея входят следующие принадлежности: если какой-либо предмет отсутствует, обратитесь к дилеру. ✎Цвет и форма принадлежностей могут различаться в зависимости от модели. ✎Не входящие в комплект поставки кабели можно приобрести отдельно. ✎Следите за тем, чтобы принадлежности не затерялись в упаковочном материале, когда вы открываете коробку. [ОСТОРОЖНО: ЗАЩИТНУЮ ПЛЕНКУ НУЖНО УДАЛЯТЬ ПОЛНОСТЬЮ x Руководство пользователя x Руководство по быстрой настройке x Пульт ДУ и батарейки (AAA x 2) x Чистящая салфетка x Гарантийный талон/Руководство по соблюдению мер предосторожности (недоступно в некоторых регионах) x Кабель питания y Кронштейн подставки y Основа подставки y Кабель D-Sub y Стереокабель Кабели подключения источников сигнала (продаются отдельно) y Кабель HDMI-DVI y Аудиокабель y Компонентный кабель y Оптический кабель y Кабель HDMI12 Приступая к работе Русский Панель управления — внешний вид ✎Цвет и форма изделия могут отличаться в зависимости от модели. SOURCE E Переключение всех доступных источников сигнала. В экранном меню эта кнопка выполняет те же функции, что и кнопка ENTERE пульта ДУ. MENU Вызов экранного меню и меню функций LED-дисплея. Y Регулировка громкости. В экранном меню кнопки Y выполняют те же функции, что и z кнопки l и r пульта ДУ. Смена каналов. В экранном меню кнопки z выполняют те же функции, что и кнопки u и d пульта ДУ. P (Питание) Включение и выключение LED-дисплея. Индикатор питания Мигает и гаснет, когда питание включено, горит в режиме готовности. Датчик пульта ДУ Направьте пульт ДУ на эту точку LED-дисплея. Режим готовности Не оставляйте LED-дисплей в режиме готовности на долгое время (например, если вы уезжаете в отпуск). В этом режиме по-прежнему потребляется небольшое количество электроэнергии, хотя индикатор кнопки питания не горит. Лучше отключить кабель питания. Панель управления13 Приступая к работе Русский Пульт дистанционного управления — внешний вид ✎Это специальный пульт дистанционного управления с точками Брайля на кнопках выбора каналов и цифровых кнопках для людей с ослабленным зрением. Установка батареек (размер батареек: AAA) Включение и выключение телевизора. Непосредственный выбор каналов. Режим телетекста: включен, двойной, смешанный и выключен. Отображение окна Дом. стр. содержим., в котором расположены разделы Список каналов, Телегид, Media Play, Диспетчер расписания и Источник. Быстрый выбор часто используемых функций. Отображение основного экранного меню. Возврат в предыдущее меню. PIP: Включение и выключение функции PIP (картинка в картинке). P.SIZE: Выбор настройки Размер картинки. AD/SUBT.: Включение или отключение звукового описания (функция доступна не во всех регионах). / Отображение цифровых субтитров. Перемещение курсора и выбор элемента меню. Подтверждение настройки. Используйте эти кнопки в соответствии с отображаемыми на экране указаниями. Регулировка громкости. Отображение списка доступных источников видеосигнала и выбор источника видеосигнала. Возврат к предыдущему каналу. Временное отключение звука. Отображение на экране списка каналов. Отображение электронного гида. Отображение информации на экране. Выход из меню. Используйте эти кнопки в режиме Media Play. Смена каналов.Подключение Подключение антенны При первоначальном включении LED-дисплея основные настройки выполняются автоматически. ✎Предварительная установка: подключение питания и антенны. ANT OUT Подключение электропитания Настройка (первоначальная настройка) Русский 14 При первом включении LED-дисплея отображается последовательность экранных запросов, помогающих выполнить основные настройки. Нажмите кнопку POWERP. Настройка возможна, только когда для параметра Источник выбрано значение ТВ. ✎Перед настройкой LED-дисплея убедитесь в том, что подключен антенный кабель. 1 Выбор языка меню Нажимайте кнопку u или d, чтобы выбрать язык меню. Когда язык будет 2 Домашний Демонстрация Выбор режима или выбран, два раза нажмите кнопку Нажимайте кнопку x Выберите режим u или Домашний d, затем нажмите кнопку . Режим ENTERE Демонстрация . ENTER предназначен для E. P использования в магазинах. x Переключение из режима Демонстрация в режим Домашний (стандартная настройка). Нажмите кнопку громкости LED-дисплея. Когда на экран будет выведен индикатор громкости, нажмите кнопку MENU и удерживайте ее нажатой в течении 5 секунд. x Режим Демонстрация предназначен только для использования в магазинах. При выборе этого режима некоторые функции недоступны. При использовании изделия дома выберите режим Домашний. 3 Выбор региона Нажмите кнопку ENTERE. Выберите соответствующий регион, нажимая кнопку u или d. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы подтвердить выбор. 4 Автонастройка Нажимайте кнопку u или d, чтобы выбрать подходящую настройку, затем дважды нажмите кнопку ENTERE. Давайте найдём и сохраним каналы на Вашем телевизоре. Вы нуждаетесь в поиске каналов? x Да, я нуждаюсь. Все доступные каналы будут найдены и сохранены в Вашем телевизоре. (Автонастройка необходима) x Нет, я не нуждаюсь. Мой внешний приёмник обеспечивает приём всех доступных каналов , поэтому я не нуждаюсь в поиске каналов. ✎ Выбрав эту опцию, можно завершить настройку. x Антенна / Кабель. Выберите источник сигнала телевещания для запоминания каналов. Цифр. и аналог. / Цифр. / аналог.: Выберите источник каналов для запоминания. ✎ Дополнительные сведения см. на стр. 22. 5 Настройка Режим часов Выберите автоматическую или ручную настройку для параметра Режим часов. x Авто. Выберите часовой пояс, в котором вы находитесь (в зависимости от страны). x Ручной. Дату и время можно ввести вручную. ✎ При выборе на этапе 4 настройки «Нет, я не нуждаюсь. » время можно задать только вручную. 6 Завершена Нажмите кнопку ENTERE. Восстановление стандартной настройки... Выберите Система - Настройка (Первоначальная настройка). Введите PIN-код из 4 цифр. PIN-код по умолчанию — «0-0-0-0». Если вы хотите изменить PIN-код, используйте функцию Изменение PIN. Меню Настройка (MENU → Система) нужно вызвать еще раз дома, даже если вы делали это в магазине. ✎Если вы забудете PIN-код, в режиме ожидания нажмите кнопки пульта ДУ в указанной последовательности, чтобы восстановить стандартный PIN-код «0-0-0-0»: POWER (выключить) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (включить).Русский 15 Подключение Подключение к аудиовидеоустройству Использование кабеля HDMI или кабеля HDMI-DVI (до 1080p) Доступные устройства: DVD-плейер, Blu-ray плейер, приставка кабельного телевидения высокой четкости, приемник спутникового телевидения высокой четкости, видеомагнитофон ✎HDMI IN(DVI) / PC/DVI AUDIO IN x При подключении кабеля HDMI-DVI к порту HDMI IN(DVI) передача аудиосигнала не работает. x При подключении к LED-дисплею внешнего устройства, использующего старую версию HDMI, возможны искажения или отсутствие изображения. В этом случае запросите у изготовителя внешнего устройства информацию о версии HDMI. если она устаревшая, запросите обновление. x Приобретайте только сертифицированные кабели HDMI. Несоблюдение этого требования может привести к отсутствию изображения или ошибке подключения. x Рекомендуется использовать обычный высокоскоростной кабель HDMI или кабель с поддержкой локальной сети. Изделие не поддерживает подключение к локальной сети по кабелю HDMI. Использование кабеля Scart Доступные устройства: DVD-плеер, видеомагнитофон ✎В режиме Внешний выход цифрового ТВ поддерживает только видео стандартной четкости в формате MPEG и аудио. DVI OUT HDMI OUT AUDIO OUT W R DVD / Blu-ray-плеер DVD / Blu-ray-плеер EXT (RGB) EXT Видеомагнитофон / DVD-плеерРусский 16 Подключение Использование компонентного кабеля (до 1080p) или аудиовидеокабеля (только 480i) Доступные устройства: DVD-плейер, Blu-ray-плейер, приставка кабельного телевидения, приемник спутникового телевидения, видеомагнитофон PR PB COMPONENT / AV IN R W R AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L VIDEO OUT R W R B G R W R B G R W W W R B R R G Y Y AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y R W Y ✎При подключении к разъему AV IN цвет гнезда AV IN [Y/VIDEO] (зеленый) не соответствует цвету штекера видеокабеля (желтый). ✎Для получения лучшего качества изображения рекомендуется использовать компонентное, а не аудиовидеоподключение. Подключение к разъему «Общий интерфейс» (только для европы, Турции, Алжира, Южной Африки и СНГ) Использование модуля «CI или CI+ CARD» Для просмотра платных каналов необходимо вставить модуль «CI или CI+ CARD». x если модуль «CI или CI+ CARD» не установлен, то при попытке просмотра некоторых каналов будет отображаться сообщение «Зашифрованный сигнал». x Информация о подключении, включая телефонный номер, идентификатор модуля «CI или CI+ CARD», идентификатор устройства и другие данные, будет отображаться в течение приблизительно 2–3 минут. если будет отображаться сообщение об ошибке, обратитесь к провайдеру. x Когда конфигурация каналов будет завершена, отобразится сообщение «Обновление завершено», означающее окончание обновления списка каналов. ✎Примечание. x Модуль «CI или CI+ CARD» можно получить у провайдера. x При извлечении модуля «CI или CI+ CARD» будьте осторожны, так как модуль можно повредить, уронив его. x Вставьте модуль «CI или CI+ CARD» в направлении стрелки, изображенной на модуле. x Разъем Общий интерфейс может находиться в разных местах в зависимости от модели. x Модули «CI или CI+ CARD» не поддерживаются в некоторых странах и регионах. Подробную информацию можно получить у авторизованного дилера. x При возникновении проблем обратитесь к провайдеру. x Вставьте модуль «CI или CI+ CARD», поддерживающий текущие настройки антенны. В противном случае на экране могут появиться искажения, или изображение может отсутствовать. Аудиокабель (не входит в комплект поставки) Видеокабель (не входит в комплект поставки) Аудиокабель (не входит в комплект поставки) Красный Белый Красный Синий Зеленый Красный Желтый Белый Устройство Устройство Компонентный кабель (не входит в комплект поставки)Русский 17 Подключение Цифровая аудиосистема Подключение к аудиоустройству и ПК Использование оптического (цифрового) подключения или подключения наушников DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) Устройства серии TB300 не оснащены разъемом для подключения наушников и оптическим интерфейсом. ✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) x При подключении цифровой аудиосистемы к гнезду DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) уменьшите громкость LED-дисплея и аудиосистемы. x Многоканальный звук 5.1 доступен при подключении LED-дисплея к внешнему устройству, поддерживающему многоканальный звук. x если включен ресивер (домашний кинотеатр), то звук можно слушать через оптический выход телевизора. если телевизор принимает сигнал цифрового телевидения, то он передает в ресивер домашнего кинотеатра многоканальный звук 5.1. если источник цифрового сигнала, например DVD или Blu-ray-плейер, приставка кабельного телевидения или приемник спутникового телевидения, подключен к телевизору кабелем HDMI, то ресивер домашнего кинотеатра получает только двухканальный звук. Для получения многоканального звука 5.1 подключите DVD или Blu-ray-плейер, приставку кабельного телевидения или приемник спутникового телевидения непосредственно к усилителю или домашнему кинотеатру. ✎Наушники H: Наушники можно подключить к соответствующему выходу телевизора. При подключении наушников встроенные громкоговорители отключаются. x При подключении наушников к LED-дисплею функции воспроизведения звука могут быть ограничены. x Громкость наушников и громкость LED-дисплея регулируются раздельно. Использование кабеля HDMI, HDMI-DVI или D-sub ✎Подключение с помощью кабеля HDMI может не поддерживаться некоторыми компьютерами. Кабель HDMI (не входит в комплект поставки) Кабель HDMI-DVI (не входит в комплект поставки) Стереокабель Стереокабель Кабель D-Sub Русский 18 Подключение Режимы отображения (вход D-Sub и HDMI/DVI) Оптимальное разрешение: 1366 x 768 пикселей (только модель T19B300) Режим отображения Частота горизонтальной развертки (кГц) Частота вертикальной развертки (Гц) Частота обновления пикселей (МГц) Полярность синхронизации (Г/В) Режим Разрешение IBM 720 x 400 70 Гц 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+ VESA DMT 640 x 480 60 Гц 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/- MAC 640 x 480 67 Гц 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/- VESA DMT 640 x 480 72 Гц 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/- VESA DMT 640 x 480 75 Гц 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/- VESA DMT 800 x 600 60 Гц 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+ VESA DMT 800 x 600 72 Гц 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+ VESA DMT 800 x 600 75 Гц 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+ MAC 832 x 624 75 Гц 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 60 Гц 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 70 Гц 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 75 Гц 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+ VESA DMT 1280 x 720 60 Гц 45,000 60,000 74,250 +/+ VESA DMT 1366 x 768 60 Гц 47,712 59,790 85,500 +/+ Оптимальное разрешение: 1920 x 1080 пикселей Режим отображения Частота горизонтальной развертки (кГц) Частота вертикальной развертки (Гц) Частота обновления пикселей (МГц) Полярность синхронизации (Г/В) Режим Разрешение IBM 720 x 400 70 Гц 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+ VESA DMT 640 x 480 60 Гц 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/- MAC 640 x 480 67 Гц 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/- VESA DMT 640 x 480 72 Гц 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/- VESA DMT 640 x 480 75 Гц 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/- VESA DMT 800 x 600 60 Гц 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+ VESA DMT 800 x 600 72 Гц 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+ VESA DMT 800 x 600 75 Гц 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+ MAC 832 x 624 75 Гц 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 60 Гц 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 70 Гц 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/- VESA DMT 1024 x 768 75 Гц 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+ VESA DMT 1152 x 864 75 Гц 67,500 75,000 108,000 +/+ MAC 1152 x 870 75 Гц 68,681 75,062 100,000 -/- VESA DMT 1280 x 720 60 Гц 45,000 60,000 74,250 +/+ VESA DMT 1280 x 800 60 Гц 49,702 59,810 83,500 -/+ VESA DMT 1280 x 1024 60 Гц 63,981 60,020 108,000 +/+ VESA DMT 1280 x 1024 75 Гц 79,976 75,025 135,000 +/+ VESA DMT 1366 x 768 60 Гц 47,712 59,790 85,500 +/+ VESA DMT 1440 x 900 60 Гц 55,935 59,887 106,500 -/+ VESA DMT 1600 x 900 RB 60 Гц 60,000 60,000 108,000 +/+ VESA DMT 1680 x 1050 60 Гц 65,290 59,954 146,250 -/+ VESA DMT 1920 x 1080 60 Гц 67,500 60,000 148,500 +/+ ✎Примечание, x Режим чересстрочной развертки не поддерживается, x При выборе нестандартного видеоформата телевизор может работать неправильно. x Поддерживаются раздельные и композитные режимы. Синхронизация по зеленому не поддерживается.Русский 19 Подключение Основные функции Навигация в меню Перед использованием LED-дисплея ознакомьтесь с приведенной далее информацией, чтобы научиться использовать меню и выбирать и изменять различные функции. 1 Кнопка ENTERE/кнопки перемещения курсора. Перемещение курсора и выбор элемента меню. Подтверждение настройки. 2 Кнопка RETURN. Возврат в предыдущее меню. 3 Кнопка MENU. Отображение основного экранного меню. 4 Кнопка EXIT. Выход из основного экранного меню. Использование экранного меню Вызов меню может отличаться в зависимости от выбранного меню. 1 MENU m Отображаются функции главного меню: Изображение, Звук, Канал, Система, Поддержка. 2 ▲ / ▼ Выберите символ, нажимая кнопку ▲ или ▼. 3 ENTERE Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы вызвать подменю. 4 ▲ / ▼ Выберите нужное подменю, нажимая кнопку ▲ или ▼. 5 ◄ / ► Измените значение настройки, нажимая кнопку ◄ или ►. Изменение настройки может отличаться в зависимости от выбранного меню. 6 ENTERE Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы завершить настройку. 7 EXIT e Нажмите EXIT. Выбор источника сигнала Источник SOURCE s→ Источник Выбор режима телевизора или внешнего источника сигнала, например DVD плеера, Bluray-плеера, кабельной приставки или приставки приема спутникового телевидения. ■ TB / Внешний / ПК / HDMI/DVI / AV / Компонент ✎В списке Источник подключенные входы выделяются. ✎ТВ, ПК и Внешний всегда остаются активными. Редактир. назв. SOURCEs→ TOOLST → Редактир. назв. → ENTERE Когда отображается экран Источник, нажмите кнопку TOOLST. После этого вы сможете переименовать внешние источники сигнала по своему желанию. ■ VCR / DVD / Кабельн. прист. / Спутн. прист. / PVR / АV ресивер / Игра / Камера / ПК/DVI PC / Устройства DVI/ТВ / IP TB / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA: Присвойте название подключенному к входным разъемам устройству, чтобы упростить выбор источника сигнала. ✎При подключении ПК к порту HDMI IN (DVI) с помощью кабеля HDMI в LED-дисплее нужно выбрать режим ПК в настройке Редактир. назв.. ✎При подключении ПК к порту HDMI IN (DVI) с помощью кабеля HDMI-DVI в LED-дисплее нужно выбрать режим DVI PC в настройке Редактир. назв.. ✎При подключении аудиовидеоустройства к порту HDMI IN (DVI) с помощью кабеля HDMI-DVI в LED-дисплее нужно выбрать режим Устройства DVI в настройке Редактир. назв.. Информация SOURCEs→ TOOLST→ Информация → ENTERE Можно посмотреть подробную информацию о выбранном внешнем устройстве. 4 2 3 1Русский 20 Основные функции Использование кнопки INFO (телегид текущих и следующих программ) Отображается текущий канал и некоторые настройки звука и изображения. Телегид текущих и следующих программ отображает информацию телевизионной программы для каждого канала в соответствии с временем вещания. x Нажимайте кнопки l и r, чтобы посмотреть информацию о нужной программе во время просмотра текущего канала. (Зависит от каналов.) x Нажимайте кнопки u / d, чтобы просмотреть информацию о других каналах. Для перехода к выбранному в данный момент каналу нажмите кнопку ENTERE. • Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели. Нет подробной информации. Нет названия. 576i 4:3 SD Итальянский Стерео a Информация 17:02 вторник, 19 июля DTV-ант. Все Coming Soon 5 Использование меню «Канал» Нажмите кнопку CONTENT, чтобы выбрать Дом. стр. содержим., а затем выберите нужное меню. Отображается каждый экран. • Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели. Дом. стр. содержим. Список каналов Телегид Media Play Диспетчер расписания Источник R Возврат Телегид CONTENT → Дом. стр. содержим. → Телегид → ENTERE Информация электронного телегида предоставляется вещающими компаниями. Используя предоставленное вещающими компаниями расписание программ, можно заранее выбрать программы, которые вы хотите посмотреть, чтобы телевизор автоматически изменил канал на канал выбранной программы в заданное время. Записи программ могут отображаться пустыми или устаревшими в зависимости от состояния канала. Использование меню «Просм. канал.» x a Красный (Дисп. расписания) : Отображение меню Дисп. расписания. x { Зеленый (-24 часа). Просмотр списка программ, которые будут транслироваться в ближайшие 24 часа. x { желтый (+24 часа). Просмотр списка программ, которые будут транслироваться через 24 часа. x } Синий (Реж.кан.). Выбор типа каналов, которые будут отображаться в окне Просм. канал.. x ` (Информация). Отображение подробной информации о выбранной программе. x k (Страница). Переход к следующей или предыдущей странице. x E (Просмотр / Расписание) – При выборе текущей программы можно посмотреть выбранную программу. – При выборе будущей программы можно запланировать просмотр выбранной программы. Чтобы отменить планирование, нажмите кнопку ENTERE еще раз и выберите Отмена расписаний. Диспетчер расписания CONTENT → Дом. стр. содержим. → Диспетчер расписания → ENTERE Можно просматривать, изменять или удалять запланированный просмотр каналов. Использование функции «Просмотр по расписанию» Можно настроить автоматическое отображение выбранного канала в заданное время. Для использования этой функции сначала нужно задать текущее время. 1. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы выбрать функцию Диспетчер расписания. 2. Нажмите кнопку TOOLSTили кнопку или a , чтобы вручную добавить программу в расписание. Отображается экран Просмотр по расписанию. 3. Нажимайте кнопки u / d / l / r, чтобы задать настройки Антенна, Канал, Повтор, Дата или Время начала. • Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели. IL MEDICO E LO STRGONE DTV Air 6 R4 DTT 16:55 - 17:55 IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE - 2 TEMPO a Дисп. расписания b -24 часа { +24 часа } Реж.кан. ` Информация k Страница E Просмотр Сегодня 17:00 17:30 18:00 18:30 Телегид 17:00 вторник, 19 июля Просм. канал. — Все Нет информации Нет информации Нет информации Нет информации IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE 1 1futech 2 24ore.tv 3 BBC World 4 Class News 5 Coming Soon 6 R4 DTT Нет информации TG 4 Нет информации 5 Coming SoonРусский 21 Основные функции x Антенна. Выберите антенный вход. x Канал. Выберите канал. x Повтор: Выберите Один раз, Ручной, Сб-Вс, Пн-Пт или Ежедневно. При выборе настройки Ручной можно задать нужный день. ✎ Выбранная дата отмечается символом c. x Дата. Можно задать дату. ✎ Эта настройка доступна при выборе значения Один раз для настройки Повтор. x Время начала. Можно задать любое время начала. ✎ На экране Информация можно изменить или отменить расписание. x Отмена расписаний. Отмена просмотра программы по расписанию. x Правка. Изменение просмотра программы по расписанию. x Возврат. Возврат на предыдущий экран. Список каналов CONTENT → Список каналов → ENTERE Просмотр списка всех найденных каналов. • Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели. Список каналов Все 1 1futech 2 24ore.tv 3 BBC World 4 Class News 5 Coming Soon 6 R4 DTT IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE a1 C2 a2 C4 T Сервис L Реж.кан. E Просмотр k Страница ✎При нажатии кнопки CH LIST на пульте дистанционного управления отображается Список каналов. Использование кнопок управления на экране Список каналов. ■ T (Сервис): Нажмите кнопку «Сервис», чтобы вызвать одну из следующих функций. x Просм. прогр..Нажимайте кнопки u / d, чтобы выбрать нужную программу, затем нажмите кнопку ENTERE. (Только для цифрового канала) x Изм. избранное. Сохранение часто просматриваемых каналов в списке избранных каналов. ✎ Выберите Изм. избранное, затем нажмите кнопку ENTERE. – если канал уже добавлен в список избранных каналов, то отображается экран Изм. избранное. x Блокировка / Разблокировка. Блокировка канала, чтобы его нельзя было выбирать и смотреть. ✎ Эта функция доступна, только когда функция «Блокировка канала» включена. ✎ Отображается экран ввода PIN-кода. Введите PIN-код из 4 цифр, значение по умолчанию — «0-0-0-0». PIN-код можно изменить, используя функцию Изменение PIN. x Изменить название канала (Только для аналоговых каналов.): Ввод собственного названия канала. ✎ Эта функция может не поддерживаться в некоторых регионах. x Изм. номера канала: Измените число нажатием соответствующих кнопок с цифрами. ✎ Эта функция может не поддерживаться в некоторых регионах. x Удалить. Можно удалить канал, чтобы в списке отображались только нужные каналы. x Информация. Отображение названия канала, разрешения, режима изображения и других данных (некоторые данные доступны только для цифровых каналов). x Сортировка. Сортировка каналов по названию канала или по номеру канала. (Только для цифрового канала) x Изменить антенну. Выбор настройки Антенна или Кабель. x Режим ред.: Можно выбрать нужные каналы и изменить их. ■ l r (Реж.кан.): Перемещение в тип каналов, которые будут отображаться на экране Список каналов. ✎ Эта опция может зависеть от страны. ■ E (Просмотр / Информация): Просмотр выбранного канала. / Отображение подробной информации о выбранной программе. ■ k (Страница): Переход к следующей или предыдущей странице. Использование функции Просмотр по расписанию на экране Список каналов (зависит от каналов) При выборе функции Просмотр по расписанию на экране Список каналов можно выбрать программы на экране Просм. прогр.. 1. Нажмите кнопку CH LIST и выберите нужный цифровой канал. 2. Нажмите кнопку TOOLST и выберите Просм. прогр.. 3. Нажимайте кнопки u / d, чтобы выбрать нужную программу, затем нажмите кнопку E (Информация). 4. Выберите Просмотр по расписанию, затем нажмите кнопку ENTERE, когда выбор будет завершен. ✎Для отключения функции Просмотр по расписанию выполните этапы 1–3 и выберите Отмена расписаний.Русский 22 Основные функции Меню «Канал» ¦ Повторная настройка каналов MENUm→ Канал → ENTERE Перед запоминанием доступных каналов необходимо выбрать тип Источник сигнала (Антенна / Кабель)t источника сигнала, подключенного к LED-дисплею. Страна (Зависит от страны.) Отображается экран ввода PIN-кода. Введите PIN-код из 4 цифр. ✎Выберите страну, чтобы LED-дисплей смогу автоматически настроить широковещательные каналы. ■ Цифровой канал: Выбор страны для цифровых каналов. ■ Аналоговый канал: Выбор страны для аналоговых каналов. Автонастройка (Зависит от страны.) ✎Автоматически назначенные номера программ могут не соответствовать фактическим или желаемым номерам программ. если канал заблокирован с использованием функции Блокировка канала, то отображается окно ввода PIN-кода. ■ Автонастройка – Антенна / Кабель: Выберите источник сигнала телевещания для запоминания каналов. Цифр. и аналог. / Цифровые / Аналоговые: Выберите источник каналов для запоминания. ✎ При выборе настройки Кабель → Цифр. и аналог. или Цифровые: задайте значение сканирования кабельных каналов. x Режим поиска (Полный / Сеть / Быстрый): выбор режима поиска:Полный / Сеть / Быстрый. x Сеть (Авто / Ручной). Для параметра Идентиф. cети выберите настройку Автоматически или Вручную. x Идентиф. cети: При выборе для параметра Сеть значения Вручную можно задать Идентиф. cети, используя цифровые кнопки. x Частота. Отображение частоты канала. (Разная в каждой стране.) x Модуляция. Отображение доступных значений модуляции. x Скорость передачи. Отображение доступных скоростей передачи. ■ Кабельные параметры поиска (Зависит от страны.) Задание дополнительный параметров поиска, например частоты и скорости передачи для кабельной сети. – Нач. частота / Конечная частота.: Задание начальной и конечной частоты (разные в каждой стране). – Скорость передачи: Отображение доступных скоростей передачи. – Модуляция: Отображение доступных значений модуляции. Настройка вручную Ручной поиск каналов и их сохранение в памяти LED-дисплея. ✎если канал заблокирован с использованием функции Блокировка канала, то отображается окно ввода PIN-кода. ■ Настройка цифровых каналов: Поиск цифрового канала. 1. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы выбрать Создать. ✎ При выборе Антенна → Антенна. Канал, Частота, Полоса пропуск. ✎ При выборе Антенна → Кабель. Частота, Модуляция, Скорость передачи 2. Нажмите кнопку d, чтобы выбрать Поиск. После завершения поиска канал обновляется в списке каналов. ■ Настройка аналоговых каналов: Поиск аналогового канала. 1. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы выбрать Создать. 2. Задайте настройки Программа, Система цвета, Система звука, Канал и Поиск. 3. Нажмите кнопку d, чтобы выбрать Сохранить. После завершения поиска канал обновляется в списке каналов. Передача списка кан. Отображается экран ввода PIN-кода. Введите PIN-код из 4 цифр. Импорт или экспорт таблицы каналов. Для использования этой функции нужно подключить запоминающее устройство USB. ■ Импорт с USB: Импорт списка каналов из USB-устройства. ■ Экспорт на USB: Экспорт списка каналов в USB-устройство. Эта функция доступна при подключении USB-устройства. ✎Формат USB должен быть FAT32. Точная настройка (Только для аналоговых каналов.) При уверенном приеме точная настройка каналов не нужна, так как она выполняется во время поиска и сохранения каналов. При слабом или искаженном сигнале выполните точную ручную настройку канала. Прокручивайте влево или вправо, пока изображение не станет четким. ✎Настройки применяются к просматриваемому в данный момент каналу. ✎Каналы с точной настройкой сохраняются и отмечаются в списке каналов звездочкой «*» справа от номера канала. ✎Для отмены точной настройки выберите Сброс.Русский 23 Основные функции Меню «Изображение» ¦ Смена предварительной настройки «Реж. изображения» MENUm→ Изображение → Реж. изображения → ENTERE Выберите тип изображения. Реж. изображения t ✎При подключении к ПК для настройки Реж. изображения доступны только значения Стандартный и Развлекат. ■ Динамический: Подходит для светлого помещения. ■ Стандартный: Подходит для обычных условий. ■ Кино: Подходит для просмотра фильмов в темном помещении. ■ Развлекат: Подходит для просмотра фильмов и игр. ✎ Эта настройка доступна только при подключении к ПК. ¦ Настройка изображения MENUm→ Изображение → ENTERE Samsung MagicAngle Регулировка угла просмотра экрана для оптимизации качества изображения в соответствии с вашим положением при просмотре. ■ Samsung MagicAngle: При просмотре под углом снизу или сверху, выбирая соответствующий режим для каждого положения, можно добиться такого же качества изображения, как при просмотре из положения прямо пред экраном. x Выкл.. Выберите этот режим при просмотре из положения прямо пред экраном. x Режим комфорта. Выберите этот режим, если вы смотрите на экран снизу. x Вертикально. Выберите этот режим, если вы смотрите на экран сверху. ■ Режим.: Настройка угла просмотра экрана. ✎если для настройки Samsung MagicAngle выбран режим Режим комфорта или Вертикально, то настройка Гамма недоступна. Подсветка / Контраст / Яркость / Четкость / Цвет / Тон(З/К) У телевизора есть несколько настроек управления качеством изображения. ✎Примечание. x В аналоговых режимах TV, PC, AV для телевизионной системы PAL настройка Тон(З/К) недоступна. x При подключении ПК можно изменять только настройки Подсветка, Контраст, Яркость и Четкость. x Настройки можно изменять и сохранять для каждого внешнего устройства, подключенного к LED-дисплею. x Уменьшение яркости изображения сокращает энергопотребление. Настройка экрана ■ Размер картинки: Приставка кабельного телевидения или приемник спутникового телевидения могут иметь свой собственный набор форматов изображения. Однако, рекомендуется использовать в основном режим 16:9. Широкий aвто: Автоматическое изменение размера изображения для получения соотношения сторон 16:9. 16:9. Широкоформатное изображение с соотношением сторон 16:9. Широк. увел.: Увеличение размера изображения более 4:3. ✎ Измените настройку Позиция, используя кнопки u / d. Увеличенный: Увеличение по вертикали широкоформатного изображения с соотношением сторон 16:9 по размеру экрана. ✎ Измените настройки Увеличенный или Позиция. используя кнопки u / d. 4:3. Базовый режим отображения (с соотношением сторон 4:3). ✎ Не смотрите изображение в формате 4:3 в течение длительного времени. Следы от полей слева, справа и по центру экрана могут вызвать остаточное изображение (выгорание экрана), на которое не распространяется гарантия. По разм. экрана: Отображение полного изображения без обрезания для сигнала со входа HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) или с компонентного входа (720p / 1080i / 1080p). ✎ Измените настройку Позиция, используя кнопки u / d / l / r. ✎Примечание. x Доступные настройки размера изображения могут различаться в зависимости от источника сигнала. x Доступные настройки могут отличаться в зависимости от выбранного режима. x При подключении к ПК можно настроить только режимы 16:9 и 4:3. x Настройки можно изменять и сохранять для каждого внешнего устройства, подключенного к входу LED-дисплея. x При выборе настройки По разм. экрана для входного сигнала HDMI 720p 1 строка будет обрезаться вверху, внизу, слева и справа. ■ Увеличенный / Позиция: можно настроить размер и положение изображения с помощью кнопки u / d / l / r. ✎ Эта функция доступна, только когда выбран размер изображения Увеличенный или Широк. увел.. ✎ В режиме Широк. увел. можно изменять только позицию. ✎ Сброс. Сбросьте параметры Увеличенный и Позиция до значений по умолчанию. ■ Размер экрана 4:3 (16:9 / Широк. увел. / Увеличенный / 4:3). Эти настройки доступны только при выборе для размера изображения режима Широкий aвто. Можно выбрать размер картинки 4:3 с широкоформатным преобразованием или оригинальный размер. Для каждой европейской страны требуется разный размер картинки. ✎ Настройка недоступна в режимах HDMI, Компонентный и HDMI/DVI.Русский 24 Основные функции ■ Настройка экрана ПК ✎ Настройка доступна только в режиме ПК. x Грубо / Точно. Удаление или снижение шумности картинки. если шум не удаляется только функцией «Точно», то отрегулируйте частоту как можно точнее (Грубо), а затем повторите настройку «Точно». После уменьшения шума снова настроите изображение, чтобы оно располагалось в центре экрана. x Позиция. Настройте положение экрана ПК с помощью кнопок направления (u / d / l / r). x Сброс настр.: Восстановление стандартных настроек изображения. Значения частоты/положения и точная настройка выбираются Автоподстройкаt автоматически. ✎Эта функция доступна только в режиме ПК. Использование телевизора в качестве компьютерного монитора Настройка ПО компьютера (на примере Windows XP). В зависимости от версии Windows и модели видеокарты фактические окна настроек ПК могут отличаться. В этом случае практически всегда можно использовать базовую информацию о настройке. (если это невозможно, обратитесь к изготовителю компьютера или дилеру Samsung.) 1. В меню «Пуск» Windows выберите «Панель управления». 2. В окне «Панель управления» выберите «Оформление и темы». Отобразится диалоговое окно настроек дисплея. 3. Нажмите «Дисплей», откроется диалоговое окно настроек дисплея. 4. В диалоговом окне настроек дисплея перейдите на вкладку «Параметры». x Правильная настройка размера (разрешения) [Оптимальное: 1920 x 1080 пикселей]. (T19B300: 1366 x 768 пикселей) x если в диалоговом окне настроек дисплея имеется параметр «Частота развертки по вертикали», выберите значение «60» или «60 Гц». если этого параметра нет, просто нажмите «ОК» и закройте диалоговое окно. Правильная осанка при использовании изделия При использовании изделия следите за правильностью осанки. x Выпрямите спину. x Расстояние между глазами и экраном должно составлять 45~50 см. Смотрите на экран прямо и вниз. x Отрегулируйте угол наклона изделия так, чтобы свет не отражался от экрана. x Локти должны быть согнуты под прямым углом, а руки должны находиться на одном уровне с задней стороной кисти. x Согните локти под прямым углом. x Поставьте пятки на пол и согните колени под углом 90 градусов или более. Расположите руки так, чтобы они находились ниже сердца. ¦ Изменение параметров изображения Дополнительные параметры MENUm→ Изображение → Дополнительные параметры → ENTERE (Дополнительные параметры доступны в режимах Стандартный и Кино.) По сравнению с предыдущими моделями новые LED-дисплеи Samsung имеют более четкое изображение. ✎При подключении ПК можно изменять только настройку Баланс белого. Дополнительные параметры Режим только RGB Выкл. Цвет. пространство Исходный Баланс белого Гамма 0 Автоконтраст Высокий Черный тон Выкл. Телесный оттенок 0 ■ Автоконтраст (Выкл. / Низкий / Средний / Высокий): Настройка контрастности экрана. ■ Черный тон (Выкл. / Темный / Темнее / Самый темный): Выбор уровня черного для настройки глубины изображения. ■ Телесный оттенок: Подчеркивание розового «телесного оттенка». ■ Режим только RGB (Выкл. / Красный / Зеленый / Синий): Отображение регуляторов цветов Красный, Зеленый и Синий для точной настройки оттенка и насыщенности. ■ Цвет. пространство (Авто / Исходный): Настройка цветового пространства создания изображения. ■ Баланс белого: Настройка баланса белого для получения более естественного изображения. К: смещ. / З: смещ. / С: смещ:. Настройка смещения каждого цвета (красный, зеленый, синий). К: усил. / З: усил. / С: усил:. Настройка усиления каждого цвета (красный, зеленый, синий). Сброс: Восстановление стандартных значений настройки Баланс белого. ■ Гамма: Настройка интенсивности основного цвета. ■ Подсветка движения (Выкл. / Вкл.): Сокращение энергопотребления с помощью регулировки яркости.Русский 25 Основные функции Параметры изображения MENUm→ Изображение → Параметры изображения → ENTERE ✎При подключении ПК можно изменять только настройку Оттенок. Параметры изображения Оттенок Стандартный Цифр. фильтр шумов Авто Фильтр шумов MPEG Авто Черный HDMI Низкий Режим "фильм" Выкл. ■ Оттенок (Хол. / Стандартный / Теплый1 / Теплый2) ✎ Настройки Теплый1 или Теплый2 отключаются при выборе режима изображения Динамический. ✎ Настройки можно изменять и сохранять для каждого внешнего устройства, подключенного к входу LED-дисплея. ■ Цифр. фильтр шумов (Выкл. / Низкий / Средний / Высокий / Авто / Автовизуализация): При приеме слабого сигнала можно включить функцию Цифр. фильтр шумов, чтобы уменьшить статические изображения и дублирование, которые могут появляться на экране. ✎ При слабом сигнале попробуйте изменять другие настройки, пока не будет получено наилучшее изображение. Автовизуализация: Отображение уровня сигнала при переключении аналоговых каналов. ✎ Функция доступна только для аналоговых каналов. ✎ Полоса зеленого цвета означает прием сигнала максимального доступного уровня. ■ Фильтр шумов MPEG (Выкл. / Низкий / Средний / Высокий / Авто): Уменьшение шумов MPEG для улучшения качества изображения. ■ Черный HDMI (Низкий / Норм.): Выбор уровня черного для настройки глубины изображения на экране. ✎ Настройка доступна только в режиме HDMI (сигналы RGB). ■ Режим «фильм» (Выкл. / Авто1 / Авто2): Функция автоматического распознавания просмотра фильмов со всех источников сигнала и настройки изображения для достижения оптимального качества. ✎ Доступно в ТВ-режиме, HDMI (1080i). ✎ если изображение не выглядит естественным, измените настройку на Выкл. / Авто1 / Авто2 в режиме Режим «фильм». Сброс изображения (Да / Нет) Восстановление стандартных настроек для текущего режима изображения. Меню «Звук» ¦ Смена предварительной настройки «Режим звука» MENUm→ Звук → Режим звука → ENTERE ■ Режим звука Стандартный: Выбор стандартного режима звука. t ■ Музыка: Выделение музыки по отношению к голосу. ■ Кино: Оптимальная настройка звука для фильмов. ■ Четкий голос: Выделение голоса по отношению к другим звукам. ■ Усиление: Повышение интенсивности высокочастотных звуков для людей с нарушениями слуха. ✎если для настройки Выбрать громкогов. выбрано значение Внеш. Ресивер., то настройка Режим звука недоступна. ¦ Изменение настроек звука Звуковой эффект MENUm→ Звук → Звуковой эффект → ENTERE (Только для стандартного режима звука.) ■ Эта функция позволяет добиться эффекта объемного SRS TruSurround HD(Выкл. / Вкл.) t звучания виртуальной 5.1-канальной системы при воспроизведении через два громкоговорителя или наушники за счет применения технологии HRTF (Head Related Transfer Function). ■ SRS TruDialog (Выкл. / Вкл.) Эта функция позволяет усилить звук голоса по сравнению с фоновой музыкой или звуковыми эффектами, чтобы диалоги звучали более четко. ■ Эквалайзер Настройка режима звука. – Баланс L/R. Регулировка баланса между правым и левым громкоговорителем. 100Гц / 300Гц / 1кГц / 3кГц / 10кГц (Настройка диапазона частот). Настройка уровня громкости определенного диапазона частот. – Сброс. Восстановление стандартных настроек эквалайзера.Русский 26 Основные функции ¦ Системы звука и т. д. MENUm→ Звук → ENTERE Параметры передачи звука ■ Язык аудио (Только для цифровых каналов.) Выбор языка звука по умолчанию. ✎ Доступные языки могут различаться в зависимости от передачи. ■ Аудиоформат (Только для цифровых каналов.) Выбор аудиоформата. ■ Описание аудио (Функция доступна не во всех регионах, только для цифровых каналов.) Эта функция обрабатывает аудиопоток AD (Описание аудио), который передается вместе с основным аудиопотоком. ✎ Описание аудио (Выкл./Вкл.). Включение и выключение функции описания аудио. ✎ Громкость. Регулировка громкости описания аудио. Дополнительные настройки (Только для цифровых каналов.) ■ Уровень звука DTV (MPEG / HE-AAC): Эта функция позволяет уменьшить различие между уровнем звукового сигнала (который является одним из сигналов, принимаемых при цифровом телевизионным вещании) и требуемым уровнем громкости. ✎ В зависимости от типа передаваемого сигнала настройку MPEG / HE-AAC можно изменять в диапазоне от -10 дБ до 0 дБ. ✎ Для увеличения или уменьшения громкости изменяйте настройку в диапазоне от 0 до -10. ■ Выход SPDIF: Интерфейс SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace) используется для передачи цифрового звука на громкоговорители и различные цифровые устройства, например DVD плееры, с уменьшением помех. – Аудиоформат: Можно выбрать формат цифрового аудиовыхода (SPDIF). ✎ Доступные форматы цифрового аудиовыхода (SPDIF) могут различаться в зависимости от источника сигнала. – Автозадержка: Исправление проблем с синхронизацией звука при просмотре телевизионных передач или видео и при прослушивании цифрового звука с использованием внешнего устройства, например АV ресивера (0-250 мс). ✎ Эта функция недоступна для устройств серии TB300. ■ Комп Dolby Digital (Line / RF): Эта функция минимизирует разницу между сигналом Dolby Digital и звуковым сигналом (например, MPEG Audio, HE-AAC, ATV Sound). ✎ Выберите Line, чтобы получить динамический звук и RF, чтобы уменьшить разницу между громкими и приглушенными звуками в ночное время. Line: Для сигналов с громкостью больше или меньше -31 дБ (исходное значение) задается уровень выходного сигнала -20 дБ или -31 дБ. RF: Для сигналов с громкостью больше или меньше -20 дБ (исходное значение) задается уровень выходного сигнала -10 дБ или -20 дБ. Настройка громкоговор. ■ Выбрать громкогов: (Внеш. Ресивер. / Громкогов. ТВ).Возможно появление эхо из-за разницы скорости кодирования основного громкоговорителя и аудиоресивера. В этом случае выберите настройку Внеш. Ресивер.. ✎ если для параметра Выбрать громкогов. установлено значение Внеш. громк., то кнопка регулировки громкости и кнопка MUTE не работают и, соответственно, ограничиваются возможности настройки звука. ✎ если для настройки Выбрать громкогов. выбрано значение Внеш. Ресивер.. x Громкогов. ТВ: Выкл., Внеш. Ресивер.: Вкл. ✎ если для настройки Выбрать громкогов. выбрано значение Громкогов. ТВ.. x Громкогов. ТВ: Вкл., Внеш. Ресивер.: Вкл. ✎ если нет видеосигнала, то звук отключается в обоих громкоговорителях. ✎ Эта функция недоступна для устройств серии TB300. ■ Громкость авто (Выкл. / Норм. / Ночь): Для выравнивая громкости во всех каналах выберите значение Норм.. Ночь: В этом режиме звучание улучшается по сравнению с режимом Норм., и практически не создается шум. Этот режим целесообразно использовать ночью. Сброс звука (Да / Нет) Восстановление стандартных значений всех настроек звука. ¦ При выборе функции Выбор режима звука Dual fg, на экране отображается текущий t режим звука. Тип звука Dual f-g По умолчанию A2 стерео Моно Моно Автоматическое Стерео Стерео ↔ Моно изменение Dual Dual f ↔ Dual g Dual f NICAM Стерео Моно Моно Автоматическое Стерео Моно ↔ Стерео изменение Dual Моно ↔ Dual f  Dual g  Dual f ✎если сигнал Стерео слаб, и включено автоматическое переключение, то осуществляется переключение в режим Моно. ✎Включается только для стереозвука. ✎Доступно, только если для настройки Источник выбрано значение ТВ.Русский 27 Основные функции Меню «Система» ¦ Настройка времени MENUm→ Система → ENTERE Время ■ Часы: Настройка времени для использования различных функций таймера LED-дисплея. ✎ Текущее время отображается при нажатии кнопки INFO. ✎ После отключения кабеля питания время нужно устанавливать снова. Режим часов (Авто / Ручной) x Авто. Автоматическая установка времени с использованием сигнала цифрового канала. ✎ Для автоматической установки времени необходимо подключить антенну. x Ручной. Ввод текущего времени вручную. ✎ В зависимости от вещательной станции и сигнала автоматическая настройка времени может оказаться неправильной. В этом случае введите время вручную. Установка часов:. Вручную введите Число, Месяц, Год, Часы и Минуты. ✎ Настройка доступна, только если для режима Режим часов выбрано значение Ручной. ✎ Значения Число, Месяц, Год, Часы и Минуты можно ввести, нажимая цифровые кнопки на пульте ДУ. Часовой пояс (Авто / Ручной) (зависит от страны). Выбор часового пояса. ✎ Эта функция доступна, только если для режима Режим часов выбрано значение Авто. – GMT(GMT-3:00~GMT-1:00 / GMT / GMT+1:00~GMT+ 12:00): Выберите часовой пояс. ✎ Эта функция доступна, только если для настройки Часовой пояс выбрано значение Ручной. – Летнее время (Выкл. / Вкл.). Включение или отключение поддержки летнего времени. ✎ Эта функция доступна, только если для настройки Часовой пояс выбрано значение Ручной. Использование таймера сна ■ Таймер сна t: Автоматическое выключение LED-дисплея через заданный период времени. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 и 180 минут). ✎ Чтобы отключить функцию Таймер сна, выберите Выкл.. Настройка таймера включения / выключения ■ Таймер включения Таймер включения 1 / Таймер включения 2 / Таймер включения 3: Можно настроить три разных таймера включения. Сначала нужно настроить часы. Таймер включения 1 Настройка Выкл. Время 0:00 Громкость 20 Источник ТВ Антенна DTV Канал 1 Вс Пн Вт Ср Чт Пт Сб R Возврат Закрыть Настройка: Выберите Выкл., Один раз, Ежедневно, Пн-Пт, Пн-Cб, Сб-Вс или Ручной. При выборе настройки Ручной можно выбрать день включения таймера. ✎ Выбранные дни отмечаются символом c. Время: Введите часы и минуты. Громкость: Задайте уровень громкости. Источник: Выберите желаемый источник сигнала, когда LED- дисплей включится автоматически. (USB можно выбрать, только если к LED-дисплею подключено USB-устройство) Антенна (если для настройки Источник выбрано значение ТВ). Выберите ATV или DTV. Канал (если для настройки Источник выбрано значение ТВ). Выберите канал. Музыка / Фото (если для настройки Источник выбрано значение USB). Выберите папку USB-устройства, содержащую музыкальные файлы или фотографии, которые будут воспроизводиться при автоматическом включении LED-дисплея. ✎ Примечание. x если USB-устройство не содержит музыкальных файлов или не выбрана папка с музыкальными файлами, то функция таймера не будет работать правильно. x если в USB-устройстве только одна фотография, то слайд-шоу не будет воспроизводиться. x Нельзя выбрать папку с очень длинным именем. x Каждому USB-устройству назначается собственная папка. если используется несколько USB-устройств одного типа, то следует следить за тем, чтобы у назначаемых каждому USB-устройству папок были разные имена. x При использовании функции Таймер включения рекомендуется подключать флеш-накопители USB и кард-ридеры. x Функция Таймер включения может не работать с USB- устройствами со встроенными аккумуляторами, MP3 плеерами или портативными медиаплеерами некоторых изготовителей, так распознавание этих устройств осуществляется очень долго.Русский 28 Основные функции ■ Таймер выключения Таймер выключения 1 / Таймер выключения 2 / Таймер выключения 3: Можно настроить три разных таймера выключения. Сначала нужно настроить часы. Таймер выключ. 1 Настройка Выкл. Время 0:00 Вс Пн Вт Ср Чт Пт Сб R Возврат Закрыть Настройка: Выберите Выкл., Один раз, Ежедневно, Пн-Пт, Пн-Cб, Сб-Вс или Ручной. При выборе настройки Ручной можно выбрать день включения таймера. ✎ Выбранные дни отмечаются символом c. Время: Введите часы и минуты. ¦ Блокировка программ MENUm→ Система → Защита → ENTERE Защита ✎Перед выводом экрана настройки отображается экран ввода PIN-кода. ✎Введите PIN-код из 4 цифр, значение по умолчанию — «0-0-0-0». PIN-код можно изменить, используя функцию Изменение PIN. ■ Блокировка канала (Выкл. / Вкл.): На экране Диспетчер каналов можно заблокировать каналы, например, чтобы дети не смогли смотреть непредназначенные для них программы. ✎ Функция доступна, только если для настройки Источник выбрано значение ТВ. ■ Блокировка программ (зависит от страны). Предотвращение неавторизованного использования, например, просмотра детьми непредназначенных для них программ, с помощью PIN-кода из 4 цифр. если выбранный канал заблокирован, то отображается символ «\». ✎ Элементы экране Блокировка программ различаются в зависимости от страны. ■ Изменение PIN: Отображается экран Изменение PIN. Введите любые 4 цифры, которые будут вашим PIN-кодом. Изменение личного идентификационного номера (PIN) необходимо для настройки LED- дисплея. Введите эти четыре цифры еще раз. После отображения экрана подтверждения PIN-код запоминается. ¦ Экономный режим MENUm→ Система → Экономный режим → ENTERE Экономный режим ■ tЭкон. энергии (Выкл. / Низкий / Средний / Высокий / Откл. экран) : Эта функция регулирует яркость LED-дисплея для уменьшения потребления электроэнергии. При выборе настройки Откл. экран изображение выключается и остается только звук. Для включения изображения нажмите любую кнопку, кроме кнопки регулировки громкости. ■ Режим ожидания (Выкл. / 15 мин / 30 мин / 60 мин): Чтобы предотвратить ненужное потребление электроэнергии, укажите, в течение какого времени LED-дисплей будет оставаться включенным, если он не принимает сигнал. ✎ Функция недоступна, если ПК находится в режиме энергосбережения. ■ Автовыключение (Выкл. / Вкл.): Экономия энергии посредством выключения LED-дисплея, если никакие действия не выполнялись в течение 4 часов. ¦ Другие функции MENUm→ Система → ENTERE Язык ■ Язык меню: Выбор языка меню. ■ Язык телетекста: Выбор языка телетекста. ✎ если выбранный язык вещания недоступен, то выбирается английский язык. ■ Предпочитаемый язык (Основное аудио / Дополнит. аудио / Основные субтитры / Дополнит. субтитры / Основной телетекст / Дополнит. телетекст): Выберите язык, который будет языком по умолчанию при выборе канала. Субтитры Используйте это меню для выбора режима Субтитры. ■ Субтитры (Выкл. / Вкл.): Включение или отключение субтитров. ■ Режим субтитров (Норм. / С нарушен. слуха): Выбор режима субтитров. ■ Язык субтитров: Выбор языка субтитров. ✎ если просматриваемая программа не поддерживает субтитры С нарушен. слуха, то автоматически включаются субтитры По предпочтениям, даже если выбран режим С нарушен. слуха. ✎ если выбранный язык вещания недоступен, то выбирается английский язык.Русский 29 Основные функции Цифровой текст (Отключить / Включить) (Только для Великобритании.) если программа передается с цифровым текстом, то эта функция включена. Время автозащиты ■ Выкл. / 2 часа / 4 часа / 8 часов / 10 часов: если на экране остается неподвижное изображение в течение заданного пользователем времени, то включается заставка, чтобы предотвратить образование на экране остаточных изображений. Общие ■ Макс. энергосбер. (Выкл. / Вкл.): Отключение монитора компьютера, если компьютер не используется в течение определенного времени, что сократить энергопотребление. ■ Игр. режим (Выкл. / Вкл.): При подключении игровой консоли, например PlayStation™ или Xbox™, можно получить более реалистичное изображение, выбрав игровой режим. ✎Примечание. x Меры предосторожности и ограничения для игрового режима – Чтобы отключить игровую консоль и подключить другое внешнее устройство в для настройки Игр. режим выберите значение Выкл. в меню настройки. – При отображении меню LED-дисплея в режиме Игр. режим изображение слегка дрожит. x Игр. режим недоступен, если выбран источник сигнала ТВ или ПК x После подключения игровой консоли для настройки Игр. режим выберите значение Вкл.. К сожалению, вы можете заметить ухудшение качества изображения. x если для настройки Игр. режим выбрано значение Вкл. – Для настройки Реж. изображения задается значение Стандартный, а для настройки Режим звука задается значение Кино. ■ Блокировка панели (Выкл. / Вкл.): Одновременная блокировка или разблокирование всех кнопок на передней панели. если включена «Блокировка панели», то ни одна из кнопок на передней панели не работает. ■ Логот. загрузки (Выкл./Вкл.): Отображение логотипа Samsung при включении LED-дисплея. Общий интерфейc ■ Меню CI: Это меню позволяет выбирать функции меню CAM. Выбор меню CI на основе меню CI карты. ■ Инфо о приложении: Просмотр информации и модуле CAM, вставленном в разъем CI и о карте «CI или CI+ CARD», вставленной в модуль CAM. Модуль CAM можно вставлять во включенный или в выключенный LED-дисплей. 1. Модуль CI CAM можно приобрести у ближайшего дилера, или позвонив по телефону. 2. Надежно вставьте карту «CI или CI+ CARD» в модуль CAM в направлении стрелки. 3. Вставьте модуль CAM с картой «CI или CI+ CARD» в разъем общего интерфейса в направлении стрелки так, чтобы он был выровнен параллельно разъему. 4. Проверьте, можете ли вы смотреть изображение на зашифрованных каналах. ¦ Картинка в картинке (PIP) MENUm→ Система → PIP → ENTERE Можно одновременно смотреть изображение приемника LEDPIP t дисплея и одного внешнего источника видеосигнала. Функция PIP (Картинка в картинке) не работает для того же режима. ✎Примечание. x Выбор источника звука в режиме PIP описан в разделе Выбор звука. x если выключить LED-дисплей при просмотре изображения в режиме PIP, то окно PIP исчезает. x Можно заметить, что изображение в окне PIP выглядит слегка неестественно при использовании основного экрана для просмотра игры или караоке. x если включена Блокировка программ, использовать функцию PIP нельзя. x Настройки PIP Основное изображение Дополнительное изображение HDMI, HDMI (ПК), Компонент, ПК ТВ ■ PIP (Выкл. / Вкл.): Включение или выключение функции PIP. ■ Канал: Выберите канал дополнительного изображения. ■ Размер (Õ / Ã): Выберите размер дополнительного изображения. ■ Позиция (à / – / — / œ): Выберите положение дополнительного изображения. ■ Выбор звука (Основной / Дополнит.): Можно выбрать источник звука (Основной / Дополнит.) в режиме PIP. ¦ DivX® видео по запросу Отображение регистрационного кода, авторизованного для телевизора. Посетив веб-сайт DivX и зарегистрировавшись, можно загрузить регистрационный файл VOD. Для завершения регистрации воспроизведите регистрацию VOD как медиасодержимое. ✎Для получения дополнительной информации о DivX® VOD посетите веб-сайт http://vod.divx.com.Русский 30 Основные функции Меню «Поддержка» MENUm→ Поддержка → ENTERE Самодиагностика ✎Самодиагностика может продолжаться несколько секунд. Это часть нормальной работы LED-дисплея. ■ Тест изображения (Да / Нет): Используется для проверки изображения. Да: если тестовое изображение не появляется, или если на нем имеются помехи, выберите Да. Возможно, LED-дисплей неисправен. Обратитесь за поддержкой в операторский центр Samsung. Нет: если тестовое изображение отображается корректно, выберите Нет. Возможно, проблема с внешним оборудованием. Проверьте подключения. если проблема сохранится, изучите инструкцию по эксплуатации внешнего устройства. ■ Звуковой тест (Да / Нет): Использование встроенной тестовой мелодии для проверки звука. Да: если во время звукового теста звучит только один громкоговоритель, или звука нет, выберите Да. Возможно, LED- дисплей неисправен. Обратитесь за поддержкой в операторский центр Samsung. Нет: если вы слышите звук из громкоговорителей, выберите Нет. Возможно, проблема с внешним оборудованием. Проверьте подключения. если проблема сохранится, изучите инструкцию по эксплуатации внешнего устройства. ■ Информ. о сигнале: (Только для цифровых каналов.) Каналы высокой четкости либо принимаются с отличным качеством, либо недоступны. Отрегулируйте антенну, чтобы увеличить уровень сигнала. ■ Сброс: Восстановление стандартных значений всех настроек, кроме настроек сети. Обновление ПО Обновление ПО можно выполнить, используя широковещательный сигнал, или загрузив новую версию встроенного ПО с сайта www. samsung.com на USB-накопитель. Текущая версия ПО уже установлена в LED-дисплее. ✎Информация о ПО указывается как «Год/Месяц/Число_Версия». Обновление ПО По USB По каналу Альтернативное ПО обеспечение Обновление в реж. ожидан. Через 2 часа Установка последней версии ■ По USB: Вставьте в телевизор USB-накопитель с файлом обновления ПО, загруженным с сайта www.samsung. com. Будьте осторожны — не отключайте питание и не извлекайте USB-накопитель, пока обновление не будет завершено. После завершения обновления ПО телевизор автоматически выключается и снова включается. После обновления ПО восстанавливаются стандартные настройки изображения и звука. Рекомендуется записать ваши настройки, чтобы их можно было легко восстановить после обновления. ■ По каналу: Обновление ПО с использованием широковещательного сигнала. ✎ При выборе этой функции во время передачи ПО выполняется автоматический поиск и загрузка ПО. ✎ Необходимое для загрузки ПО время определяется состоянием сигнала. ■ Альтернативное ПО: Замените текущее программное обеспечение альтернативным. ■ Обновление в реж. ожидан. (Выкл. / Через 1 час / Через 2 часа / 00:00 / 02:00 / 12:00 / 14:00). Обновление будет автоматически выполнено в выбранное время. Так как питание устройства включается, экран может слегка светиться. Это может продолжаться более одного часа, пока обновление ПО не будет завешено. Обращение в Samsung Ознакомьтесь с этой информацией, если LED-дисплей неисправен, или если вы хотите обновить ПО. Вы можете получить информацию о наших центрах поддержки и о загрузке ПО. Дом. стр. содержим. Вы можете получить удовольствие от разного полезного содержимого. Боковая панель телевизора USB-накопительРусский 31 Дополнительные функции Вы можете просматривать видео и фотографии и слушать музыку, сохраненную на запоминающем устройстве USB. 1. Нажмите кнопку CONTENT. 2. Нажимайте кнопки l / r, чтобы выбрать меню (Media Play), затем нажмите кнопку ENTERE. CONTENT → Media Play → ENTERE Использование функции Media Play ¦ Подключение USB-устройства 1. Включите телевизор. 2. Подключите USB-устройство с фотографиями и музыкальными файлами к разъему USB на боковой стороне телевизора. 3. После подключения USB-устройства к телевизору появляется всплывающее окно. В нем можно выбрать подсоединенное устройство. ✎Функция может не работать должным образом с нелицензионными мультимедийными файлами. ✎Что нужно знать перед использованием функции Media Play? x Протокол MTP (Media Transfer Protocol — Протокол передачи мультимедийных данных) не поддерживается. x Поддерживаются файловые системы FAT16, FAT32 и NTFS. x Некоторые типы цифровых камер и аудиоустройств с интерфейсом USB могут быть несовместимы с этим телевизором. x Функция Media Play поддерживает только устройства USB MSC (Mass Storage Class — Класс запоминающих устройств). MSC — это класс запоминающих устройств для хранения данных. Примерами MSC могут служить USB флеш-накопители, устройства чтения флеш- карт и USB жесткие диски (USB концентраторы не поддерживаются). Устройства должны подключаться непосредственно к USB-порту телевизора. x USB жесткие диски не поддерживаются. x Перед подключением устройства к телевизору следует создать резервную копию файлов, чтобы предотвратить из повреждение или потерю данных. Компания SAMSUNG не несет ответственности за любые повреждения файлов или потерю данных. x Не отключайте USB-устройство во время его загрузки. x Чем больше разрешение изображений, тем больше времени требуется для их отображения на экране. x Максимальное поддерживаемое разрешение файлов в формате JPEG — 15360 x 8640 пикселей. x Для неподдерживаемых или поврежденных файлов отображается сообщение «Неподдерживаемый формат файла». x Невозможно воспроизведение файлов MP3 с DRM, которые были загружены с не бесплатных сайтов. DRM (Digital Rights Management — Управление цифровыми правами) — это технология, поддерживающая интегрированное и всесторонне создание, распространение и управление содержимым, включая защиту авторских прав и участие в прибыли поставщиков содержимого, защиту от нелегального копирования содержимого, а также управление выставлением счетов и оплатой. x если подключено более двух устройств PTP, то одновременно можно использовать только одно. x если подключено более двух устройств MSC, то некоторые из них могут не распознаваться. USB-устройства, которые потребляют много энергии (более 500 мА) или требуют высокого напряжения (более 5 В) могут не поддерживаться. x если при подключении или использовании USB-устройства отображается сообщение о превышении допустимого энергопотребления, то устройство может быть не распознано или может функционировать неправильно. Media Play / Видео / Свободно 3,23 ГБ / 3,55 ГБ Cruzer Blade Видео Фотографии Музыка R Возврат • Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели. Боковая панель телевизора USB-накопительРусский 32 Дополнительные функции x если на телевизоре не нажимались кнопки в течение времени, определенного настройкой Время автозащиты, то включается заставка. x На некоторых внешних жестких дисках при подключении к телевизору может автоматически включаться режим энергосбережения. x если используется удлинительный кабель USB, то USB-устройство может быть не распознано, также могут не читаться файлы устройства. x если подключенное к телевизору USB-устройство не распознано, поврежден список файлов устройства, или файлы из списка не воспроизводятся, подключите USB-устройство к ПК, отформатируйте устройство и проверьте подключение. x Функция Media Play поддерживает файлы jpeg только с последовательным представлением данных. ¦ Отображение на экране Выберите файл, используя кнопки u / d / l / r, затем нажмите кнопку ENTERE. Файл воспроизводится. Экран Media Play может отличаться в зависимости от того, как он был вызван. Режим содержимого. Можно выбрать категорию содержимого. Информация. Отображение информации о выбранном содержимом: категория (например, музыка); устройство (например, USB- накопитель); имя папки/файла и страница. Отображение информации о выбранном файле. На папку вверх Video_02 1 янв 2012 Video_02.AVI 1 янв 2012 17,6 МБ Video_03 1 янв 2012 Video_04 1 янв 2012 Video_05 1 янв 2012 Video_06 1 янв 2012 Video_07 1 янв 2012 Video_08 1 янв 2012 Video_01 1 янв 2012 Media Play / Видео / Cruzer.../Video_02.AVI 2 / 8 �µ Постраничн E Воспр. T Сервис R Возврат Кнопки управления • �Возврат на предыдущую страницу. Доступна только в режиме Музыка. • µПереход на следующую страницу. Доступна только в режиме Музыка. • E Воспр.: Воспроизведение медиафайла. • T Сервис. Отображение меню функций. • RВозврат. Возврат на предыдущий этап. • Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели.Русский 33 Дополнительные функции Видео Воспроизведение видео 1. Нажимайте кнопки l / r / u / d, чтобы выбрать в списке файлов нужный видеофайл. 2. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE или кнопку ∂ (Воспроизвести). x В верхней части экрана отображается имя файла и время воспроизведения. x если информация о видеофайле недоступна, то время воспроизведения и индикатор прогресса воспроизведения не отображаются. x Во время воспроизведения можно выполнять поиск с помощью кнопок l и r. x Во время воспроизведения можно использовать кнопки π (Назад) и µ (Вперед). ✎ В этом режиме можно просматривать видеоклипы, содержащиеся в игре, но нельзя играть в саму игру. • Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели. Поддерживаемые форматы субтитров – Внешнее Название расширение Текст с указанием временных меток MPEG-4 .ttxt SAMI .smi SubRip .srt SubViewer .sub Micro DVD .sub или .txt SubStation Alpha .ssa Advanced SubStation Alpha .ass Powerdivx .psb – Внутренние Название Контейнер Xsub AVI SubStation Alpha MKV Advanced SubStation Alpha MKV SubRip MKV Текст с указанием временных меток MPEG-4 MP4Русский 34 Дополнительные функции Поддерживаемые видеоформаты Расширение файла Контейнер Видеокодек Разрешение Частота кадров (кадров/ сек) Скорость потока (Мбит/с) Комментарии Аудиокодек *.avi *.mkv *.asf *.wmv *.mp4 *.3gp *.vro *.mpg *.mpeg *.ts *.tp *.trp *.m2ts *.mts *.divx AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GP VRO VOB PS TS DivX 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920 x 1080 30 20 [40] GMC не поддерживается AC3 LPCM ADMPCM(IMA, MS) AAC HE-AAC WMA DD+ MPEG(MP3) DTS Core Vorbis MPEG4 SP / ASP H.264 BP / MP / HP Не включаются FMO / ASO / RS Поддержка BP / MP / HP Level 4.1 H.263 Profile3, только для стандартного разрешения (SD) Motion JPEG 640 x 480 10 Window Media Video v9 1920 x 1080 20 [40] Поддержка VC1 SP / MP /A P L3, L4 не поддерживается Simple Profile Medium Level Main Profile High Level Advanced Profile Level 3 Поддержка WMV9 MPEG2 Hight Profile High Level MPEG1 MPEG-1, кроме D-pictureРусский 35 Дополнительные функции Другие ограничения ✎Примечание. x При возникновении проблем с содержимым кодека этот кодек не будет поддерживаться. x если информация контейнера неверна и файл содержит ошибки, то правильное воспроизведение этого контейнера невозможно. x Воспроизведение звука или видео может оказаться невозможным, если частота потока или частота кадров содержимого превышает максимальную допустимую частоту кадров, указанную в приведенной выше таблице. x если имеются ошибке в таблице индексов, то функция поиска (перехода) не поддерживается. x При воспроизведении видео через сетевое подключение возможно «подергивание» изображения. Название Формат x Поддержка до H.264, Level 4.1 x H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 и AVCHD не поддерживаются. x MPEG4 SP, ASP: – Менее 1280 x 720: максимум 60 кадров – Более 1280 x 720: максимум 30 кадров x GMC 2 не поддерживается. x Поддержка до WMA 7, 8, 9, STD x WMA 9 PRO не поддерживает более 2 аудиоканалов или аудио без потерь. x WMA с частотой дискретизации звука в 22050 Гц в монорежиме не поддерживается. Фотографии Просмотр фотографий (или Слайд-шоу) 1. Нажимайте кнопки u / d / l / r, чтобы выбрать фотографию в списке файлов. 2. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE. – Когда на экране отображается выбранная фотография, нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы включить слайд-шоу. – Во время слайд-шоу все файлы из списка файлов отображаются один за другим. ✎Во время слайд-шоу могут автоматически воспроизводиться музыкальные файлы, если для настройки Фоновая музыка выбрано значение Вкл.. ✎Настройку Фоновая музыка нельзя изменить, пока не завершится загрузка фоновой музыки. • Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели. 0801181247070.JPG 1 янв 2012 663,0 КБ 1920 x 1080 �µПостраничн E Воспр. T Сервис R Возврат Media Play / Фотографии / Cruzer... / Фотографии / 0801181... .JPG 7 / 1000 На папку вверх Поддерживаемые форматы изображения Расширение файла Формат Разрешение *.jpg JPEG 15360 x 8640 *.bmp BMP 1920 x 1080 *.mpo MPO 15360 x 8640Русский 36 Дополнительные функции Музыка Воспроизведение музыки 1. Нажимайте кнопки u / d, чтобы выбрать музыкальный файл (Музыка) в списке файлов. 2. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE. ✎Отображаются только музыкальные файлы со следующими расширениями. Файлы с другими расширениями не отображаются, даже если они сохранены на том же USB-устройстве. ✎если при воспроизведении MP3-файлы звучат ненормально, измените настройку Эквалайзер в меню Звук. (MP3-файлы с перемодуляцией могут звучать с искажениями.) • Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели. Media Play / Музыка / Cruzer... / Музыка / Музыка_01.mp3 Музыка_01 Исполнитель 1 Музыка_02 Исполнитель 2 Музыка_01 Исполнитель 1 2003 Fallen Other 2:36 / 5:00 Музыка_03 Исполнитель 3 Музыка_04 Исполнитель 4 Музыка_05 Исполнитель 5 Музыка_06 Исполнитель 6 Музыка_07 Исполнитель 7 Музыка_08 Исполнитель 8 Музыка_09 Исполнитель 9 На папку вверх b{ Постраничн EВоспр. T Сервис R Возврат Воспроизведение выбранной музыки 1. Нажмите кнопку TOOLST и выберите функцию Воспр. выбора. 2. Выберите файлы. ✎ Слева от выбранных файлов отображается символ c. 3. Нажмите кнопку TOOLST и выберите функцию Воспр. выбора. ✎ Можно выбрать или отменить выбор всех музыкальных файлов, нажав Выбрать все / Отменить все. Поддерживаемые форматы музыки Расширение файла Тип Кодек *.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 *.m4a *.mpa *.aac *.3ga MPEG4 AAC *.flac FLAC FLAC *.ogg OGG Vorbis *.wma WMA WMAРусский 37 Дополнительные функции ¦ Media Play — Дополнительные функции Меню настроек воспроизведения видео/фотографий/музыки Нажмите кнопку TOOLST, чтобы выполнить следующие операции. Категория Действия Видео Фотографии Музыка Случайный порядок Можно воспроизводить музыку в случайном порядке. > Режим повтора Можно воспроизводить медиафайлы с повтором. > > Реж. изображения Можно настроить параметры отображения. > > Режим звука Можно настроить параметры звучания. > > > Запустить показ слайдов / Остановка показа Можно запустить или приостановить слайд-шоу. > Скор. слайд-шоу Во время слайд-шоу можно выбрать скорость показа фотографий. > Фоновая музыка Можно включить или отключить фоновую музыку во время слайд-шоу. > Настройка фоновой музыки Можно выбрать фоновую музыку, звучащую во время слайд-шоу. > Увеличенный Можно увеличивать изображения в полноэкранном режиме. > Поворот Можно поворачивать изображения в полноэкранном режиме. > Информация Можно посмотреть подробную информацию о воспроизводимом файле. > > > Воспр. выбора Можно воспроизвести выбранные файлы. > > > Фильм Можно перейти непосредственно другому файлу. > Поиск по времени Используя кнопки l и r, в фильмах можно выполнять поиск по времени с интервалом 1 минута. > Размер картинки Можно настроить размер картинки. > Субтитры Вы можете включить или отключить субтитры Вкл. / Выкл.. > Настройки субтитров Эта возможно лишь в том случае, когда имя файла с субтитрами совпадает с именем видеофайла. > Язык аудио Смотрите видео на поддерживаемом языке по своему выбору. Это возможно только при воспроизведении потокового файла, который поддерживает несколько аудиоформатов. >Русский 38 Другая информация Функция «Телетекст» для аналоговых каналов Страница индексов телетекста содержит информацию об использовании этой услуги. Чтобы информация телетекста отображалась правильно,необходим стабильный уровень сигнала канала. если это условие не выполнено, информация может отсутствовать, а некоторые страницы могут не отображаться. ✎Страницы телетекста можно изменять, нажимая цифровые клавиши на пульте ДУ. 1 / (Телетекст включен/ смешанный/выключен). Включение режима телетекста для текущего канала. Нажмите кнопку два раза для наложения телетекста на текущее изображение. Нажмите ее еще раз для отключение телетекста. 2 8 (сохранить). Сохранение страниц телетекста. 3 6 (индекс). Отображение страницы индекса (содержимого) при просмотре телетекста. 4 4 (размер). Отображение увеличенного в два раза телетекста в верхней половине экрана. Чтобы переместить текст в нижнюю половину экрана, нажмите кнопку еще раз. Для обычного отображения нажмите ее еще раз. 5 9 (удержание). Удержание отображения текущей страницы, если имеется несколько вторичных страниц, которые следуют автоматически. Для отмены нажмите еще раз. 6 Цветные кнопки (красная, зеленая, желтая, синяя). В системе FASTEXT эти кнопки используются вещающими компаниями. Различные разделы телетекста отмечены цветами, и их можно выбрать, нажимая цветные кнопки. Нажмите кнопку, цвет которой соответствует цвету нужного раздела. Отображается новая страница, отмеченная цветом. Элементы можно выбирать таким же способом. Для отображения предыдущей или следующей страницы нажмите соответствующую цветную кнопку. 7 0 (режим). Выбор стандартного режима телетекста (LIST/ FLOF). При нажатии кнопки в режиме LIST осуществляется переключение в режим сохранения списка. В режиме сохранения списка сохранение страниц телетекста в списке осуществляется с помощью кнопки 8(сохранить). 8 1 (дополнительная страница). Отображение доступных дополнительных страниц. 9 2 (пролистывание вперед). Отображение следующей страницы телетекста. 0 3 (пролистывание назад). Отображение предыдущей страницы телетекста. ! 5 (открыть). Отображение скрытого текста (например, ответов на вопросы викторин). Для возврата к обычному тексту отмены нажмите кнопку еще раз. @ 7 (отменить). Уменьшение телетекста, наложенного на текущее изображение. Типовая страница телетекста Часть Содержание A Номер выбранной страницы. B Идентификатор вещательного канала. C Номер текущей страницы или символы поиска. D Дата и время. E Текст. F Информация о состоянии. Информация FASTEXT. 7 8 9 0 ! @ 3 1 4 5 6 2Русский 39 Другая информация Крепление кронштейна для настенного монтажа/настольной подставки Подготовка к установке кронштейна для настенного монтажа/настольной подставки 1. Выключите изделие и отключите кабель питания от настенной розетки. 2. Положите мягкую ткань или подушку на ровную поверхность, чтобы защитить панель, и положите изделие лицевой стороной вниз. 3. Держите основной корпус изделия руками. Потяните подставку в направлении стрелки, чтобы отделить ее. Крепление кронштейна для настенного монтажа/настольной подставки 1 A 2 3 4 [ Осторожно Важно При установке настенного крепежа не используйте шурупы длиннее 14 мм (L14). 4. Приложите кронштейн для настенного монтажа/настольную подставку к монитору/LED-дисплею и надежно закрепите кронштейн для настенного монтажа/настольную подставку, затянув винты. 5. Выровняйте паз на задней панели изделия так, чтобы он был соединен с пазом подставки (настольной подставки, кронштейна для настенного монтажа или другой подставки) и надежно зафиксируйте подставку, затянув винты. A B Комплект для настенного крепления/настольная подставка (не входит в комплект поставки) A Кронштейн для настенного монтажа/настольной подставки BРусский 40 Другая информация ✎Примечание. x При использовании винтов, длина которых превышает указанную в спецификации, возможно повреждение внутренних частей изделия. x У кронштейнов для настенного монтажа, которые не совместимы со стандартной спецификацией VESA, длина винтов может отличаться в зависимости от соответствующих спецификаций. x Не используйте винты, которые несовместимы со стандартной спецификацией VESA, и не завинчивайте винты с чрезмерной силой. Это может стать причиной повреждения изделия и травм в результате падения изделия. Компания Samsung не несет ответственности за любые повреждения или травмы. x Компания Samsung не несет ответственности за любое повреждение изделия или травмы, причиной которых стало использование кронштейнов для настенного монтажа/настольных подставок, которые не совместимы со спецификацией, или выполнение установки лицами, не имеющими соответствующих полномочий. x Для настенного монтажа изделия приобретайте кронштейн для настенного монтажа, который обеспечивает расстояние до стены не менее 10 см. x Используйте кронштейн для настенного монтажа в соответствии с международными спецификациями. Замок «кенсингтон» для защиты от кражи Замок «кенсингтон» не поставляется компанией Samsung. Это устройство, используемое для физического крепления системы при использовании в общедоступном месте. Внешний вид и метод запирания могут отличаться от изображенных на иллюстрации в зависимости от изготовителя замка. Дополнительная информация о правильном использовании замка приведена в инструкции по эксплуатации замка «кенсингтон». ✎Найдите символ «K» на задней стороне LED-дисплея. Разъем «кенсингтон» находится рядом с символом «K». Для запирания изделия выполните следующие действия. 1. Оберните кабель замка «кенсингтон» вокруг большого неподвижного объекта, например, стола или стула. 2. Протяните конец кабеля с замком через петлю на конце кабеля замка «кенсингтон». 3. Вставьте запирающее устройство в разъем «кенсингтон» на изделии (1). 4. Заприте замок. 1 <Дополнительно> <Задняя сторона LED-дисплея> ✎Это общая инструкция. Подробная инструкция содержится в руководстве пользователя, прилагаемом к запирающему устройству. ✎Запирающее устройство следует приобретать отдельно. ✎Местоположение разъема «кенсингтон» может различаться в зависимости от модели LED-дисплея.Русский 41 Другая информация Устранение неполадок если у вас возникнут вопросы, связанные с использованием LED-дисплея, сначала изучите этот раздел. если ни один из советов по устранению неполадок не поможет, посетите веб-сайт www.samsung.com и выберите раздел «Поддержка» или позвоните в один из центров поддержки, указанных на последней странице обложки этого руководства. Проблемы Способы решения и разъяснения Качество изображения Сначала выполните Тест изображения и убедитесь в том, что LED-дисплей правильно отображает тестовое изображение. (Вызовите MENU - Поддержка - Самодиагностика - Тест изображения.) если тестовое изображение отображается правильно, плохое изображение может быть обусловлено источником сигнала. Изображение на экране LED-дисплея не выглядит так же хорошо, как в магазине. • если вы используете аналоговое кабельное телевидение/приставку, закажите приставку цифрового телевидения. Используйте кабель HDMI для подключения источника сигнала высокой четкости. • Пользователи кабельного/спутникового телевидения: попробуйте прием каналов высокой четкости. • Антенное подключение: попробуйте прием каналов высокой четкости после автонастройки. ✎ Многие каналы высокой четкости передают материалы, полученные масштабированием содержимого стандартной четкости. • Выберите разрешение выходного сигнала кабельной/спутниковой приставки, равное 1080i или 720p. • Убедитесь в том, что смотрите на экран LED-дисплея с минимального рекомендованного расстояния, основанного на размере и четкости передаваемого изображения. Искажения изображения: ошибка микроблоков, маленькие блоки, точки, пикселизация. • Сжатие видео может стать причиной искажений изображения, в особенности, быстро изменяющегося изображения, например спорта или кинобоевиков. • Низкий уровень сигнала или плохое качество сигнала могут стать причиной искажения изображения. Эта проблема не связана с LED-дисплеем. • Использование мобильных телефонов на близком расстоянии от LED-дисплея (ок. 1 метра) может стать причиной появления шума на изображении аналоговых и цифровых LED-дисплеев. Плохая цветопередача или яркость. • Настройте параметры изображения в меню LED-дисплея. (Выберите Реж. изображения/Цвет/Яркость/Четкость) • Настройте параметр Экон. энергии в меню LED-дисплея. (Выберите MENU — Система — Экономный режим — Экон. энергии) • Попробуйте восстановить стандартные настройки изображения. (Выберите MENU — Изображение — Сброс изображения) На краю экрана отображается пунктирная линия. • если выбран размер изображения По разм. экрана, то измените его на 16:9. • Измените разрешение приставки кабельного/спутникового телевидения. При смене канала изображение останавливается или искажается или задерживается. • При подключении к приставке кабельного телевидения попробуйте перезапустить приставку. Снова подключите кабель питания и подождите, пока приставка кабельного телевидения загрузится. Для этого может потребоваться до 20 минут. • Выберите разрешение выходного сигнала приставки кабельного телевидения равное 1080i или 720p. Качество звука Сначала выполните Звуковой тест и убедитесь в том, что LED-дисплей правильно воспроизводит звук. (Выберите MENU - Поддержка - Самодиагностика - Звуковой тест) если изделие правильно воспроизводит звук (ОК), то проблема может быть обусловлена источником сигнала. Нет звука или слишком тихий звук при максимальной громкости. • Проверьте уровень громкости устройства, подключенного к LED-дисплею (приставка кабельного/спутникового телевидения, DVD, Blu-ray и т. д.). Хорошее качество изображения, но нет звука. • При использовании кабеля DVI-HDMI, LED-дисплей не поддерживает аудио. • Перезагрузите подключенное устройство, отключив и снова подключив кабель питания устройства. • если в LED-дисплея есть разъем для подключения наушников, убедитесь в том, что к этому разъему ничего не подключено. Громкоговорители издают неприятный звук. • При подключении к антенне или кабелю проверьте уровень сигнала. Низкий уровень сигнала может быть причиной искажения звука. Не изображения, нет видео LED-дисплей не включается. • Убедитесь в том, что кабель питания надежно подключен к настенной розетке и LED-дисплею. • Убедитесь в том, что настенная розетка исправна. • Нажмите кнопку питания (POWER) LED-дисплея, чтобы убедиться в том, что проблема не с пультом ДУ. если LED-дисплей включится, см. раздел «Не работает дистанционное управление». LED-дисплей автоматически выключается. • Убедитесь в том, что в меню Время для функции Таймер сна выбрана настройка Выкл.. • если к LED-дисплею подключен ПК, проверьте параметры питания ПК. • Убедитесь в том, что кабель питания надежно подключен к настенной розетке и LED-дисплею. • При просмотре на LED-дисплее эфирных или кабельных каналов LED-дисплей автоматически отключается через 10–15 минут, если нет сигнала.Русский 42 Другая информация Проблемы Способы решения и разъяснения Нет изображения/видео. • Проверьте кабельные подключения (отключите и снова подключите все кабели, подключенные к LED-дисплею и внешним устройствам). • Проверьте, соответствуют ли выходы видеосигнала внешних устройств (приставка кабельного/спутникового телевидения, DVD, Blu-ray и т. д.) входам LED-дисплея. Например, если у внешнего устройства есть выход HDMI, то его следует подключить к входу HDMI LED-дисплея. • Убедитесь в том, что подключенные устройства включены. • Убедитесь в том, что в LED-дисплее выбран правильный источник сигнала, нажав кнопку SOURCE на пульте ДУ LED-дисплея. • Перезагрузите подключенное устройство, отключив и снова подключив кабель питания устройства. Радиочастотное подключение (кабель/антенна) LED-дисплей не принимает каналы. • Убедитесь в том, что кабель антенны надежно подключен. • Запустите функцию Настройка (первоначальная настройка), чтобы добавить доступные каналы в список каналов. Выберите MENU — Система - Настройка (первоначальная настройка) и подождите, пока не будут сохранены все каналы. • Проверьте, правильно ли направлена антенна. Искажения изображения: ошибка микроблоков, маленькие блоки, точки, пикселизация. • Сжатие видео может стать причиной искажений изображения, в особенности, быстро изменяющегося изображения, например спорта или кинобоевиков. • Низкий уровень сигнала может стать причиной искажения изображения. Эта проблема не связана с LED-дисплеем. Другое Изображение не отображается во весь экран. • На каналах высокой четкости есть полосы с обеих сторон экрана при отображении масштабированного содержимого стандартной четкости (4:3). • Черные полосы сверху и снизу отображаются при воспроизведении фильмов, соотношение сторон которых отличается от соотношения сторон LED-дисплея. • Измените размер изображения на внешнем устройстве или LED-дисплее для вывода изображения во весь экран. Не работает дистанционное управление. • Замените батарейки пульта ДУ, соблюдая полярность (+/–). • Протрите окно инфракрасного передатчика на пульте ДУ. • Направьте пульт ДУ прямо на LED-дисплей с расстояния 1,5–2 метра. Пульт ДУ приставки кабельного/ спутникового телевидения не включает или не выключает LED-дисплей или не регулирует громкость. • Запрограммируйте пульт приставки кабельного/спутникового телевидения для работы с LED-дисплеем. Коды LED-дисплея SAMSUNG указаны в инструкции по эксплуатации приставки кабельного/спутникового телевидения. Отображается сообщение «Режим не поддерживается». • Проверьте поддерживаемое разрешение LED-дисплея и соответственно измените выходное разрешение внешнего устройства. LED-дисплей пахнет пластмассой. • Этот нормальный запах, со временем он исчезнет. Функция Информ. о сигнале в меню тестов Самодиагностика LED-дисплея недоступна. • Эта функция доступна только для цифровых каналов, принимаемых по антенному/радиочастотному/коаксиальному входу. LED-дисплей наклонился вправо или влево. • Снимите подставку с LED-дисплея и прикрепите ее снова. Не удается прикрепить подставку. • Убедитесь в том, что LED-дисплей размещен на ровной поверхности. если вам не удается вынуть винты из LED-дисплея, используйте намагниченную отвертку. Меню Канал выделено серым цветом (недоступно). • Меню Канал доступно только при выборе источника телевизионного сигнала. Настройки теряются каждые 30 минут или при каждом выключении LED-дисплея. • если LED-дисплей работает в режиме Демонстрация, то настройки звука и изображения сбрасываются каждые 30 минут. Смените режим с Демонстрация (Демонстрация) на Домашний (Домашний режим), запустив функцию Настройка (первоначальная настройка). Нажмите кнопку SOURCE для выбора режима «ТВ», затем нажмите MENU → Система → Настройка (первоначальная настройка) → ENTERE. Прерывистые потери звука или изображения. • Проверьте кабельные подключения и переподключите их. • Потеря звука или видео может быть обусловлена использованием слишком жестких или слишком толстых кабелей. Убедитесь в том, что кабели достаточно гибкие для долговременного использования. При монтаже LED-дисплея на стене рекомендуется использовать кабели с согнутыми под углом 90 градусов разъемами. если смотреть на кромку рамки LED-дисплея с близкого расстояния, видны маленькие частицы. • Это часть дизайна изделия. Не является дефектом.Русский 43 Другая информация Проблемы Способы решения и разъяснения Недоступно меню PIP. • Функция PIP доступна только при использовании источника сигнала HDMI, Компонент и ПК. LED-был выключен 45 минут назад, однако он снова включился. • Это нормальное явление. LED-дисплей использует фикцию беспроводной (OTA) загрузки обновления ПО, пока вы смотрите телевизор. Появляется сообщение «Недопустимый сигнал» или «Слабый сигнал / Нет сигнала». • При использовании модуля CAM CARD (CI/CI+) убедитесь в том, что он остановлен в разъем общего интерфейса. • если проблема сохранится, выньте модуль CAM CARD из LED-дисплея и установите его в разъем снова. Периодические проблемы с изображением/ звуком. • Проверьте и измените источник сигнала. Резиновые ножки подставки могут оставлять следы на поверхности мебели. • Чтобы предотвратить это, используйте войлочные прокладки в тех местах, где LED-дисплей касается мебели. ✎В этом изделии используется панель, состоящая из субпикселей, изготовляемых с применением сложных технологий. Несмотря на это на экране может быть несколько ярких или темных пикселей. Эти пиксели не влияют на потребительские свойства изделия. ¦ Хранение и обслуживание ✎если на экран LED-дисплея были наклеены наклейки, то после их удаления остаются следы. Удалите их, чтобы смотреть LED-дисплей. ✎Внешние панели и экран изделия можно поцарапать во время чистки. Осторожно протирайте внешние панели и экран, используя прилагаемую салфетку или мягкую ткань. Не разбрызгивайте воду или чистящее средство непосредственно на изделие. Попадание любой жидкости в изделие может стать причиной неисправности, пожара или поражения электрическим током. Протирайте изделие мягкой тканью, слегка смоченной в воде. [ОСТОРОЖНО если высота « A» с одной стороны отличается от этой высоты с другой стороны, отрегулируйте высоту.Русский 44 Другая информация ¦ Лицензия TheaterSound HD, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TheaterSound HD technology is incorporated under licence from SRS Labs, Inc. Изготовлено по лицензии Dolby Laboratories. Dolby и символ двойное «D» являются торговыми марками Dolby Laboratories. 2.0 Channel Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. (Доступно только в изделиях серии TB300.) Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. (Доступно только в изделиях серии TB350.) Уведомление о лицензии на ПО с открытым исходным кодом В случае использования ПО с открытым исходным кодом, лицензия на ПО с открытым исходным кодом доступна в меню изделия. Уведомление о лицензии на ПО с открытым исходным кодом написано только на английском языке. ¦ Директива по утилизации электрического и электронного оборудования Надлежащая утилизация этого изделия (Директива по утилизации электрического и электронного оборудования) (Применяется в странах ЕС и других европейских странах с системами раздельного сбора отходов) Этот символ на изделии, принадлежностях или документации означает, что изделие и его электронные принадлежности (например, зарядное устройство, гарнитура, USB-кабель) не должны утилизироваться с другим бытовым мусором после окончания их срока службы. Для предотвращения причинения ущерба окружающей среде и здоровью людей в результате неконтролируемой утилизации отходов отделяйте эти устройства от других типов отходов и утилизируйте их с должной ответственностью, чтобы способствовать устойчивому повторному использованию материальных ресурсов. Бытовые потребители должны обратиться к розничному продавцу, у которого они приобрели изделие или в органы местной власти, чтобы получить подробную информацию о том, как и где они могут сдать эти устройства для безопасной для окружающей среды утилизации. промышленные потребители должны обратиться к своим поставщикам и проверить условия контракта на покупку. Это изделие и его электронные принадлежности не должны при утилизации смешиваться с другими отходами. Надлежащая утилизация батареек этого изделия (Применяется в странах ЕС и других европейских странах с отдельными системами возврата батарей.) Этот символ на батарее, в руководстве или на упаковке означает, что используемые в этом изделии батареи не должны утилизироваться с другим бытовым мусором после окончания их срока службы. Нанесенные на батареи символы Hg, Cd или Pb означают, что батареи содержат ртуть, медь или свинец в количествах, превышающих нормы, определенные директивой еС 2006/66. если батареи не утилизируются должным образом, эти вещества могут причинить ущерб здоровью людей и окружающей среде. Для защиты природных ресурсов и способствования повторному использованию материальных ресурсов батареи следует отделять от других типов отходов и утилизировать через бесплатную местную систему возврата батарей.Русский 45 Другая информация жК-монитор со встроенным ТВ-тюнером - устройство для визуального отображения текстовой и графической информации, в том числе программ телевизионного вещания. Технические характеристики Условия окружающей среды Эксплуатация Температура: 10°C ~ 40°C (50°F ~ 104°F) Влажность: 10–80 %, без конденсации Хранение Температура: -20°C ~ 45°C (-4°F ~ 113°F) Влажность: 5–95 %, без конденсации Наклон -1°(±2°) ~ 20°(±2°) Телевизионная система Аналоговое телевидение: B/G, D/K, L, I (зависит от выбранной страны) Цифровое телевидение: DVB-T/DVB-C Система цвета/видео Аналоговое телевидение: PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43, NTSC-3.58, PAL60 Цифровое телевидение: MPEG-2 MP@ML, MPEG-4, H.264/AVC MP@L3, MP@L4.0, HP@L4.0 Система звука BG, DK, L, NICAM, MPEG1, DD, DD+, HEAAC Вход HDMI Видео: 1080p 24 Гц, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 480p Звук: 2-канальный линейный PCM 32/44,1/48 кГц, 16/20/24 бита. Номер сертификата РОСС KR.AB57.B00056 Срок действия сертификата с 13.01.2011 по 12.01.2014 Орган сертификации OOO "АЛЬТТеСТ" 117418, Москва, ул. Цюрупы, д.14 IP (степень защиты от попадания твердых частиц и влаги) IP 20 Класс защиты прибора от поражения электрическим током оборудование класса II Напряжение питания переменного тока Переменный ток: 100-240 В Название модели T19B300 T22B300 T24B300 T27B300 Размер экрана (по диагонали) 18,5 дюйма(47 см) 21,5 дюйма (55 см) 23,6 дюйма (60 см) 27 дюймов (69 см) Разрешение дисплея 1366 x 768 при 60 Гц 1920 x 1080 при 60 Гц Звук (выход) 5 Вт x 2 Размеры (ШxГxВ) (Без подставки) 444,7 x 48,5 x 278,2 мм 509,7 x 47 x 318,2 мм 569,2 x 49 x 349,4 мм 643,3 x 49 x 397,9 мм (С подставкой) 444,7 x 187 x 356,4 мм 509,7 x 195 x 396,6 мм 569,2 x 195 x 428 мм 643,3 x 252 x 476,5 мм Масса (Без подставки) 2,95 кг 3,7 кг 4,25 кг 5,1 кг (С подставкой) 3,2 кг 3,95 кг 4,5 кг 5,6 кг Название модели T22B350 T23B350 T24B350 Размер экрана (по диагонали) 21,5 дюйма (55 см) 23 дюйма (58 см) 24 дюйма (61 см) Разрешение дисплея 1920 x 1080 при 60 Гц Звук (выход) 5 Вт x 2 Размеры (ШxГxВ) (Без подставки) 509,7 x 47 x 318,2 547,5 x 49 x 337,9 мм 569,2 x 49 x 349,4 мм (С подставкой) 509,7 x 195 x 396,6 мм 547,5 x 195 x 416,1 мм 569,2 x 195 x 428 мм Масса (Без подставки) 3,7 кг 3,25 кг 4,15 кг (С подставкой) 3,95 кг 3,5 кг 4,45 кг ✎Примечание. x Внешний вид и технические характеристики могут изменяться без уведомления. x Информация об электропитании и потреблении энергии указана на этикетке изделия. x Некоторые модели могут быть недоступны в некоторых регионах. x если выключателя питания нет, то нулевого энергопотребления можно добиться, только отключив кабель питания. x Функция управления питанием дисплея (DPM) не работает при использовании порта HDMI IN (DVI) этого изделия.Обращение в Samsung во всем мире Если у вас возникнут вопросы или комментарии, относящиеся к продукции Samsung, обратитесь в центр поддержки SAMSUNG. Страна Центр поддержки Веб-сайт RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 http://www.samsung.com GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 http://www.samsung.com ARMENIA 0-800-05-555 http://www.samsung.com AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 http://www.samsung.com KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500(GSM: 7799) http://www.samsung.com ТОО "Самсунг Электроникс КЗ Энд Централ Эйжа" 050000, Республика Казахстан, город Алматы, улица Наурызбай батыра, 31, 6-7 этаж UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com MONGOLIA - http://www.samsung.com UKRAINE 0-800-502-000 http://www.samsung.com/ua http://www.samsung.com/ua_ru BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com Производитель: ООО «Самсунг Электроникс Рус Калуга», 249002, Калужская обл., Боровский р-н, д. Коряково, Первый Северный проезд, владение 1 © Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd., 2012. Все права защищены BN46-00196T-02 Samsung Universal Print Driver User’s Guide imagine the possibilitiesCopyright_ 2 Copyright © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. This admin guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without any notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide. • Samsung Universal Print Driver is a trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd • Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. • All other brand, product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. REV. 1.00Contents_ 3 Contents COPYRIGHT/2 CONTENTS/3 INTRODUCTION Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 USING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Layout overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting the pop-up option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting the printer search option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Searching print devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 By TCP/IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 By Search Now menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Creating a favorite folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Basic printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Changing the selected printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 INDEX/14Introduction_ 4 1.Introduction The Samsung Universal Print Driver is a single driver that can be used with different printer models. This gives users instant access to not only Samsung print devices but also a range of other vendor's PDL based devices without the need to download separate drivers. • PDL means both PCL and PS. • Samsung does not guarantee the quality of other vendors’ printer devices and Samsung models that are not supported (Click to see the supported Samsung device list). For unsupported Samsung models, driver is automatically set to usable default PDL. Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers The following table shows the differences between the Samsung Universal Print Driver and the product based drivers: System requirements Minimum system requirements for the Samsung Universal Print Driver are as follows: SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER MODEL SPECIFIC DRIVERS User interface Consistent user interface. Inconsistent user interface. Installation • Download and install with the installer file provided with the Samsung Universal Print Driver. • Install via executing the installer file. • Manually locate, download, and install driver for each device. • Install via CD autorun or Add printer wizard. Device discovery Easily locate and access suggested devices from the whole Samsung printer products. Manually discover devices. Availability Available on the Samsung web site. Available on the CD provided with the device, or the product based driver. OPERATING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS CPU RAM FREE HDD SPACE Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 GB 40 GB Windows XP 300 MHz or higher 128 MB RAM or higher 1.5 GB or higher (additional 1.8 GB in SP2 and additional 900 MB in SP3 Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 MB 2GB Windows Server 2003 550 MHz or higher 256 MB RAM or higher 2.9 GB or higher Windows Server 2008 2 GHz or faster 2 GB RAM or higher 40 GB or higherInstalling and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5 2.Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for installing and uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver. The following windows are for a PCL driver in Windows XP. Windows may differ for a PS driver, but the steps are the same. Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver Before installing the driver, check the recommended minimum requirements for your system (See "System requirements" on page 4). 1. Start a web browser and go to www.samsung.com. 2. Search for the Samsung Universal Print Driver setup file. 3. Start the setup file. The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens. 4. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. After the installation window opens, wait for installation to be completed. 5. After the Setup Completed window opens, click Finish. If you want to register yourself as a user of Samsung devices in order to receive information from Samsung, select the Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6 checkbox and click Finish. If the driver is installed properly, you can find the Samsung Universal Print Driver in the Printers and Faxes folder. Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver If you want to uninstall the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select > All Programs > Samsung Universal Print Driver > Maintenance. The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens. 2. Select Remove and click Next. 3. Select the components you want to remove and click Next. 4. A confirmation window appears, click Yes. 5. When unistallation is completed, click Finish. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7 3.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver The main purpose of the Samsung Universal Print Driver is to install one driver (Samsung Universal Print Driver) and use it with different print devices. However, the Samsung Universal Print Driver has other features like searching print devices, creating a favorites folder, and checking a device’s status. Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. If there’s no recently used printer, a pop-up window asking you to search printers appears. Click OK to search connected printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8 Layout overview 1 Layout bar Includes displaying options. • : Selects the layout for the Samsung Universal Print Driver window. If you choose Layout2 and installed the Samsung Smart Panel program, you can see the status window(number 4). • : Refreshes all the printer information in the list. • : Selects the view type for the printer list. Detail View shows printer information such as Address, Location, Status and System name. Image View also shows printer information except with a larger printer image. This option is only supported on Windows XP(and later). • : Displays the printer list in groups. This option is only supported on Windows XP(and later). • : Searches for a printer in the list by a keyword like a model name. • : Opens the help window. • : Shows information about the Samsung Universal Print Driver.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9 Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings Setting the pop-up option You can set the Samsung Universal Print Driver window to appear when you print. There are four options for this window to pop-up: 1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner. 2 Main menus • Recent - Recently Used Printers : Shows the list of recently used printers. The most recently used printer is at the top of the list. - Recently Searched Printers : Shows the list of recently found printers. The most recently found printer is at the top of the list. • Search - Search Now : Searches printers that are connected either by USB or network. - Search by Address : Searches for a printer by the printer’s IP address. • My Printer - Create a Favorite Folder : Creates a folder for favorite printers. • Settings : Displays options for pop-ups and searches. 3 Printer list Shows printer list. 4 Status window Shows status of the selected printer in the list. You need to select Layout2 and install the Samsung Smart Panel program to see this window. • Update Now : Updates the selected printer’s information. • Buy Supplies : Opens the website for buying supplies. • TroubleShooting Guide : Opens the troubleshooting chapter of the user’s guide. You need to install the Smart Panel of the model you are using to see the troubleshooting guide. • Printer Settings : Opens SyncThur Web Service, which provides options for configuring and managing your printer. You can only use this option with network printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10 2. Click the Pop-up tab. A sample of Pop-up tab is shown in the following figure. • When driver UI appears: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears when you open a Printing Preferences (Properties) window. • Every time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears every time you print. • Only the first time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only for the first time when Samsung Universal Print Driver is selected as the printer from an application. • Only when the last printer used is not available: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only if the printer that was last used is not available. 3. Click OK. Setting the printer search option To set the search options for the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: 1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11 2. Click the Search tab and select one of the following options. • Search only supported printer: Searches only supported printers connected. Click to see the supported Samsung device list • Search all the printers: Searches all connected printers. 3. Click OK. Searching print devices By TCP/IP address If you know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can search the device by typing the TCP/IP address. Follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. The Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. 4. Click Search by Address. A window appears. 5. Type in the TCP/IP address of your printer and click OK. By Search Now menu If you don’t know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can use the Search Now option to search for the device. Follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. 4. Click Search Now. Samsung Universal Print Driver searches the connected print devices. The search result might differ depending on the search option you have selected (See "Setting the printer search option" on page 10.) Creating a favorite folder You can create a folder with the printers you use the most for your convenience. For example, if you travel between home and work sites, you can create two different printer folders; Home and Work, and manage the printers as needed. To create a favorite folder, follow the steps below: Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12 1. Click Create a Favorite Folder. Add new favorite folder window appears. 2. Type in a folder name. 3. Click OK. A new folder is added under My Printer. To add printers to a folder under My Printer, you can drag-and-drop the print from the list to the folder or right-click the printer in the list and select Move or Copy. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13 Help Click the Help button ( )in the upper right of the Samsung Universal Print Driver window. A help window appears. Use this help to answer your questions about using the Samsung Universal Print Driver. Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver Basic printing To print a document using Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: The following steps show printing from Notepad. Menu names might differ depending on the application you are using. 1. Open the file that you want to print in an application. 2. From the menu bar select File > Print. 3. Select the Samsung Universal Print Driver from the printer list. 4. Click OK. Printing begins. Or, depending on the pop-up option (see "Setting the pop-up option" on page9) you selected, the Samsung Universal Print Driver window might appear before printing. Choose the printer you want to use and print. Changing the selected printer 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Printing Preferences (Properties) window opens. 4. Select another printer either from the printer list or by searching (See "Searching print devices" on page 11). 5. Click OK. All subsequent printing will now be directed to the new printer.Index_ 14 Index A accessing 7 C copyright 2 D difference 4 F folder 11 I installing 5 introduction 4 L layout 8 P printing 13 S search search button 11 TCP/IP 11 setting 9 pop-up window 9 search option 10 system requirements 4 U uninstalling 6 using 7 Samsung Universal Print Driver Mode d’emploi imaginez les possibilitésCopyright_ 2 Copyright © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés. Le présent guide administrateur n’est fourni qu’à titre informatif. Toutes les informations communiquées ci-après sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis. Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable des dommages, directs ou indirects, consécutifs à l’utilisation de ce guide. • Samsung Universal Print Driver est une marque commerciale de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Samsung et le logo Samsung sont des marques commerciales de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer et Windows Vista sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. • L’ensemble des autres marques, produits et noms d’entreprises peuvent être la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. REV. 1.00Table des matières_ 3 Table des matières COPYRIGHT/2 TABLE DES MATIÈRES/3 INTRODUCTION Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle . . . . . 4 Configuration requise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 INSTALLATION ET DÉSINSTALLATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 5 Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 6 UTILISATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . 7 Aperçu de la mise en page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Recherche des périphériques d’impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Par adresse TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Par le menu Rechercher maintenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Création d’un dossier de favoris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Impression de base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 INDEX/15Introduction_ 4 1.Introduction Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est un pilote unique pouvant être utilisé avec différents modèles d’imprimantes. Cela permet aux utilisateurs d’accéder directement non seulement aux périphériques d’impression Samsung, mais également à une gamme de périphériques d’autres fournisseurs sans avoir à télécharger de pilotes séparés. • PDL signifie PCL et PS. • Samsung ne garantit pas la qualité des périphériques d’impression d’autres fournisseurs et des modèles Samsung non pris en charge (Cliquez sur pour consulter la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en charge). Pour les modèles Samsung non pris en charge, le pilote est automatiquement défini sur PDL par défaut utilisable. Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle Le tableau suivant montre les différences entre le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver et les pilotes de produits spécifiques : Configuration requise La configuration minimale requise pour le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est la suivante : SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER PILOTES SPÉCIFIQUES À UN MODÈLE Interface utilisateur Interface utilisateur cohérente. Interface utilisateur incohérente. Installation • Téléchargez et installez le ficher d’installation fourni avec le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. • Installez en exécutant le fichier d’installation. • Localisez, téléchargez et installez manuellement le pilote pour chaque périphérique. • Installez via l’exécution automatique du CD ou via l’assistant Installation d’imprimante. Découverte de périphériques Localisez facilement et accédez aux périphériques suggérés parmi l’ensemble des produits d’impression Samsung. Découvrez manuellement les périphériques. Disponibilité Disponible sur le site Web Samsung. Disponible sur le CD fourni avec le produit, ou avec le pilote spécifique du produit. SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITATION CONFIGURATION REQUISE PROCESSEUR RAM ESPACE LIBRE SUR LE DISQUE DUR Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 Go 40 Go Windows XP 300 MHz ou supérieur 128 Mo de RAM ou supérieur 1,5 Go ou supérieur (1,8 Go supplémentaires pour SP2 et 900 Mo pour SP3 Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 Mo 2 Go Windows Server 2003 550 MHz ou supérieur 256 Mo de RAM ou supérieur 2,9 Go ou supérieur Windows Server 2008 2 GHz ou plus rapide 2 Go de RAM ou supérieur 40 Go ou supérieurInstallation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5 2.Installation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Ce chapitre vous guide pas à pas dans la procédure d’installation et de désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Les fenêtres suivantes s’appliquent à un pilote PCL dans Windows XP. Les fenêtres peuvent varier pour un pilote PS, mais les étapes sont les mêmes. Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Avant d’installer le pilote, vérifiez la configuration minimale requise pour votre système (Voir « Configuration requise » à la page 4). 1. Ouvrez un navigateur Web et visitez www.samsung.com. 2. Recherchez le fichier d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Lancez le fichier d’installation. L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Suivant. Au besoin, sélectionnez une langue dans la liste déroulante. Une fois la fenêtre d’installation ouverte, attendez que l’installation se termine.Installation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6 5. Quand la fenêtre Installation terminée s’ouvre, cliquez sur Terminer. Pour vous inscrire en tant qu’utilisateur de périphériques Samsung et recevoir des informations du fabricant, cochez cette case et cliquez sur Terminer. Si le pilote est installé correctement, vous pouvez trouver le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dans le dossier Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Si vous voulez désinstaller le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez > Tous les programmes > Samsung Universal Print Driver > Maintenance. L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 2. Sélectionnez Supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Sélectionnez les composants à supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4. Lorsqu’un message de confirmation s’affiche, cliquez sur Oui. 5. Une fois la désinstallation terminée, cliquez sur Terminer. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7 3.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Le principal objectif du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est d’installer un pilote (Samsung Universal Print Driver) et de l’utiliser avec différents périphériques d’impression. Toutefois, le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dispose d’autres fonctions, comme la recherche de périphériques d’impression, la création d’un dossier de favoris et la vérification de l’état d’un périphérique. Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. Si aucune imprimante n’a été utilisée récemment, une fenêtre indépendante vous demandant de rechercher des imprimantes s’ouvre. Cliquez sur OK pour rechercher les imprimantes connectées. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8 Aperçu de la mise en page 1 Barre de mise en page Inclut les options d’affichage. • : Sélectionne la mise en page de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . Si vous choisissez Mise en page2 et que le programme Samsung Smart Panel est installé, vous pouvez voir la fenêtre d’état (numéro 4). • : Actualise toutes les informations relatives à l’imprimante dans la liste. • : Sélectionne le type de vue pour la liste des imprimantes. Vue détaillée affiche les informations relatives à l’imprimante, comme son Adresse, son Emplacement, son État et son Nom système. Vue image affiche également les informations relatives à l’imprimante, sauf dans le cas d’une image d’imprimante plus grande. Cette option n’est prise en charge que sous Windows XP (et ultérieur). • : Affiche la liste des imprimantes par groupes. Cette option n’est prise en charge que sous Windows XP (et ultérieur). • : Recherche une imprimante dans la liste en fonction d’un mot clé, comme un nom de modèle. • : Ouvre la fenêtre d’aide. • : Affiche des informations relatives au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9 2 Menus principaux • Récent - Imprimantes récemment utilisées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes récemment utilisées. L’imprimante utilisée le plus récemment est en haut de la liste. - Imprimantes récemment recherchées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes récemment trouvées. L’imprimante trouvée le plus récemment est en haut de la liste. • Recherche - Rechercher maintenant : Recherche les imprimantes connectées via USB ou via le réseau. - Rechercher par adresse : Recherche une imprimante en fonction de son adresse IP. • Mon imprimante - Créer un dossier favori : Crée un dossier d’imprimantes favorites. • Paramètres : Affiche les options pour les fenêtres indépendantes et les recherches. 3 Liste des imprimantes Affiche la liste des imprimantes. 4 Fenêtre d’état Affiche l’état de l’imprimante sélectionnée dans la liste. Vous devez sélectionner Mise en page2 et installer le programme Samsung Smart Panel pour voir cette fenêtre. • Mettre à jour maintenant : Met à jour les informations de l’imprimante sélectionnée. • Achat de fournitures : Ouvre le site Web d’achat de fournitures. • Guide de dépannage : Ouvre le chapitre de dépannage du mode d’emploi. Vous devez installer le programme Smart Panel du modèle que vous utilisez pour voir le guide de dépannage. • Paramètres de l’imprimante : Ouvre le Service Web SyncThru, qui propose des options de configuration et de gestion de votre imprimante. Vous ne pouvez utiliser cette option qu’avec des imprimantes réseau. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10 Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante Vous pouvez configurer la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver pour qu’elle s’affiche lorsque vous réalisez une impression. Il existe quatre options pour l’affichage de cette fenêtre indépendante : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche. 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle. La figure suivante montre un exemple d’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle. • Lorsque l'interface du pilote apparaît: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche lorsque vous ouvrez une fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés). • A chaque impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche chaque fois que vous réalisez une impression. • Seulement lors de la première impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche uniquement la première fois que le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est sélectionné comme imprimante depuis une application. • Seulement lorsque la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver ne s’affiche que si la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11 Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante Pour configurer les options de recherche du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche. 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Rechercher et sélectionnez une des options suivantes. • Rechercher uniquement les imprimantes prises en charge: Recherche uniquement les imprimantes connectées prises en charge. Cliquez sur pour voir la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en charge. • Rechercher toutes les imprimantes: Recherche toutes les imprimantes connectées. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12 Recherche des périphériques d’impression Par adresse TCP/IP Si vous connaissez l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous souhaitez utiliser, vous pouvez le rechercher en tapant son adresse TCP/IP. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Rechercher par adresse. Une fenêtre s’ouvre. 5. Tapez l’adresse TCP/IP de votre imprimante et cliquez sur OK. Par le menu Rechercher maintenant Si vous ne connaissez pas l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous voulez utiliser, vous pouvez utiliser l’option Rechercher maintenant pour rechercher le périphérique. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Rechercher maintenant. Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver recherche les périphériques d’impression connectés. Le résultat de la recherche peut varier en fonction de l’option de recherche que vous avez sélectionnée (Voir « Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante » à la page 11.)Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13 Création d’un dossier de favoris Pour des raisons pratiques, vous pouvez créer un dossier contenant les imprimantes que vous utilisez le plus souvent. Par exemple, si vous naviguez entre votre domicile et plusieurs sites de travail, vous pouvez créer deux dossiers d’imprimantes différents ; Domicile et Travail, puis gérer les imprimantes selon vos préférences. Pour créer un dossier de favoris, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Cliquez sur Créer un dossier favori. La fenêtre Ajouter un nouveau dossier de favoris s’ouvre. 2. Tapez un nom de dossier. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Un nouveau dossier est ajouté dans Mon imprimante. Pour ajouter des imprimantes à un dossier dans Mon imprimante, vous pouvez glisser-déposer le dossier ou cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris dans la liste et sélectionner Déplacer ou Copier. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 14 Aide Cliquez sur le bouton Aide ( ) en haut à droite de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Une fenêtre d’aide s’ouvre. Utilisez cette aide pour trouver les réponses à vos questions au sujet du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Impression de base Pour imprimer un document en utilisant le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : Les étapes suivantes montrent une impression à partir de Notepad. Les noms des menus peuvent varier en fonction de l’application que vous utilisez. 1. Ouvrez le fichier que vous souhaitez imprimer dans une application. 2. Dans la barre de menu, sélectionnez Fichier > Imprimer. 3. Sélectionnez le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dans la liste des imprimantes. 4. Cliquez sur OK. L’impression démarre. Ou, en fonction de l’option de fenêtre indépendante (voir « Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante » à la page 10) que vous avez sélectionnée, la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver peut s’ouvrir avant l’impression. Sélectionnez l’imprimante que vous souhaitez utiliser et imprimez. Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés) s’ouvre. 4. Sélectionnez une autre imprimante dans la liste des imprimantes ou en effectuant une recherche (Voir « Recherche des périphériques d’impression » à la page 12). 5. Cliquez sur OK. Toutes les impressions suivantes sont alors dirigées vers la nouvelle imprimante.Index_ 15 Index A accès 7 C configuration requise 4 copyright 2 D définition 10 fenêtre indépendante 10 option de recherche 11 désinstallation 6 différence 4 dossier 13 I impression 14 installation 5 introduction 4 M mise en page 8 R recherche bouton de recherche 12 TCPIP 12 U utilisation 7 SCX-3200 Series Multi-Functional Mono Printer User’s Guide imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product. Copyright_ 2 copyright © 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide. • Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks fo Hewlett-Packard Company. • Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. • PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc. • USFT® and MicroType™ are registed trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc. • iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, TrueType, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc. • LaserWriter is a trademark of Apple Inc. • All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information. REV. 1.01Safety information_ 3 safety information These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference. IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of danger. Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide: Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death. Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Do not attempt. Do not disassemble. Do not touch. Unplug the power cord from the wall socket. Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock. Call the service center for help. Follow directions explicitly. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Warning Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is not grounded. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord. ► Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire. Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.). ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the plug with wet hands. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Safety information_ 4 Caution During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not attempt to force it in. ► Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could result in electric shock. Be careful, the paper output area is hot. ► Burns could occur. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords. ► This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet. If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. OPERATING METHOD Caution Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing. ► It can cause damage to the machine. When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch. ► Burns can occur. Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray. ► You may get injured. When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects. ► It can damage the machine. Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening. ► This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire. Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray. ► It can damage the machine. Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper. ► New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts. This machine's power interception device is the power cord. ► To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet. If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Safety information_ 5 INSTALLATION / MOVING Warning Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity or water leaks. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all cords. Then lift the machine: • If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09lb), lift with 1 person. • If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09lb) - 40kg (88.18lb), lift with 2 people. • If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18lb), lift with 4 or more people. ► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage. Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location, such as a closet. ► If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire. Do not place the machine on an unstable surface. ► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage. Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. The machine should be connected to the power level which is specified on the label. ► If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using, contact the electrical utility company. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. ► This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock or fire. Use only No.26 AWG a a. AWG: American Wire Gauge or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary. ► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine. Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6 feet) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger. ► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result in electric shock or fire. MAINTENANCE / CHECKING Caution Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the machine. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Keep cleaning supplies away from children. ► Children could get hurt.Safety information_ 6 SUPPLY USAGE Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge. ► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away from children. ► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser unit. ► This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire. Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the machine. ► In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service fee will be charged. When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper, be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes. ► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash it. ► Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water. When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine. ► You could get injured. Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself. ► It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the machine needs repair. Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide provided with the machine. ► Otherwise, you could damage the machine. Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws. ► The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service technician. Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service technician. ► Repair by non-certified technicians could result in fire or electric shock. Regulatory information_ 7 regulatory information This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements. LASER SAFETY STATEMENT The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001. Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition. • Wavelength: 800 nm • Beam divergence - Paraller: 13 degrees - Perpendicular: 35 degrees • Maximum power or energy output: 12 mW WARNING Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons: OZONE SAFETY During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area. If you need additional information about ozone, contact your local Samsung dealer.Regulatory information_ 8 POWER SAVE This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use. When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov. RECYCLING Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner. CHINA ONLY CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking shown on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS FCC Information to the User This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference, and • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:Regulatory information_ 9 • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help. Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada. Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada. UNITED STATES OF AMERICA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label. The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the FCC. This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use: While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna. TURKEY ONLY GERMANY ONLYRegulatory information_ 10 RUSSIA ONLY REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY) Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover. Contact the people from you purchased the machine. The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug. If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away. You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket. Important warning: You must earth this machine. The wires in the mains lead have the following color code: • Green and Yellow: Earth • Blue: Neutral • Brown: Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following: You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green. You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black. You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red. You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES) Approvals and Certifications The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93/68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated: SCX-3200 Series: Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) SCX-3205W(K): R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC. January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment. January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility. March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative.Regulatory information_ 11 EC Certification Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX) This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries: In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance. The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document. European Radio Approval Information (for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices) Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R&TTE directive. European States qualified under wireless approvals: EU Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France (with frequency restrictions), Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden and the U.K. EEA/EFTA countries Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland European States with restrictions on use: EU In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless EEA/EFTA countries No limitations at this time REGULATORY COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS Wireless Guidance Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device. Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation. As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting. This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below: Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication.Regulatory information_ 12 OPENSSL LICENSE Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)". 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without Prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)". THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device. Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country. If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.Regulatory information_ 13 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)". THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.Regulatory information_ 14 CHINA ONLYAbout this user’s guide_ 15 about this user’s guide This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during actual usage. It is a valuable resource for both novice and professional users for the proper installation and use of the machine. • Read the safety information before using the machine. • If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (See "Troubleshooting" on page 77). • Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter (See "Glossary" on page 96). • Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. • The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP. CONVENTION Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below: • Document is synonymous with original. • Paper is synonymous with media, or print media. • Machine refers to printer or MFP. The following table offers the conventions of this guide: CONVENTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Power Note Provides additional information or details for the machine function and feature. The date format may differ from country to country. Caution Contains information you can use to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction. Do not touch the surface of the drum located in the toner cartridge or imaging unit. Footnote Provides additional information on certain words or a phrases. a. pages per minute (“Cross-reference”) Refers you to additional detailed information. (See "Finding more information" on page 16).About this user’s guide_ 16 FINDING MORE INFORMATION You can find information about setting up and using your machine in the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen. MATERIAL NAME DESCRIPTION Quick Installation Guide This guide provides information on setting up your machine. This guide is provided in the box with the printer. User’s Guide This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, maintaining your machine, troubleshooting, and replacing supplies. Machine Driver Help This help provides you with information about the printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing (See "Using help" on page 56). Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, machine drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com/printer. Downloadable software You can download useful software programs from the Samsung website. • Samsung AnyWeb Print: helps personal users to screen-capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/anywebprint) • SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: provides convenient tools for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously. This program is for network model only. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com, See "Features by Models" on page 18)Features of your new product_ 17 features of your new product Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print. SPECIAL FEATURES Print with excellent quality and speed • You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 x 1200 dpi effective output. • Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 16 ppm and letter-sized paper at up to 17 ppm. Handle many different types of printable material • The 150-sheet tray supports plain paper in various sizes, letterhead, envelopes, labels, custom-sized media, postcards, and heavy paper. Create professional documents • Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with words, such as “Confidential” (See "Using watermarks" on page 57). • Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster (See "Printing posters" on page 56). • You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper (See "Using overlays" on page 58). Save time and money • To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 56). • This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use. • To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper manually (See "Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)" on page 56). Print in various environments • You can print with various operating systems such as Windows, Linux, and Macintosh OS systems. • Your machine is equipped with a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface. • Your machine comes with a built-in network interface, Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX. SCX-3205W(K) only) • Your machine comes with a built-in network interface 802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN. (SCX-3205W(K) only) For some counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Copy the original in high quality • You can copy the original and print them in enhanced image quality and size. Scan the originals • Scan in color and use the precise compressions of BMP, JPEG, TIFF and PDF formats. • Use one button to scan your original to the connected computer. Eco Print • You can reduce toner and paper usage (See "Eco Print button" on page 22). IPv6 (SCX-3205W(K) only) • The machine supports IPv6 (See "IPv6 Configuration" on page 34). AirPrint AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from iPhone, iPad and iPod touch running iOS 4.2 or later.Features of your new product_ 18 FEATURES BY MODELS The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing to more advanced networking solutions for your business. Features by models include: FEATURES SCX-3200 SERIES SCX-3205W(K) SERIES Print ● ● Eco Print ● ● Duplex (2-sided) printing (manual) ● ● Copy ● ● Scan ● ● Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ● ● Print Screen ● IPv6 ● Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN ● Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN a a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine. ● SyncThru™ Web Service ● (●: Included, Blank: Not included) Introduction_ 19 1.introduction This chapter gives you an overview of your machine: This chapter includes: • Machine overview • Control panel overview • Understanding the status LED • Introducing the useful buttons MACHINE OVERVIEW Front view 3 6 1 10 11 12 9 7 8 5 4 2 13 14 This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Scanner lid 6 Front door 11 Inner cover 2 Scanner glass 7 Tray 12 Toner cartridge 3 Control panel 8 Paper length guide 13 Toner cartridge handle 4 Output tray (face down) 9 Paper width guide 14 Toner cartridge drum 5 Output support 10 Scan unitIntroduction_ 20 Rear view 1 2 3 This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 USB port 2 Power cord receptacle 3 Network port a a.SCX-3205W(K) onlyIntroduction_ 21 CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 12 1 Power ( ) Allows you to turn the power on or off (See "Power button" on page 23). 2 Eco Print Turn the Eco mode on or off (See "Eco Print button" on page 22). 3 Scan to Sends scanned data (See "Scanning originals and sending to your computer (Scan to PC)" on page 64). 4 ID Copy Allows you to copy both sides the ID card like a driver’s license to a single side of paper (See "ID card copying" on page 63). 5 Front LED When the LED lights on, place the front side of an ID card facing down on the scanner glass (See "ID card copying" on page 63). 6 Back LED When the LED lights on, place the back side of an ID card facing down on the scanner glass (See "ID card copying" on page 63). 7 Display Shows the number of pages you want to copy. 8 +/- Buttons Allows you to increase/decrease the number of page you want to copy (See "+/- buttons" on page 22). 9 Print Screen (SCX-3200 only) Prints the displayed screen of your monitor (See "Print Screen button (SCX-3200 only)" on page 22). WPS (SCX-3205W(K) only) Allows you to turn on or off the wireless network connection (See "WPS button (SCX-3205W(K))" on page 22). 10 Stop/Clear ( ) Stops an operation at any time and there are more functions (See "Stop/Clear button" on page 23). 11 Start ( ) Begins a printing, copying or scanning job depending on which function you are using. 12 Wireless LED (SCX-3205W(K) only) Shows the current status of the wireless network connection (See "Understanding the status LED" on page 22). 13 Status LED Shows the status of your machine (See "Understanding the status LED" on page 22).Introduction_ 22 UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED Status LED The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status. STATUS LED DESCRIPTION Off • The machine is off-line. • The machine is in sleep mode. Green On • The machine is in ready mode or warming up. Blinking • When the LED blinks slowly, the machine is receiving data from the computer or printing documents. • When the LED blinks rapidly, the machine is operating special functions. Red On • The inner cover is opened. Close the inner cover completely. • There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray. • The machine has stopped due to a major error. • Your system has some problems. If this problem occurs, contact a service representative. • A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life a a.Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media type, and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer stops printing. . It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89). Blinking • A small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life a of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (See "Redistributing toner" on page 77). • The machine is printing in manual feed mode or in manual duplex mode. Orange On A paper jam has occurred (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 78). Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as one that is refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. All printing errors will appear in the Smart Panel program window. If the problem persists, contact a service representative. Wireless LED (SCX-3205W(K) only) WIRELESS LED STATUS DESCRIPTION Blue Off ( ) Wireless network is disconnected. On ( ) Wireless network is connected. Slowly blinks ( ) The machine starts connecting to a wireless network. Fast blinks ( ) • The machine is connecting to access point (or wireless router). • Wireless network connection is being disconnected. INTRODUCING THE USEFUL BUTTONS Print Screen button (SCX-3200 only) If you press Print Screen button for less than two seconds, the green light blinks fast on the Status LED, and then the machine prints the whole screen displayed in the monitor. If you press Print Screen button for more than two seconds, the Status LED lights on green, and then the machine prints an active screen displayed in the monitor. • The page will be printed on the default page like A4 or Letter. • Print Screen can only be used in the Windows and Macintosh operating systems. • You can only use this function with a USB-connected machine. • You can use this function only when the Smart Panel program is installed and running. • You can only use this function in Eco Print mode off. Eco Print button You can turn the Eco Print mode on or off by simply pressing the button. If you set the Eco Print mode on, the machine automatically sets the 2-UP and Toner Save option on and print with those options. 1. Press Eco Print button on the control panel. 2. Eco Print LED lights on. Then, Eco Print mode is on. To turn off Eco Print mode, press Eco Print button one more time. +/- buttons You can determine the number of copies (up to 99 copies) you want to copy by pressing +/- buttons. The default setting value is 1. • If you press +/- buttons briefly, the number of copies increases/decreases by single digits. • If you press +/- buttons long, the number of copies increases/decreases by ten-fold. WPS button (SCX-3205W(K)) This feature automatically detects which WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) mode your access point uses. By pushing a button on the wireless LAN router/access point and the machine, you can setup the wireless network and security settings (See "Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))" on page 36).Introduction_ 23 Stop/Clear button By pressing Stop/Clear button, you can do the following functions. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Printing a configuration report In ready mode, press and hold this button long enough (about two seconds) until the Status LED blinks slowly, and release the button (See "To print a configuration report" on page 24). Printing a network configuration report (SCX-3205W(K) only) In ready mode, press and hold this button for four seconds until the Status LED blinks fast, and release the button (See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 30). Supplies information report In the ready mode, press and hold this button for about 6 seconds until the Status LED is on, and release (See "To print a supplies information report" on page 24). Canceling print job Press Stop/Clear button during a operation. The print job is cleared from both the machine and the computer and then the machine returns to ready mode. This may take some time depending on the size of the print job. Power button By pressing Power button, you can turn the machine on or off. Turning on the machine 1. Plug in the power cord. 2. Press Power button on the control panel. When the machine is powered on, you can see LED looping on the display. Then, the machine is in ready mode. If you want to turn the power off, press and hold this button for about two seconds.Getting started_ 24 2.getting started This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software. This chapter includes: • Setting up the hardware • Printing a report • Supplied software • System requirements • Installing USB connected machine’s driver • Sharing your machine locally SETTING UP THE HARDWARE This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the Quick Installation Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Installation Guide first and follow the steps below: Location 1. Select a stable location. Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space for opening cover(s) and tray(s). The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table. Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing (See "Altitude adjustment" on page 46). Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be affected. 2mm (0.08 in) 2mm (0.08 in) 2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items. 3. Remove tape holding the machine securely. 4. Install the toner cartridge. 5. Load paper (See "Loading originals" on page 48). 6. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine. 7. Turn the machine on (See "Turning on the machine" on page 23). This machine will not operate when the power main fails. PRINTING A REPORT Print a configuration or supplies information page to make sure that the machine is operating properly. To print a configuration report In the ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control panel for long enough (about two seconds) until the Status LED blinks slowly, and release. For SCX-3205W(K), you can print a network configuration report (See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 30). To print a supplies information report In the ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control panel for about six seconds until the Status LED lights on, and release. SUPPLIED SOFTWARE After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you must install the printer software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user, install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user, download the software from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) and install. Machine software is occasionally updated for reasons like the release of new operating system and etc. If needed, download the latest version from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer).OS CONTENTS Windows • Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. • Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for scanning documents on your machine. • Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 70). • SmarThru a : a.Allows you to edit a scanned image in various ways using a powerful image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open another image editor program such as Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru. For details, refer to the on-screen help supplied on the SmarThru program (See "SmarThru" on page 70). This program is the accompanying Windows-based software for your multifunctional machine. • Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: You can find out about Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program information and installed scan driver's condition. • Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer. • SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. (SCX-3205W(K) only) Macintosh • Printer Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. • Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is available for scanning documents on your machine. • Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 70). • Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: You can find out about Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program information and installed scan driver's condition. • Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer. • SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. (SCX-3205W(K) only) Linux • Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. • SANE: Use this driver to scan documents. • Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 70). • Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer. • SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. (SCX-3205W(K) only) Getting started_ 25 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following requirements: Windows Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems. OPERATING SYSTEM REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED) CPU RAM FREE HDD SPACE Windows® 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB (128 MB) 600 MB Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256 MB) 1.5 GB Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB to 2 GB Windows Server® 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2 GB) 10 GB Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1 GB) 15 GB Windows® 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB • Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme). • DVD-R/W Drive Windows Server® 2008 R2 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) 512 MB (2 GB) 10 GB • Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems. • Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine. Macintosh OPERATING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS (RECOMMENDED) CPU RAM FREE HDD SPACE Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.4 • Intel® Processors • PowerPC G4/ G5 • 128 MB for a PowerPC based Mac (512 MB) • 512 MB for a Intel-based Mac (1 GB) 1 GBGetting started_ 26 Linux ITEM REQUIREMENTS Operating system RedHat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit) Fedora 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux 10.0, 10.1 (32 bit) OpenSuSE® 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32.64 bit) Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1 (32/64 bit) Ubuntu 5.04, 5.10, 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit) Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit) CPU Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (Intel Core™2) RAM 512 MB (1 GB) Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB) INSTALLING USB CONNECTED MACHINE’S DRIVER A locally connected machine is a machine directly connected to your computer by a USB cable. Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 m (10 ft.). Windows You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method. The following steps are recommended for most users who use a machine directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer and powered on. If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the installation procedure, click Cancel to close the window. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. • The software CD should automatically run and an installation window will appear. • If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM Drive. Click OK. • If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM Drive and click OK. • If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control window. 3. Select Install now. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. • For SCX-3205W(K), you can access the Wireless Setting and Installation menu. The menu allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the machine with an USB cable (See "Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))" on page 36). • The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. The Install Software Only allows you to install the supplied software, such as Smart Panel. Follow the instruction on the window. 4. Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. The software searches for the machine. If your machine is not connected to the computer, the following Mac OS X 10.5 • Intel® Processors • 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/ G5 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.6 • Intel® Processors 1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB OPERATING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS (RECOMMENDED) CPU RAM FREE HDD SPACEGetting started_ 27 window will appear. • After connecting the machine, click Next. • Check if you want to install the software without connection of the printer. - Check this option to install the software without a machine connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be skipped, and completes the installation. • Search again When you press this button, the firewall notice window appears. - Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Windows operating system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall, and inactivate this option. - Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside the operating system. Refer to the manual provided by individual programs. • Direct Input The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on the network. - Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host name. Then click Next. To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network configuration report (See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 30). - Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next. • Help - This help button gives you the detailed information about how to connect the machine. 5. The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you wish to use and click Next. If the software searched only one machine, the confirmation window appears. 6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8. 7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 8. If you want to register your machine on Samsung web site, click On-line Registration. If your machine is not connected yet to the network or computer, click How to connect?. How to connect? gives detailed information about how to connect the machine. Follow the instructions in the window. 9. Click Finish. If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver. a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. b) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall. c) Select the option you wish to execute, then follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Read the license agreement and click Continue. 9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 10. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 11.When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, click Continue. 12. Select Typical installation for a network printer for a network printer and then click OK. 13. After the installation is finished, click Restart. 14. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. • For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 15. Click Add on the Printer List. • For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up. 16. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab. • For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB connection. • For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, click Default and find the USB connection. 17. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. • For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model. • For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 18. Click Add.Getting started_ 28 If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. b) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. c) Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. d) Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. e) Double-click the Installer OS X icon. f) Enter the password and click OK. g) The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. h) Read the license agreement and click Continue. i) Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. j) Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. k) When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click Continue. l) When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software. Follow the steps below to install the software. Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3. From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer. 4. Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package. 5. Double-click cdroot > autorun. 6. When the welcome screen appears, click Next. 7. When the installation is complete, click Finish. The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that is available through your system menu or from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator. Installing the Smart Panel 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3. From the Samsung website, download the Smart Panel package to your computer. 4. Right-click the Smart Panel package and extract the package. 5. Double-click cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh. Installing the Printer Settings Utility 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3. From the Samsung website, download the Printer Settings Utility package to your computer. 4. Right-click the Printer Settings Utility package and extract the package. 5. Double-click cdroot > Linux > psu > install.sh. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow the steps below steps to uninstall the driver for Linux. a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. b) When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. c) Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in: [root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/ [root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh d) Click Uninstall. e) Click Next. f) Click Finish.Getting started_ 29 SHARING YOUR MACHINE LOCALLY Follow the steps below to set up computers to share your machine locally. If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine by a USB cable and is also connected to the local network environment, the client computer connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the host computer to print. 2 1 1 Host computer A computer which is directly connected to the machine by USB cable. 2 Client computers Computers which use the machine shared through the host computer. Windows Setting up a host computer 1. Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver" on page 26). 2. Click the Windows Start menu. 3. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. • For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. • For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. • For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. • For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 4. Right-click the printer icon. 5. For Windows XP/Vista/Server 2003/Server 2008, press Properties. For Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties. If Printer properties item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. 6. Select the Sharing tab. If you are a Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2 user, check the Change Sharing Options. 7. Check the Share this printer checkbox. 8. Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK. Setting up a client computer 1. Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver" on page 26). 2. Click the Windows Start menu. 3. Select All programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer. 4. Enter the IP address of the host computer in the address bar and press Enter in your keyboard. In case host computer requires a User name and Password, fill in User ID and password of the host computer account. 5. Right-click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect. 6. If a set up complete message appears, click OK. 7. Open the file you want to print and start printing. Macintosh The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5~10.6. Refer to Mac Help for other OS versions. Setting up a host computer 1. Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 27). 2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3. Select the printer to share in the Printers list. 4. Select Share this printer. Setting up a client computer 1. Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 27). 2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3. Click the “+” icon. A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears. 4. Select your machine and click Add. Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 30 3.network setup (scx-3205w(k) only) This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software. This chapter includes: • Network environment • Introducing useful network programs • Using a wired network • Installing network connected machine’s driver • IPv6 Configuration NETWORK ENVIRONMENT You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. You can set up the basic network settings through the network setting programs. The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine. ITEM REQUIREMENTS Network interface • Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX • 802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN a a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine. Network operating system • Windows 2000/Server 2003 /Server 2008/XP/Vista/7/Server 2008 R2 • Various Linux OS • Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6 Network protocols • TCP/IPv4 • DHCP, BOOTP • DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP • Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP • SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP • TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP) (See "IPv6 Configuration" on page 34.) Wireless security • Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK) • Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES INTRODUCING USEFUL NETWORK PROGRAMS There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing several machines on the network is possible. Before using the programs below, set the IP address first. SyncThru™ Web Service Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to do the following tasks. • You can configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments. • You can customize machine settings (See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service (SCX-3205W(K) only)" on page 69). SyncThru™ Web Admin Service Web-based machine management solution for network administrator. SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access. • Download this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com. SetIP This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol. • See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows)" on page 31. • See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)" on page 31. • See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux)" on page 32. TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program. USING A WIRED NETWORK You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your network. This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished. You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on your machine. Printing a network configuration report You can print a network configuration report from the machine’s control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 31 1. Press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control panel for long enough (about four seconds) until the Status LED blinks fast. 2. Then, release the button. Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC address and IP address. For example: • MAC Address:00:15:99:41:A2:78 • IP Address:192.0.0.192 Setting IP address First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network. In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons. • DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the report. • Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer. If your machine has a control panel, you can also change IP address using the machine's control panel. In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set IP address for you. IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows) This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report. Before using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall by performing the following steps. 1. Open Control Panel. 2. Double-click Security Center. 3. Click Windows Firewall. 4. Disable the firewall. Installing the program 1. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window. 2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive (X represents your CD-ROM drive). 3. Double-click Application > SetIP. 4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program. 5. Select a language, then click Next. 6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation. Starting the program 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Turn on the machine. 3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. • MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. • IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address). • Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask. • Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway. 6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. 7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program. 8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh) For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following. 1. Open System Preferences. 2. Click Security. 3. Click the Firewall menu. 4. Turn firewall off. The following instructions may vary from your model. 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html. 3. Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows the printer’s name and IP address information. 4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. • MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. • IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 32 For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address). • Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask. • Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway. 6. Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux) SetIP program should be automatically installed during the printer driver installation. 1. Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your machine’s MAC address. 2. Open the /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/. 3. Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file. 4. Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5. Enter the network card’s MAC address, IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and then click Apply. When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:). 6. The machine prints the network information. Confirm all the settings are correct. 7. Close the SetIP program. Network parameter setting You can also set up the various network settings through the network administration programs such as SyncThru™ Web Admin Service and SyncThru™ Web Service. Restoring factory default settings You may need to reset the machine to the factory default settings when machine that you are using is connected to new network environment. Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™ Web Service 1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. For example: 2. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service. 3. Click Login on the upper right of the website. The Login window appears. 4. Type in the ID and Password, and then click Login. If it is your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. • ID: admin • Password: sec00000 5. Click Settings > Network Settings. 6. Click Restore Default on the left pane of the website. 7. Click Clear. 8. Click Yes when the confirmation window appears. 9. Click OK when the success window appears. 10. Turn off and restart machine to apply settings. INSTALLING NETWORK CONNECTED MACHINE’S DRIVER Windows You can set up the machine driver, follow the steps below. This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. • The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appears. • If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM drive. Click OK. • If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK. • If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the User Account Control windows. • If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Yes in the User Account Control windows. 3. Select Install Now. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. • For SCX-3205W(K), you can access Wireless Setting and Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and Installation allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the machine with a USB cable (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 38). • The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. The Install Software Only allows you to install the supplied software such as the Smart Panel. Follow the instruction on the window. 4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. The program searches for the machine. If your machine is not found in the network or locally, the error Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 33 message appears. • Check if you want to install the software without connection of the printer. - Check this option to install this program without a machine connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be skipped, and completes the installation. • Search again When you press this button, the firewall notice window appears. - Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Windows operating system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall, and inactivate this option. - Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside the operating system. Refer to the manual provided by individual programs. • Direct Input The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on the network. - Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host name. Then click Next. To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network configuration report (See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 30). - Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next. • Help If your machine is not connected to the computer or network, this help button gives detailed information about the how to connect the machine. 5. The searched machine will be shown on the screen. Select the one you wish to use and click Next. If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window appears. 6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page. Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 8. 7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 8. If you want to register your machine on Samsung website, click On-line Registration. If your machine is not connected yet to the network, click How to connect?. How to connect? gives you the detailed information about the how to connect the machine. Follow the instructions in the window. 9. Click Finish. • After the driver setup is completed, you may enable firewall. • If your printer driver does not work properly, follow the step below to repair or reinstall the driver. a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. b) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall. c) Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Read the license agreement and click Continue. 9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 10. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 11.When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears. Click Continue. 12. Select Typical installation for a network printer for a network printer and then click OK. 13. The SetIP program automatically runs. If the machine has already configured network information, close the SetIP program. 14. Click OK to continue the installation. 15. After the installation is finished, click Restart. 16. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. • For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 17. Click Add on the Printer List. • For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon. A display window will pop up. 18. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab. • For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer. • For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP. 19. Select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol. When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option. 20. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 34 21. Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue first. 22. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. • For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model. • For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, choose Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 23. Click Add. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. b) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. c) Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. d) Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. e) Double-click the Installer OS X icon. f) Enter the password and click OK. g) The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. h) Read the license agreement and click Continue. i) Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. j) Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. k) When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, click Continue. l) When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux Install Linux Driver and add network Printer 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2. Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung website. 3. Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz file and open the new directory. 4. Double-click the Linux folder. 5. Double-click the install.sh icon. 6. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. 7. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 8. Select Network printer and click Search button. 9. The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 10. Select your machine and click Next. 11. Input the printer description and Next 12.When the add printer is done, click Finish 13.When the install is done, click Finish Add network Printer 1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Click Add Printer… 3. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 4. Select Network printer and click the Search button. 5. The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 6. Select your machine and click Next. 7. Input the printer description and Next 8. When the add printer is done, click Finish. IPV6 CONFIGURATION TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher. If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again (See "Restoring factory default settings" on page 32). In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address. 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Turn on the machine. 3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel that will check IPv6 addresses (See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 30). 4. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printer > Add Printer. 5. Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows. 6. Follow the instruction on the window. 7. The Add Printer Wizard window appears. Follow the instruction on the window. If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by. Printing a network configuration report You can print a network configuration report from the machine’s control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems. 1. In ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control panel for long enough (about four seconds) until the Status LED blinks fast. 2. Then, release the button. Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC address and IP address. For example: • MAC Address:00:15:99:41:A2:78 • IP Address:192.0.0.192 Setting IPv6 addresses Machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements. • Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with FE80). • Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router. • Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server. • Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 35 Manual address configuration 1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL (See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service (SCX-3205W(K) only)" on page 69). For IPv4, enter the IPv4 address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 3. Click TCP/IPv6. 4. Enable the Manual Address In the TCP/IPv6 section. 5. Select the Address/Prefix and click the Add button, then the router prefix will automatically be entered into the address field. Enter the rest of address. (ex: 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F.) 6. Click the Apply button. Installing printer driver Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same as TCP/IPv4 (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 32). Select TCP/IP Port and when the list of machines are displayed, simply select your machine's IPv6 address. Using SyncThru™ Web Service 1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL. 2. Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network Configuration Report (See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 30). 3. Enter the IPv6 addresses (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]). Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 36 4.wireless network setup (scx-3205w(k)) This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the wireless network connected machine and software. This chapter includes: • Setting a wireless network with the WPS button • Using a wireless network from the computer • Setting a wireless network with USB cable • Setting a wireless network with network cable • Completing the installation • Troubleshooting For more information about the network environment, network programs, and installing network connected machine’s driver, refer to the following chapters. • See "Network environment" on page 30. • See "Introducing useful network programs" on page 30. • See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 32. SETTING A WIRELESS NETWORK WITH THE WPS BUTTON You can install a wireless network with the WPS ( ) button. After compleleting the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 32). Setting a wireless network with the WPS button If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the WPS ( ) button on the control panel. If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode, make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine. Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN number from the computer to connect to the Access Point varies depending on the access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide of the access point (or wireless router) you are using. Items to prepare You need to ensure you have the following items ready to use: • Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS). • Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS). • Networked computer (PIN mode only) Refer to your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless network, for information about your network configuration. Choosing your network connection There are two methods to connect your machine to a wireless network using the WPS ( ) button on the control panel. The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your machine to a wireless network by pressing both the WPS ( ) button on the control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively. The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router). Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a typical wireless network environment. Connecting to a wireless network in PBC mode To connect your machine to the wireless network in PBC mode, follow the following steps: You need to check the status of the wireless LED. 1. Press and hold the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4 seconds until the status LED blinks quickly. • : The light blinks slowly on wireless LED. The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on access point (or wireless router). 2. : Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router). The wireless LED blinks in the order below: a) : The light blinks fast on the wireless LED. The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b) : When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the wireless LED light stays on. Connecting to the wireless network in PIN mode To connect your machine to the wireless network, follow the following steps: You need to check the status of the wireless LED. 1. The network configuration report including PIN number must be printed. In ready mode, press and hold the Stop/Clear button on the control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s PIN number. 2. Press and hold the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for more than 4 seconds until the status LED on. • : The light blinks slowly on the wireless LED. The machine starts connecting to access point (or wireless router). 3. You need to enter eight-digit PIN number within two minutes to the computer which is connected to the access point (or wireless router). The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-digit PIN number The wireless LED blinks in the order below: a) : The light blinks fast on the wireless LED. The machine is Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 37 connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b) : When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the wireless LED light stays on. Re-connecting to the wireless network When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless connection settings and address. In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the wireless network: • The machine is turned off and on again. • The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again. Canceling a wireless network connection process To cancel the wireless network connection function when the machine is connecting to the wireless network, press and release the Stop/Clear button on the control panel. You need to wait 2 minuites to re-connect the wireless network. Disconnecting a wireless network connection To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for more than two seconds. • When the Wi-Fi Network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately disconnected from the wireless network, and the wireless LED is off. • When the Wi-Fi Network is being used: While the machine waits until the current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the wireless LED. Then, the wireless network connection is automatically disconnected. The wireless LED is off. When the Wi-Fi Network is disconnected, press the WPS ( ) button on the control panel. The Wi-Fi network is on and the setting a wireless network begins. USING A WIRELESS NETWORK FROM THE COMPUTER Choosing your network connection Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the machine at a time. There are types of network connections to consider. • Wireless network without access point (Ad-Hoc mode) • Wireless network with an access point (Infrastructure mode) How to print a network configuration report You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network configuration report. To print the report: 1. In ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control panel for long enough (about four seconds) until the Status LED blinks fast. 2. Then, release the button. Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC address and IP address. For example: • MAC Address:00:15:99:41:A2:78 • IP Address:192.0.0.192 IP addresses Every device in a network has a unique numerical address called an IP Address. Your machine came with a Default IP address of 192.0.0.192, which you can verify by printing out a Network Configuration Report or Configuration Report. • DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the report. • Static IP assignment: Use the SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer (See "Setting IP address" on page 31). In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you. Wireless network name and network key Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up, a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Key are created for the network. Locate this information before proceeding with the machine installation. Infrastructure mode This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs. This mode uses an access point to communicate with the wireless machine. • See "Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Windows)" on page 38. • See "Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Macintosh)" on page 40. Ad-Hoc mode This mode does not use an access point. The wireless computer and wireless machine communicates directly. • See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Windows)" on page 39. • See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Macintosh)" on page 41. After choosing your configuration, follow the simple directions for your computer operating system, but first locate the software CD supplied with the machine before proceeding. Installing a wireless network with cables You can install a wireless network to connect to the machine with either a USB cable or a network cable. For most users, we recommend using a USB cable with the program provided in the supplied software CD. The following are two ways to install a wireless network with cables. • With a USB cable: You can simply set up a wireless network using the program in the supplied software CD. Only Windows and Macintosh operating system are supported (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 38). You can also install a wireless network in Printer Settings Utility with USB cable after installing driver. (Windows and Macintosh operating system are supported.) • With a network cable: You can set up a wireless network using the SyncThru™ Web Service program (See "Setting a wireless network withWireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 38 network cable" on page 42). SETTING A WIRELESS NETWORK WITH USB CABLE Refer to your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless network, for information about your network configuration. Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Windows) Items to prepare Ensure you have next items ready. • Access point • Network-connected computer • Software CD that provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless interface • USB cable Creating the infrastructure network in Windows When the items are ready, follow below steps: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2. Turn on your computer, access point and machine. 3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. • The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appears. • If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM drive. Click OK. • If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM and click OK. • If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control windows. 4. Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. • Install Now: First you must configure the wireless network settings of your printer to print through wireless. • Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless network settings of your printer with a USB cable then install the printer driver. Press this button to set up the wireless connection if you have not set up the wireless connection before. 5. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. 6. The software searches the wireless network. If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and machine properly, and follow the instruction on the window. 7. After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name (SSID) of access point you are using and click Next. If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose, or if you want to set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting. • Enter the wireless Network Name: Type the SSID of access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive). • Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure. • Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients. • Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES) • Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. • Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. • WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window does appear when the access point has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ according to its security mode, WEP or WPA. • In case of WEP Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter WEP security key. Click Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. • In case of WPA Enter the WPA shared key and click Next. WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption. 8. The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings are right. Click Next. • For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click Change Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 39 TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP. • For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. Example) If computer’s network information is as below: - IP address: 169.254.133.42 - Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Machine’s network information should be as below: - IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP address, with changed last three digits.) - Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) - Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from IP address of your machine to 1.) 9. When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. Click Next. 10. Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Then, click Next. Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup procedure. Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen. Then, click Next. 11. Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears. 12. Select the components to be installed. Click Next. After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click Next. 13. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 15. 14. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 15. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from Samsung, click On-line Registration. 16. Click Finish. Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Windows) If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by following the simple steps below. Items to prepare Ensure you have next items ready. • Wireless network computer • Software CD provided with your machine • Wireless network machine • USB cable Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Windows When the items are ready, follow below steps: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2. Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine. 3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. • The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear. • If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive. Click OK. • If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click OK. • If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control windows. 4. Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. • Install Now: First you must configure the wireless network settings of your printer to print through wireless. • Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless network settings of your printer with a USB cable then install the printer driver. Press this button to set up the wireless connection if you have not set up the wireless connection before. 5. Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. 6. The software searches the wireless network. If the software has failed to search the network, check if the USB cable is connected properly between the computer and machine, and follow the instruction on the window. 7. After searching the wireless network, a list of wireless network your machine has searched appears. If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is airportthru and Signal is Printer Self Network. Then, click Next. If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select other wireless network from the list. If you want to change ad-hoc settings click the Advanced Setting button. • Enter the wireless Network Name: Type in the SSID Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 40 name you want (SSID is case-sensitive). • Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc. • Channel: Select the channel. • Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. • Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128) • Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. • Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. • WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the ad-hoc network has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next. • WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. 8. The window which shows the wireless network setting appears. Check the settings and click Next. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless network setting should also be Static. If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. • For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically (DHCP). • For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. Example) If computer’s network information is as below: - IP address: 169.254.133.42 - Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Machine’s network information should be as below: - IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP address, with changed last three digits.) - Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) - Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from IP address of your machine to 1.) 9. When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. Click Next. If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow the steps on the window. Click Next if you are finished the computer’s wireless network settings. If you set the computer’s wireless network as DHCP, it will take several minutes to receive the IP address. 10. The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup procedure. Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen. Then, click Next. 11. Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears. 12. Select the components to be installed. Click Next. After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the default machine and change the port name of each machine. Click Next. 13. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 15. 14. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 15. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from Samsung, click On-line Registration. 16. Click Finish. Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Macintosh) Items to prepare Ensure you have next items ready. • Access point • Network-connected computer • Software CD that provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • USB cable Creating the infrastructure network in Macintosh When the items are ready, follow below steps: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2. Turn on your computer, access point and machine. 3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 4. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 5. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 6. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 7. Enter the password and click OK. 8. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. 9. Read the license agreement and click Continue. 10. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 11. Select Easy Install and click Install.Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 41 Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual operations will be installed. 12. Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. 13. The software searches the wireless network. If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and machine properly, and follow the instruction on the window. 14. After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name (SSID) of access point you are using and click Next. When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting. • Enter the wireless Network Name: Type the SSID of access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive). • Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure. • Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients. • Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES) • Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. • Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. • WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window does appear when the access point has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ according to its security mode, WEP or WPA. • In case of WEP Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter WEP security key. Click Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. • In case of WPA Enter the WPA shared key and click Next. WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption. 15. The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings are right. Click Next. • For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP. • For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. Example) If computer’s network information is as below: - IP address: 169.254.133.42 - Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Machine’s network information should be as below: - IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP address, with changed last three digits.) - Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) - Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from IP address of your machine to 1.) 16. The wireless network is connecting according to the network configuration. 17.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. 18. After the installation is finished, click Restart. Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Macintosh) If you do not have a access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by following these simple directions. Items to prepare Ensure you have next items ready. • Wireless network-connected computer • Software CD that provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • USB cable Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Macintosh When the items are ready, follow below steps: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2. Turn on your computer and machine. 3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 4. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 5. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 6. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 7. Enter the password and click OK. 8. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. 9. Read the license agreement and click Continue. 10. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 11. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual operations will be Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 42 installed. 12. Click Wireless Setting and Installation. 13. The software searches the wireless network devices. If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and machine properly, and follow the instruction on the window. 14. After searching the wireless network, a list of wireless network your machine has searched appears. If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is airportthru and Signal is Printer Self Network. Then, click Next. If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select other wireless network from the list. If you want to change ad-hoc settings click the Advanced Setting button. • Enter the wireless Network Name: Type in the SSID name you want (SSID is case-sensitive). • Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc. • Channel: Select the channel. • Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. • Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128) • Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. • Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. • WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the ad-hoc network has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next. • WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. 15. The window which shows the wireless network setting appears. Check the settings and click Next. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless network setting should also be Static. If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. • For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically (DHCP). • For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. Example) If computer’s network information is as below: - IP address: 169.254.133.42 - Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Machine’s network information should be as below: - IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP address, with changed last three digits.) - Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) - Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from IP address of your machine to 1.) 16. The wireless network is connecting according to the network configuration. 17.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. 18. After the installation is finished, click Restart. SETTING A WIRELESS NETWORK WITH NETWORK CABLE Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to work with your network you will need to perform some configuration procedures. Refer to your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless network, for information about your network configuration. Preparing items Ensure you have next items ready. • Access point • Network-connected computer • Software CD that provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • Network cable Setting IP address Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network. In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons. • DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the report (See "How to print a network configuration report" on page 37). • Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 43 from your computer. In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you. IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows) This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report. For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: 1. Open Start > All programs > Control Panel. 2. Double-click Security Center. 3. Click Windows Firewall. 4. Disable the firewall. Installing the program 1. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window. 2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD-ROM drive.) 3. Double-click Application > SetIP. 4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program. 5. Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. 6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation. Starting the program 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Turned on the machine. 3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. • MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. • IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) • Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask. • Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway. 6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. 7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program. 8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh) For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: The path and UIs may differ by Mac OS version. Refer to the Mac OS manual. 1. Open System Preferences. 2. Click Security. 3. Click the Firewall menu. 4. Turn firewall off. The following instructions may vary for your model. 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPApplet.html. 3. Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select Trust. The browser will open the SetIPApplet.html page that shows the printer’s name and IP address information. 4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. • MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. • IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) • Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask. • Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway. 6. Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. Configuring the machine’s wireless network Before starting you will need to know the network name(SSID) of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment, please ask the person who has set up your network. To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service. Using SyncThru™ Web Service Before starting wireless parameter configuration, make sure cable connection status. Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 44 1. Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not, connect the machine with a standard network cable. 2. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. For example, 3. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. The Login window appears. 4. Type in the ID and Password then click Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. • ID: admin • Password: sec00000 5. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 6. Click Wireless > Wizard. Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom. 7. Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list. • SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless network. access points and wireless devices attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive. • Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless connections (See "Wireless network name and network key" on page 37). - Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each other in a peer-to-peer environment. - Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with each other through an access point. If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machine’s SSID. Note that “airportthru” is the default SSID of your machine. 8. Click Next. If wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered password (network key) and click Next. 9. The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If the setup is right, click Apply. Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously. COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION After you have installed your Samsung wireless network printer, print another copy of the Network Configuration Report and keep it for future reference. You are now ready to use your new Samsung wireless printer on your network. TROUBLESHOOTING Solve problems that might occur during wireless setting and installing the machine driver. Wireless network problems If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the followings. Printers Not Found • Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the machine. • USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect machine to your computer using the USB cable. • The machine does not support wireless network. Check the machine's user's guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and prepare a wireless network machine. Connecting Failure - Not found SSID • The machine is unable to search network name (SSID) which you have selected or typed in. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try connecting again. • Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point. Connecting Failure - Invalid Security • You configured security incorrectly. Check the configured security on your access point and machine. Connecting Failure - General Connection Error • Your computer is not receiving a signal form your machine. Check the USB cable and your machine power. • When Temporal Key Integrity Protocol(TKIP) security is set up for the access point, connection might fail. Change the access point settings. Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network • Your machine is connected with wired network cable. Remove the wired network cable from your machine. PC Connection Error • The configured network address is unable to connect between your computer and machine. - For DHCP network environment The print receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when computer is configured to DHCP. - For Static network environment The machine uses the static address when computer is configured to static address. If you computer has following addresses, - IP address: 192.168.1.100 - Subnet address: 255.255.255.0 - Gateway address: 192.168.1.1 Type in the following address for your machine, - IP address: 192.168.1.101 - Subnet address: 255.255.255.0 - Gateway address: 192.168.1.1Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 45 Solving other problems If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the followings. For information on access point (or wireless router), refer to its own user's guide. • Your computer, access point or machine may not be turned on. • Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the reception is far from the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the signal. • Cycle the power for access point (or wireless router), machine and computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network communication. • Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the communication. If the computer and the machine is connected on a same network it cannot be searched, firewall software might be blocking the communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and try searching the machine again. • Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can check the IP address by printing the network configuration report. • Check whether access point (or wireless router) has a configured security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless router) administrator. • Check whether the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset. • Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a user's information before connecting to access point (or wireless router). • This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. For some counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Other wireless communication (Bluetooth) is not supported. • When using the Ad-hoc mode, for operating systems such as Windows Vista, you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use the wireless machine. • You cannot use infrastructure mode and Ad-hoc mode at the same time for Samsung wireless network machine. • The machine is within the range of the wireless network. For most networks, the machine should be within 30 meters (100 feet) of the wireless access point (or wireless router). • The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless router) and the machine. Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete. • The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may interfere with the wireless signal. Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including baby monitors, motors, cordless phones, security system cameras, other wireless networks, and some Bluetooth devices.Basic setup_ 46 5.basic setup After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine. This chapter includes: • Altitude adjustment • Setting the default tray and paper • Using the power saving feature • Changing font setting ALTITUDE ADJUSTMENT The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print. Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are. 0 4,000 m (13,123 ft) 3,000 m (9,842 ft) 2,000 m (6,561 ft) 1,000 m (3,280 ft) 4 3 2 1 1 High 1 2 High 2 3 High 3 4 Normal You can altitude adjustment in Printer Settings Utility. 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 70). Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Click Setting > Altitude Adjustment. Select necessary options from the drop-down list. 4. Click the Apply button. If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru™ Web Service screen appears automatically. This can be also adjusted via SyncThru™ Web Service. SETTING THE DEFAULT TRAY AND PAPER You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job. From your computer Windows 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. • For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. • For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. • For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. • For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Right-click on your machine. 4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing Preferences. If Printing Preferences item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. 5. Click Paper tab. 6. Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type. 7. Press OK. If you want to use special-sized paper such as a billing paper, select Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). Macintosh Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to change the default setting manually each time they want to print using other settings. 1. Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print. 2. Open the File menu and click Print. 3. Go to Paper Feed pane. 4. Set appropriate tray from which you want to print. 5. Go to Paper pane. 6. Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. 7. Click Print to print. Linux 1. Open Terminal Program. 2. When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following: [root@localhost root]# lpr Basic setup_ 47 3. Select Printer and click Properties… 4. Click on the Advanced tab. 5. Select the tray (source) and its options, such as paper size and type. 6. Press OK. USING THE POWER SAVING FEATURE When you will not be using the machine for a while, you can use this feature to save power. You change power save in Printer Settings Utility. 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Click Setting > Power Save. Select the appropriate value from the drop-down list, and then click Apply. CHANGING FONT SETTING Your machine has preset font setting depending on your region or country. If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows: 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Click Emulation. 4. Confirm if PCL is selected in Emulation Setting. 5. Click Setting. 6. Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list. 7. Click Apply. Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages. • Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic • Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only) • Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek • Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic • OCR: OCR-A, OCR-BMedia and tray_ 48 6.media and tray This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your machine. This chapter includes: • Loading originals • Selecting print media • Changing the tray size • Loading paper in the tray • Printing on special media • Using the output support LOADING ORIGINALS You can use the scanner glass to load an original for copying or scanning. On the scanner glass Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images. 1. Lift and open the scanner lid. 2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass. 3. Close the scanner lid. • Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption. • Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always keep it clean (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 75). • If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the scanner lid open. • Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt. • Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid may fall on your hands and get hurt. • Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or scanning. It is harmful to eyes. SELECTING PRINT MEDIA You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meets the guidelines for use with your machine and from the appropriate tray. Guidelines for selecting the print media Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems: • Poor print quality • Increased paper jams • Premature wear on the machine. • Permanent fuser damage, not covered under warranty. Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following: • The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are described in print media specifications (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project. • Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper, more vibrant images. • Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper. • Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of the sheets characteristics, improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which cannot be controlled. • Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets the specifications in this user’s guide and that it meets your output requirements. • Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Media and tray_ 49 the warranty or service agreements. The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • Using inflammable print media can cause a fire. • Use designated print media (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire. Media sizes supported in each mode MODE SIZE TYPE SOURCE Copy mode Letter, A4, Legal, Oficio, US Folio, Executive, JIS B5, A5 For details about paper type, click the following link ("Print media specifications" on page 93). Tray Simplex printing For details about paper size, click the following link ("Print media specifications" on page 93). For details about paper type, click the following link ("Print media specifications" on page 93). Tray Duplex printing (Manual) a a.75 to 90 g/m2 (20~24 lbs bond) only (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). Letter, A4, Legal, US Folio, Oficio Plain, Color, Preprinted, Recycled, Bond, Archive Manual feeding in the tray CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides. 3 1 2 1 Tray 2 Paper length guide 3 Paper width guide 1. Open front door and pinch the paper length guide and pull it out to extend the tray. Because the machine is very light, it can move when you open and close the tray or install and remove the toner cartridge. Be careful not to move the machine when performing these tasks. 2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading the paper. Insert the paper into the tray. 3. Load paper with the print side facing up. Make sure that all four corners are flat in the tray. Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.Media and tray_ 50 4. Pinch the paper length guide to adjust the guide so that it is flush up against the rear edge of the paper; then pinch the paper width guides so they are flush against the sides of the paper. • Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp. • Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm (0.24 inch.) curl. • If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper jams. LOADING PAPER IN THE TRAY Tray 1. Open the front door, pinch the paper length guide and pull it out to extend the tray. Then, adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading (See "Changing the tray size" on page 49). 2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers. 3. Place the paper with the side you want to print facing up. When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the tray. For information about setting the paper type and size on the control panel (See "Setting the default tray and paper" on page 46). • If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper meets the media specifications. Then, try placing one sheet at a time in tray (See "Print media specifications" on page 93, and "Printing on special media" on page 51). • The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel. Manual feeding in the tray The tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper. Tips on using the manual feeding method • If you select Paper > Source > Manual Feeder from your printer driver, you need to press Start button each time you print a page. Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the tray. • To prevent paper jams, do not add media while printing. • Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the tray first and be placed in the center of the tray. • Always load the use recommended print media to avoid paper jams and print quality problems (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the tray. 1. Load the paper in the tray. • When printing on special media, you must follow the loading guideline (See "Printing on special media" on page 51). • When paper does not feed well while printing, gently push the paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically. 2. Squeeze the tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too much, or the paper will bend resulting in a paper jam or skew. 3. Open the output tray and support. 4. To print from an application, open the application and open the print menu. 5. Open Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 6. Click on the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate paper type. For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label. 7. Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK. 8. Start printing.Media and tray_ 51 If you are printing multiple pages, load the next sheet after the first page prints out, and press Start button. Repeat this step for every page to be printed. PRINTING ON SPECIAL MEDIA The table below shows the available special media for printing. When printing on a special media, we recommend you feed one paper at a time. Check the maximum input number of media for tray (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). TYPES TRAY MANUAL FEEDING IN TRAY A a.Load one paper at a time. Plain ● ● Thick ● ● Thin ● ● Cotton ● Color ● Preprinted ● Recycled ● ● Envelope ● Transparency ● Labels ● CardStock ● Bond ● Archive ● ● (●: supported, Blank: Not supported) The following media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. Selecting the appropriate media will let you get the best printout quality. Selecting inappropriate media can result in poor or unfused print quality; and/or cause jamming problems. • Plain: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your printing on 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lbs bond). • Thick: 90 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lbs bond) thick paper. • Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) thin paper. • Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) cotton paper. • Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) color-back grounded paper. • Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) preprinted/letterhead paper. • Recycled: 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lbs bond) recycled paper. When you use recycled paper, printouts might be wrinkled and/or jamming may occur due to excessive curl. • CardStock: 105 to 163 g/m2 (28 to 43 lbs bond) cardstock. • Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) envelope. • Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lbs bond) transparency paper. • Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) labels. • Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs bond) bond. • Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond) If you need to keep the print-out for a long time, such as for archives. Envelopes Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. To print on an envelope, the stamp area should be on the left side and the end of the envelope with the stamp area should enter the printer first in the center of the tray. • When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors: - Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2 otherwise, jams may occur. - Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm ( 0.24 inch.) of curl, and should not contain air. - Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, either damaged. - Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation. • Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds. • Do not use stamped envelopes. • Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials. • Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes. • Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope. 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable • Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser. • For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm ( 0.59 inch.) from the edges of the envelope. • Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.Media and tray_ 52 Transparencies To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for laser printers. • Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand machine’s fusing temperature. • Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine. • Do not leave unused transparencies on the paper tray for long periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing. • To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle transparencies carefully. • To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight. • Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges. • Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet. • To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are begin printed out. Labels To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for laser machines. • When selecting labels, consider the following factors: - Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature (about 170°C (338 °F)). - Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams. - Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.51 inch.) of curl in any direction. - Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation. • Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components. • Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine. • Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged. Card stock/Custom-sized paper Postcards, cards and other custom-sized materials can be printed with this machine. • Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm (3.00 inches) wide or 183 mm (7.20 inches) long. • In software applications, set the margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material. Letterhead/Preprinted paper SINGLE-SIDED DOUBLE-SIDED Face up Face down • Letterhead/ Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C(338 °F) for 0.1 second. • Letterhead/ Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers. • Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage. • Before you load letterhead/preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality.Media and tray_ 53 USING THE OUTPUT SUPPORT The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not allow children near it. The printed pages stack on the output tray, and the output support will help the printed pages to align. The machine sends printouts to the output tray by default.Printing_ 54 7.printing This chapter explains common printing tasks. This chapter includes: • Introducing useful software program • Printer driver features • Basic printing • Opening printing preferences • Using help • Using special print features • Changing the default print settings • Setting your machine as a default machine • Printing to a file (PRN) • Macintosh printing • Linux printing The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP. INTRODUCING USEFUL SOFTWARE PROGRAM Samsung AnyWeb Print This tool helps you to screen-capture, preview, scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you use the ordinary program. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print > Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available for the download. This tool is available only for Windows operating systems. PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES Your printer drivers support the following standard features: • Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection • Number of copies In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer driver: Some models or operating systems may not support some of the feature(s) in the following table. Printer driver FEATURE WINDOWS Print quality option ● Poster printing ● Multiple pages per sheet ● Booklet printing (manual) ● Fit to page printing ● Reduce and enlarge printing ● Different source for first page ● Watermark ● Overlay ● Double-sided printing (manual) ● (●: supported) BASIC PRINTING Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use. • Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use. However, the composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine. Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications (See "System requirements" on page 25). • When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a warning mark, , or . An exclamation mark ( ) means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and ( ) mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s settings or environment. The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications. • Macintosh basic printing (See "Macintosh printing" on page 59). • Linux basic printing (See "Linux printing" on page 60). The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP. Your Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list.Printing_ 55 You can select the basic print settings, including the number of copies and the print range from within the Print window. To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print setting (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window. If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, the Samsung AnyWeb Print too will save your time for screen-captured images or printing the image. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print to link the website where the tool is available for the download. Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows: 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. • For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. • For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. • For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. • For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. For Windows Server 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, double-click your machine. For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, right-click your printer icon > context menus > See what’s printing. If See what’s printing item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 4. From the Document menu, select Cancel. You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar. You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop/Clear button on the control panel. OPENING PRINTING PREFERENCES You can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing Preferences. 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer. 4. Click Properties or Preferences. Using Presets setting The Presets option, which is visible on each of the preferences tab except for the Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future use. To save a Presets item: 1. Change the settings as needed on each tab. 2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box. 3. Click (Add). When you save Presets, all current driver settings are saved. Select more options and click (Update), settings will be added to the Presets you made. To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop-down list. The machine is now set to print according to the settings you have selected. To delete saved settings, select it from the Presets drop-down list and click (Delete). You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop-down list.Printing_ 56 USING HELP Click the question mark on the upper-right corner of the window and click on the topic you want to know about. Then a pop up window appears with information about that option's feature which is provided from the driver. If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Samsung tab in the Printing Preferences window, and enter a keyword in the input line of the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver updates or registration and so on, click appropriate buttons. USING SPECIAL PRINT FEATURES Special print features include: • "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 56. • "Printing posters" on page 56. • "Printing booklets (Manual)" on page 56. • "Change percentage of your document" on page 57. • "Fitting your document to a selected paper size" on page 57. • "Using watermarks" on page 57. • "Using overlays" on page 58. • "Print quality options" on page 58. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list. 4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary. 5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet. 6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Printing posters This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the page layout you want. Available layouts: • Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages. • Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages. • Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages. 4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together. 5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together. Printing booklets (Manual) This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet. If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media. 8 9 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down list. 3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab. If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without or mark). 4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 5. After printing, fold and staple the pages. Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual) You can print on both sides of a paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented. You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). We recommend not to print on both sides of special media, such as labels, envelopes, or thick paper. It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. Click the Advanced tab.Printing_ 57 3. From the Double-Sided Printing (Manual) section, select the binding option you want. • None • Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding. • Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars. 4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the printing job. Change percentage of your document You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box. You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate. 4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Fitting your document to a selected paper size This feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size. This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document. A 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page. 4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using watermarks The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document. There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list. Using an existing watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in the preview image. 3. Click OK or Print until you exit the print window. Creating a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window. When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on the first page only. 4. Select watermark options. You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section. 5. Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list. 6. When you have finished, click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark drop-down list. Editing a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options. 4. Click Update to save the changes. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Printing_ 58 Deleting a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. 4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using overlays An overlay is content you store on your hard disk drive that can be superimposed over any document you print. An overlay is often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine, instead you can just print the letterhead overlay on your document. Creating a new overlay To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay file containing your content. 1. Create or open a document containing the content you want to use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly where you want them to appear when they are added to the original. 2. To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preference. (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 3. Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. The Edit Overlay window appears. 4. In the Edit Overlay window, click Create. 5. In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover.) 6. Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 8. The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive. The overlay document size must match same as the document you print. Do not create an overlay with a watermark. Using an overlay After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an overlay on your document: 1. Create or open the document you want to print. 2. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list. 5. If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you want to use. If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window. After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box. 6. If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm that you wish to print an overlay over your document. If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. The selected overlay prints over your document. The resolution of the overlay document must match the resolution of the original print job. Deleting an overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use. 1. In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab. 2. Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list. 3. Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box. 4. Click Delete. 5. When the confirmation message window appears, click Yes. 6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Print quality options Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). 2. Click the Graphics tab. • The options you can select may vary depending on your printer model. • Refer to the help for each option’s information provided from the Printing Preferences. • Font/Text: Select Clear Text to print text sharper than on a normal document. Use All Text Black to print solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen. • Graphic Controller: Fine Edge allows you to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability. • Advanced: Click this button, you can select Darkness and Toner Save features. - Darkness: The option adjusts the toner density on print output. The values are Normal, Light and Dark. - Toner Save: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality. On: Select this option to allow the machine to use less toner on each page. Off: Select this option if you do not wan to save toner when printing a document. 3. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.Printing_ 59 CHANGING THE DEFAULT PRINT SETTINGS Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver. 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. • For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. • For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. • For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. • For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Right-click your machine. 4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing preferences. If Printing preferences item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. 5. Change the settings on each tab. 6. Click OK. If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing Preferences. SETTING YOUR MACHINE AS A DEFAULT MACHINE 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. • For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. • For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. • For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. • For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select your machine. 4. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 If Set as default printer item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. PRINTING TO A FILE (PRN) You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file. You can print the document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer. The document is saved with the printer formatting, such as font selection and color specifications, in a .prn file that can be printed on another printer. To save a print job as a file 1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window. 2. Click Print. 3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK. For example C:\Temp\file name. If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in Documents and Settings or Users. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. MACINTOSH PRINTING This chapter explains how to print using a Macintosh. You need to set the print environment before printing. • USB connected (See "Macintosh" on page 27). Printing a document When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Macintosh: 1. Open an application and select the file you want to print. 2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications). 3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make sure that your machine is selected. Click OK. 4. Open the File menu and click Print. 5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print. 6. Click Print.Printing_ 60 Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features provided by your machine. Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name, which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties pane is similar to the following. • The setting options may differ depending on models and Macintosh OS versions. • The following panes may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. The following pane is the first pane you will see when you open the printer properties pane. Select other advanced features from the drop down list. Layout The Layout dialog provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features. • Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be printed on one page (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 60). • Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing direction on a page similar to the examples on UI. • Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet. • Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees. Graphics The Graphics dialog provides options for selecting Resolution. Select Graphics from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the graphic features. • Resolution (Quality): This option allows you to select the printing resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. A higher setting will also increase the time it takes to print a document. • Darkness: This option allows you to enhance the darkness of the printouts. The available options are Normal, Light, and Dark. Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type. Printer Settings The Printer Settings dialog provides Toner Save Mode, Reprint When Jammed, and Power Save options. Select Printer Settings from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features: • Toner Save Mode: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality. - Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from the machine (For some models, you cannot change the setting from the machine. In this case, the default setting is Off). - On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page. - Off: Set this option if you do not need to save toner when printing a document. • Power Save: When this option is checked, the switches to the power save mode after a predetermined amount of time. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper. 3. Select the other options you want to use. 4. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper. LINUX PRINTING Printing from applications There are several Linux applications that allow you to print using the Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print using any of these applications. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Print directly using LPR.Printing_ 61 3. From the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties. 4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window. • General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet. • Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options, such as spacing or columns. • Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used when printing images/files, such as color options, image size, or image position. • Advanced: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper source and special print features. If an option is grayed out, it means that the grayed out option is not supported by your machine. 5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window. 6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing. 7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job. To abort the current job, click Cancel. Printing files You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS way, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS LPR utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the standard LPR tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program. To print any document file: 1. Type lpr from the Linux shell command line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears. When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click Open. 2. From the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change the print job properties. 3. Click OK to start printing. Configuring printer properties Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the various properties for your printer. 1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator. If necessary, switch to Printers configuration. 2. Select your machine from the available printers list and click Properties. 3. The Printer Properties window opens. The following five tabs display at the top of the window: • General: This option allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration. • Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab. • Driver: Allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options. • Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list. • Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class. 4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.Copying_ 62 8.copying This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying documents. This chapter includes: • Basic copying • Changing the settings for each copy • ID card copying When printing a fluorescent color, due to the property of the scanner, the result may differ from the original. BASIC COPYING The following is the normal procedure for copying your originals. 1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on page 48). 2. Enter the number of copies using the +/- buttons if necessary. You can copy an original up to 99 pages at a time. • If you press +/- buttons short, the number of one’s place appeared on the display increases or decreases one by one. • If you press +/- buttons long, the number of ten’s place appeared on the display increases or decreases one by one. 3. If you want to customize the copy settings including Darkness, Original Type and more by using the Printer Settings Utility (See "Changing the settings for each copy" on page 62). 4. Press Start button to begin copying. If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press Stop/Clear button and the copying will stop. CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and easily make a copy. However, if you want to change the options for each copy, use the Printer Settings Utility. If you press Stop/Clear button on the control panel while setting the copy options, all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and returned to their default status. Or, they will automatically return to their default status after the machine completes the copy in progress. Original Type The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job. 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Settings. 3. Click Copy > Original Type. Select the appropriate value from the drop-down list, and then click Apply. • Text: Use for originals containing mostly text. • Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs. • Photo: Use when the originals are photographs. Darkness If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read. 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Click Copy > Darkness. Select the appropriate value from the drop-down list, and then click Apply. • Lightest: Works well with lightest print. • Light: Works well with light print. • Normal: Works well with standard typed or printed originals. • Dark: Works well with dark print. • Darkest: Works well with darkest print. Erasing background images You can set the machine to print an image without its background. This copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when copying an original containing color in the background such as a newspaper or a catalog. 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the Status bar in Mac OS X. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Click Copy > Auto Suppress Background. Select the appropriate value from the drop-down list, and then click Apply. • Off: Does not use this feature. • Auto: Optimizes the background. Setting the copy scan size 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Click Copy > Copy Scan Size. Select the appropriate value from the drop-down list, and then click Apply.Copying_ 63 ID CARD COPYING Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet. The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature. 1. Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid. 2. Press ID Copy button on the control panel. Then, the Front LED on the control panel lights on. 3. Press Start button on the control panel. Your machine begins scanning the front side of an original. When scanning the front side of an original is finished the Back LED on the control panel lights on. 4. Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid. 5. Press Start button on the control panel to begin scanning the back side of an original. 6. The machine prints both sides of an original without reducing its size. • If you do not press Start button, only the front side will be copied. • If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be printed. • If you press Stop/Clear button, the copy job is canceled.Scanning_ 64 9.scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer. This chapter includes: • Basic scanning method • Scanning originals and sending to your computer (Scan to PC) • Using Samsung Scan and Fax manager • Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software • Scanning using the WIA driver • Macintosh scanning • Linux Scanning When scanning a fluorescent color, due to the property of the scanner, the result my differ from the original. The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors, including a computer speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the image being scanned and color bit depth settings. Thus, depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan at a certain resolution, especially using enhanced resolution. Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model. Check your model name (See "Features by Models" on page 18). BASIC SCANNING METHOD You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network. • Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: Scan the originals from the control panel. Then, the scanned data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder. When you install all the software in the supplied CD, the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager is also automatically installed on your computer. This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection (See "Using Samsung Scan and Fax manager" on page 64). • TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications. Scanning an image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection (See "Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software" on page 65). • SmarThru: This program is the accompanying software for your machine. You can use this program to scan images or documents. This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection (See "SmarThru" on page 70). • WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature, your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable (See "Scanning using the WIA driver" on page 66). SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING TO YOUR COMPUTER (SCAN TO PC) You can scan an image on the machine via the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program that is installed in your USB connected computer. Scan to PC feature only works when your machine is connected via USB. For USB connected machine This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on page 48). 3. Press Scan to button on the control panel. 4. Press Start button on the control panel to begin scanning. • Scanned image is saved in computer’s My Documents > My Pictures > Samsung folder. • You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program. • From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Scan and Fax Manager > Scan and Fax Manager > Quick Scan. USING SAMSUNG SCAN AND FAX MANAGER If you have installed the printer driver, the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program is installed too. For program information and the scanner's status, start Samsung Scan and Fax Manager. With this program, you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders where scanned documents are saved in your computer. The Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program can only be used in the Windows and Mac OS system. If you use the Macintosh, click the following link ("Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager" on page 67). 1. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Scan and Fax Manager > Scan and Fax Manager > Quick Scan. You can open Samsung Scan and Fax Manager by right-clicking the Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and selecting Scan and Fax Manager. 2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager window. 3. Press Properties. 4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the file saving destination and scan settings, to add or delete application program, and to change the file format to be saved. You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port tab (Local or Network). 5. When setting is done, press OK.Scanning_ 65 Set Scan Button tab Scan Destination • Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications currently linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select the program you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel Destination List. • Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to open scanned image. You can choose only one application to open scanned image from the Available Destination List. • Add Application: Allows you to add application you want to use to Available Destination List. • Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by the user in the Available Destination List. • File Format: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be saved. You can choose among BMP, JPEG, PDF and TIFF. Scan Property • Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer. • Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default saving folder. • Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution. • Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color. • Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size. • ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does not support this option, it will be grayed out. • Show Preview: Checking this box allows you to preview applied scan options. You can modify the options before scanning. • Default: Allows you to go back to default options. Change Port tab Local Scanner Select when your machine is connected via USB port. Network Scanner Select when your machine is connected via network port. • Auto detection on the network: Automatically detects your machine. • IP or Host name: Enter in your machine’s IP address to detect your machine. Scan Assistant When you press Quick Scan in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager, the Scan Assistant window appears. Scan Assistant allows you to adjust scan settings and start the scanning process. • Favorites: Allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use. When you save Favorites, all current scan settings are saved. To use a saved setting, select it from the Favorites drop down list. The machine is now set to scan according to the setting you selected. To delete saved setting, select it from the Favorites drop down list and click Delete. To set a favorite as startup, select the favorite you want to set as startup, then click the Set as default button. • Scan settings: The following scan options are available. - Image Type: Allows you to chose the proper color settings for image scanning. - Resolution: Allows you to choose the image resolution. - Document Size: Allows you to choose the proper size of the scanned image. - Document Source: Allows you to choose the device (scan glass) you want to scan with. - Prompt for additional pages: If this check box is checked, you can scan pages continuously. This option is useful when you scan multi-page documents and/or when Document Source is set to Flatbed (platen glass). In this case a sequence of scanned images is processed as a single document. - Pages to Scan: Allows you to specify how many pages are to be scanned. This option is available when Document Source is set to ADF(Document feeder). • Preference: The following scan options are available. - Auto crop image after preview: If this option is checked, the scanning area will be automatically adjusted to the image size. - Preview on program start: If this option is checked, the scanning area will be selected automatically as shown in the preview. - Blank page detection: This operation automatically detects whether the scanned image is blank or not. - Delete page: Blank pages will be deleted at the end of the scanning process. - Separate files: Blank page will work as a scan job separator. That is, when multiple pages are scanned at once a blank page will divide scanned image sequence into parts. Each part will be treated as a separate document (group). - Start from scanner: If this option is checked, scanning process is managed using scanner touch screen rather than from the computer. The option is not available for some scanner models. • Advanced: In the Advanced mode, additional options such as Image Adjustment, Image Enhancement, and Additional Settings are available. - Image Adjustment: Allows you to perform some transformations of the scanned image. These transformations include automatic adjustment of image size, straightening and rotation. - Image Enhancement: Allows you to remove various defects of the image and improve its quality. - Additional settings: Allows special processing of scanned images. These transformations include stitching several partial image scans into a single image, processing of scanned books and watermark stamping. Click the Help button from the lower-left corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about. Then a pop up window appears with information about that option's feature which is provided from the Scan Assistant. SCANNING WITH TWAIN-ENABLED SOFTWARE If you want to scan documents using other software, you will need to use TWAIN-compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop. Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant software. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on page 48). 3. Open an application such as Adobe Photoshop. 4. Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options. 5. Scan and save your scanned image.Scanning_ 66 SCANNING USING THE WIA DRIVER Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using additional software. • The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Vista/7 with a USB port. • Depending on the selected Control Panel view, the path may differ. Windows XP 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on page 48). 3. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Scanners and Cameras. 4. Double-click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and Camera wizard appears. 5. Click Next. 6. Set the option in Choose scanning preferences window and click Preview to see how your options affect the picture. 7. Click Next. 8. Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the picture. 9. Your picture has been successfully copied to your computer. Choose one of the options on screen. 10. Click Next. 11. Click Finish. Windows Vista 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on page 48). 3. From the Start menu select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Scanners and Cameras. 4. Double-click Scan a document or picture. Windows Fax and Scan application appears. • You can click on View scanners and cameras to view scanners, • If there is no Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint program and from the File click From Scanner or Camera... 5. Click New Scan. Scan driver appears. 6. Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture. 7. Click Scan. If you want to cancel the scan job, press Cancel button on the Scanner and Camera wizard. Windows 7 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on page 48). 3. From the Start menu select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers > Printers and Faxes. 4. Click right button of mouse on device driver icon and select Start Scan. New Scan application appears. 5. Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture. 6. Click Scan. MACINTOSH SCANNING You can scan documents using Image Capture program. Mac OS offers Image Capture program. Scanning with USB 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on page 48). 3. Start Applications and click Image Capture. If No camera or scanner connected message appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem persists, refer to the Image Capture’s help. 4. Set the scan options on this program. 5. Scan and save your scanned image. • For more information about using Image Capture, refer to the Image Capture’s help. • Use TWAIN-compliant software to apply more scan options. • You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop. • Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant software. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software. • If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher. Scanning with network (SCX-3205W(K) only) 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on page 48). 3. Start Applications and click Image Capture. 4. For Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.5 Click Devices and click Browse Devices. For Mac OS X 10.6 Select your device below SHARED. Skip to step 7. 5. For Mac OS X 10.4 Select your machine in TWAIN devices option. Make sure that Use TWAIN software check box is checked, and click Connect. • If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port. • If TWAIN UI appears, from the Preference tab, click Change Port.. to select port. Refer to scan manager for Change port.. use (See "Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager" on page 67). For Mac OS X 10.5 Make sure that Connected check box is checked beside your machine Scanning_ 67 in Bonjour Devices. If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X 10.4 steps above. 6. Set the scan options on this program. 7. Scan and save your scanned image. • For Mac OS X 10.3, use TWAIN-compliant software. • For more information about using Image Capture, refer to the Image Capture’s help. • Use TWAIN-compliant software to apply more scan options. • You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop. • Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant software. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software. • If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher. Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager When you want to find out about Scan and Fax Manager program information, to check the installed scan driver's condition, to change scan settings and to add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are saved in Scan and Fax Manager program, follow the below steps. 1. From the Smart Panel menu on Status bar, click Scan and Fax Manager. 2. Select the appropriate machine from the Scan and Fax Manager. 3. Press Properties. 4. Use Set Scan Button to change the file destination or scan settings, to add or delete application programs, and to format files. You can change the scanning machine by using Change Port (Local or Network). 5. When done, press OK. LINUX SCANNING You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window. Scanning 1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop. 2. Click the button to switch to Scanners configuration. 3. Select the scanner on the list. If you use only one machine device and it is connected to the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on the list and is automatically selected. If you have two or more scanners connected to your computer, you can select any scanner to work at any time. For example, while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously. 4. Click Properties. 5. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on page 48). 6. From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview. The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane. 7. Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview Pane. 8. Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections. • Image Quality: This option allows you to select the color composition and the scan resolution for the image. • Scan Area: This option allows you to select the page size. The Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually. If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings, select the option from the Job Type drop-down list (See "Adding Job Type Settings" on page 67). Click Default to restore the default setting for the scan options. 9. When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning. The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning, click Cancel. 10. The scanned image appears. If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar (See "Using the Image Manager" on page 68). 11.When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar. 12. Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the file name. 13. Click Save. Adding Job Type Settings You can save your scan option settings for later use.Scanning_ 68 To save a new Job Type setting 1. Change the options from the Scanner Properties window. 2. Click Save As. 3. Enter the name for your setting. 4. Click OK. Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list. To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job 1. Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-down list. 2. The next time you open the Scanner Properties window, the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan job. To delete a Job Type setting 1. Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop-down list. 2. Click Delete. The setting is deleted from the list. Using the Image Manager The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image. Use the following tools to edit the image. TOOLS NAME FUNCTION Save Saves the image. Undo Cancels your last action. Redo Restores the action you canceled. Scroll Allows you to scroll through the image. Crop Crops the selected image area. Zoom Out Zooms the image out. Zoom In Zooms the image in. Scale Allows you to scale the image size; you can enter the size manually, or set the rate to scale proportionally, vertically, or horizontally. Rotate Allows you to rotate the image; you can select the number of degrees from the drop-down list. Flip Allows you to flip the image vertically or horizontally. Brightness Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of the image, or to invert the image. Properties Shows the properties of the image. For further details about the Image Manager application, refer to the on screen help.Management tools_ 69 10.management tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine. This chapter includes: • Introducing useful management tools • Using SyncThru™ Web Service (SCX-3205W(K) only) • Using the Smart Panel program • SmarThru • Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model. Check your model name (See "Features by Models" on page 18). INTRODUCING USEFUL MANAGEMENT TOOLS The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently. • "Using SyncThru™ Web Service (SCX-3205W(K) only)" on page 69. • "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 70. • "SmarThru" on page 70. • "Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator" on page 71. USING SYNCTHRU™ WEB SERVICE (SCX-3205W(K) ONLY) Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for SyncThru™ Web Service. If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via SyncThru™ Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™ Web Service to: • View the machine’s device information and check its current status. • Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters. • Change printer preference. • Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status. • Get support for using the machine. To access SyncThru™ Web Service 1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in but you won’t have access to Settings tab and Security tab. 1. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. The Login window appears. 2. Type in the ID and Password then click Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. • ID: admin • Password: sec00000 SyncThru™ Web Service overview Some tabs may not appear depending on your model. Information tab This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports such as an error report and so on. • Active Alerts: This item allows you to check the alerts occurred in the machine and their severity. • Supplies: This item allows you to check how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in the cartridge. • Usage Counters: This item allows you to check the usage count by print types: simplex, duplex. • Current Settings: This item allows you to check the machine and network information. • Print information: This item allows you to print reports such as system related reports, e-mail address and font reports. Settings tab This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab. • Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by your machine. - System: You can set settings related to your machine. - Printer: You can set settings related to printing jobs. - Copy: You can set settings related to copying jobs. • Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the network environment. You can set things, such as TCP/IP, network protocols and so on. - Restore Default: You can restore default network settings. Security tab This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab. • System Security: You can set the system administrator’s information. • Network Security: You can set settings for IPv4/IPv6 filtering, 802.1x, Authentication servers.Management tools_ 70 Maintenance tab This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu. • Firmware Upgrade: You can upgrade your machine’s firmware. • Contact Information: You can view the contact information. • Link: You can view the links to useful sites where you can download or check information. USING THE SMART PANEL PROGRAM The Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status, and allows you to customize the machine’s settings. For Windows and Macintosh, Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the machine software. For Linux, you can download Smart Panel from the Samsung website and install (See "Installing the Smart Panel" on page 28). To use this program, your computer has to meet the following system requirements: • Windows. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 25). • Mac OS X 10.3 or higher. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 25). • Linux. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 25). • Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML Help. If you need to know the exact model name of your machine, you can check the supplied software CD. Understanding Smart Panel If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Smart Panel. You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or Notification Area (in Linux). You can also click it on the status bar (in Mac OS X). Windows Double-click this icon in Windows. Macintosh Click this icon in Mac OS X. Linux Click this icon in Linux. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. • If you have already installed more than one Samsung machine, first select the correct machine model you want in order to access the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel icon and select your machine. • The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use. The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the machine, the estimated level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge, and various other types of information. You can also change settings. 1 Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge. The machine and the number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may differ depending on the machine in use. Some machines do not have this feature. 2 Buy Now You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from online. 3 User’s Guide You can view the online User’s Guide. This button changes to Troubleshooting Guide when error occurs. You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the user’s guide. 4 Printer Setting You can configure various machine settings in the Printer Settings Utility window. Some machines do not have this feature. If you connect your machine to a network, the SyncThru™ Web Service window appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility window. 5 Driver Setting You can set all of the machine options you need in the Printing Preferences window. This feature is available only for Windows (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options window. SMARTHRU The supplied software CD provides you with SmarThru. SmarThru offers you convenient features to use with your machine. Starting SmarThru Follow the steps below to start SmarThru. 1. Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other. 2. Once you have installed SmarThru, you will see the SmarThru icon on your desktop.Management tools_ 71 3. Double-click the SmarThru icon. 4. The SmarThru appears. • Scan to: Allows you to scan an image and save it to an application or folder, email it, or publish it on a website. • Image: Allows you to edit an image you have saved as a graphic file and send it to a selected application or folder, email it, or publish it on a website. • Print: Allows you to print images you have saved. You can print images in black and white or color mode if your machine supports it. For more information about SmarThru, click at the top right corner of the window. The SmarThru help window appears; you can view on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program. Follow the steps below to uninstall SmarThru. Before you begin the uninstall, ensure that all applications are closed on your computer. a) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs. b) Select Samsung Printers > SmarThru 4 > Uninstall SmarThru 4. c) When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, read the statement and click OK. d) Click Finish. Using SmarThru Scanning 1. Click Scan To. • Application: Scanning an image and placing it in an image editor application such as Paint or Adobe Photoshop. • E-mail: Scanning an image and emailing it. Allows you to scan an image, preview it, and email it. To send an image by e-mail, you must have a mail client program, like Outlook Express, which has been set up with your e-mail account. • Folder: Scanning an image and saving it to a folder. Allows you to scan an image, preview it, and save it to the folder of your choice. • OCR: Scanning an image and performing text recognition. Allows you to scan an image, preview it, and send it to the OCR program for text recognition. - Recommended scan option for OCR. - Resolution: 200 or 300 dpi. - Image type: grayscale or black & white. • Web: Scanning an image, previewing it, and publishing it on a website, using the specified file format for the image you want to publish. • Settings: Customizing settings of Scan To basic functions. Allows you to customize settings for Application, E-mail, OCR, and Web functions. 2. Set scan settings and click Scan. Printing 1. Click Print. 2. Select the file you want to print. 3. Select the machine you want to use for printing. 4. Click Print to start the job. USING THE LINUX UNIFIED DRIVER CONFIGURATOR The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver Configurator (See "Installing the Unified Linux Driver" on page 28). After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop. Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop. You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window.1 Printers Configuration 2 Scanners Configuration 3 Ports Configuration Management tools_ 72 To use the on screen help, click Help. 3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator. Printers configuration window Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes. Printers tab View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window. 1 Switches to Printers configuration. 2 Shows all of the installed machine. 3 Shows the status, model name and URL of your machine. The printer control buttons are as follows: • Refresh: Renews the available machines list. • Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines. • Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine. • Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine. • Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine. • Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly. • Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties. Classes tab The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes. 1 Shows all of the machine classes. 2 Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class. • Refresh: Renews the classes list. • Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class. • Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.Management tools_ 73 Scanners configuration In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices, view a list of installed Samsung machine devices, change device properties, and scan images. 1 Switches to Scanners configuration. 2 Shows all of the installed scanners. 3 Shows the vendor, model name and type of your scanner. • Properties: Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a document. Ports configuration In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each port, and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason. 1 Switches to Ports configuration. 2 Shows all of the available ports. 3 Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status. • Refresh: Renews the available ports list. • Release port: Releases the selected port. Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners Your machine may be connected to a host computer via a parallel port or USB port. Since the machine device contains more than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port. The Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers. The drivers talk to their devices via so-called machine ports. The current status of any machine port can be viewed via the Ports configuration. The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the machine device, while another block is in use. When you install a new machine device onto your system, it is strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for machine’s functionality. For machine scanners, I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.Maintenance_ 74 11.maintenance This chapter provides information about maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge. This chapter includes: • Printing a machine report • Cleaning the machine • Storing the toner cartridge • Tips for moving & storing your machine PRINTING A MACHINE REPORT You can print a configuration page to view current printer settings, or to help troubleshoot printer problems. In ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button for about two seconds, then release. A configuration page prints out. CLEANING THE MACHINE If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the most optimum print quality. • Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet. • If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend that you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful if inhaled. Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft and lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine. Cleaning the inside During the printing process, paper, toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems. 1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. 2. Open the scan unit. 3. Open the inner cover. 4. Pull the toner cartridge out. • To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.Maintenance_ 75 • Do not touch the green surface of the drum located in the toner cartridge or imaging unit. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 5. With a dry and lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridges area. While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine. After cleaning, let the machine to dry completely. 6. Reinsert the toner cartridge. 7. Close the inner cover and the scan unit completely in order. 8. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on. Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed. 1. Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water. 2. Open the scanner lid. 3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass until it is clean and dry. 4. Close the scanner lid. STORING THE TONER CARTRIDGE Toner cartridge storage Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge. Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in; this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet. Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge according to the following guidelines: • Inside the protective bag from the original package. • Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if was installed in the machine. • Do not store consumable in any of the following conditions: - Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F). - Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%. - An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature. - Direct sunlight or room light.Maintenance_ 76 - Dusty places. - A car for a long period of time. - An environment where corrosive gases are present. - An environment with salty air. Handling instructions • Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge. • Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock. • Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner spillage. Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges. Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner cartridge. Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often. TIPS FOR MOVING & STORING YOUR MACHINE • When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality.Troubleshooting_ 77 12.troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. This chapter includes: • Redistributing toner • Tips for avoiding paper jams • Clearing paper jams • Solving other problems REDISTRIBUTING TONER When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life: • White streaks or light printing occurs. • The Status LED blinks red. If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner. 1. Open the scan unit. 2. Open the inner cover. 3. Pull the toner cartridge out. 4. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. Do not touch the drum in the toner cartridge or imaging unit. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 5. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine. The tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks Troubleshooting_ 78 into place completely. 6. Close the inner cover and the scan unit completely in order. Ensure that they are securely closed. TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a paper jam occurs, refer to the guidelines below: • Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (See "Loading paper in the tray" on page 50). • Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray. • Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing. • Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading. • Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper. • Do not mix paper types in a tray. • Use only recommended print media. • Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing the right side (See "Loading paper in the tray" on page 50). • If duplexing, print one sheet at a time using Start button (See "Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)" on page 56). • If you are printing on a special paper, print one sheet at a time using Start button (See "Manual feeding in the tray" on page 50). CLEARING PAPER JAMS If a paper jam occurs, the Status LED on the control panel lights orange. Find and remove the jammed paper. To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and carefully. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam. 2 1 1 Scan unit 2 Inner cover In the tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. Open the scan unit first, and then the inner cover. 2. Close the inner cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If the paper does not eject, go to the next step.Troubleshooting_ 79 3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out. If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper in this area, check inside the machine (See "Inside the machine" on page 79). 4. Close the inner cover and the scan unit in order. Printing automatically resumes. Inside the machine Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Be careful when removing paper from this area to prevent getting your fingers burnt. 1. Open the scan unit first, and then the inner cover. 2. Close the inner cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If the paper does not eject, go to the next step. 3. Open the inner cover. 4. Open the fuser unit cover. 5. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out. If you do not see the jammed paper, go to the next step.Troubleshooting_ 80 6. Pull the toner cartridge out. 7. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out. 8. Insert the toner cartridge back into the machine. 9. Close the inner cover and the scan unit in order. Printing automatically resumes. SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS The following chart lists some trouble conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, contact a service representative. Other problems include: • See "Power problems" on page 81. • See "Paper feeding problems" on page 81. • See "Printing problems" on page 82. • See "Printing quality problems" on page 83. • See "Copying problems" on page 85. • See "Scanning problems" on page 86. • See "Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem" on page 86. • See "Common Windows problems" on page 87. • See "Common Linux problems" on page 87. • See "Common Macintosh problems" on page 88.Troubleshooting_ 81 Power problems Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems. CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine is not receiving power, or the connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. • Plug in the power cord and press Power button on the control panel. • Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. - For Local Printing - For Network Printing (SCX-3205W(K) only) Paper feeding problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Paper jams during printing. Clear the paper jam (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 78). Paper sticks together. • Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper. • Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together, replace with a new stack. Multiple sheets of paper do not feed. Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight. Paper does not feed into the machine. • Remove any obstructions from inside the machine. • Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly. • There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. • The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). The paper keeps jamming. • There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the manual feeder. • An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • There may be debris inside the machine. Clean the machine inside (See Cleaning the inside). Transparencies stick together in the paper exit. Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine. Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly. Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.Troubleshooting_ 82 Printing problems CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not print. The machine is not receiving power. Check the power cord connections. The machine is not selected as the default machine. Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows. Check the machine for the followings: • The scan unit is not closed. Close the scan unit. • Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 78). • No paper is loaded. Load paper (See "Loading paper in the tray" on page 50). • The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge. If a system error occurs, contact a service representative. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective. If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job. You can also try using a different machine cable. The port setting is incorrect. Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one. The machine may be configured incorrectly. Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). The printer driver may be incorrectly installed. Repair the machine software (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver" on page 26). The machine is malfunctioning. • Check the LEDs on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error. If the error cannot be cleared, contact a service representative. • Checking an error message is also possible from the Smart Panel on your computer (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 70). The machine does not print. The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job. Allocate more hard disk space on your computer for spooling, and try printing. The output tray is full. It can hold up to 50 (80 g/m2 ) sheets of plain paper. Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing. The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source. The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect. For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences. Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help scree. (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). A print job is extremely slow. The job may be very complex. Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings. Half the page is blank. The page orientation setting may be incorrect. Change the page orientation in your application. See the printer driver help screen. The paper size and the paper size settings do not match. Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray. Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use. The machine prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete. The machine cable is loose or defective. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable. The wrong printer driver was selected. Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected. The software application is malfunctioning. Try printing a job from another application. The operating system is malfunctioning. Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again. CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONSTroubleshooting_ 83 Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the The machine problem. prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete. If you are in a DOS environment, the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly. See "Changing font setting" on page 47. Pages print, but they are blank. The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner. Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If necessary, replace the toner cartridge. The file may have blank pages. Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages. Some parts, such as the controller or the board, may be defective. Contact a service representative. The machine does not print PDF files correctly. Some graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The print quality of photos is not good. Images are not clear. The resolution of the photo is very low. Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the resolution will be reduced. Before printing, the machine emits vapor near the output tray. Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing. This is not a problem. Just keep printing. The machine does not print special- sized paper, such as billing paper. Paper size and paper size setting do not match. Set the correct paper size in the Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Light or faded print • If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life (See "Redistributing toner" on page 77). If this does not improve the print quality, install a new toner cartridge. • The paper may not meet paper specification; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver. • A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 74). Toner specks • The paper may not meet specification; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact a service representative. • The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 78). Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page: • A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job. • The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thick (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). • If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.Troubleshooting_ 84 White Spots If white spots appear on the page: • The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 74). • The paper path may need cleaning (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 74). Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page: • The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89). If white vertical streaks appear on the page: • The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 74). Black background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable: • Change to a lighter weight paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount of background shading. • Remove the old toner cartridge and, install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89). Toner smear If toner smears on the page: • Clean the inside of the machine (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 74). • Check the paper type and quality (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89). Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals: • The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89). • Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages. • The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative. CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Background scatter A Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page. • The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a fresh ream of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture. • If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems. • If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print quality through your software application or in Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). Toner particles are around bold characters or pictures The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to the Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled. Misformed characters • If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). Page skew A a B b C c • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. • Check the paper type and quality (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack. CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONSTroubleshooting_ 85 Copying problems Curl or wave • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. • Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Wrinkles or creases • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. • Check the paper type and quality (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 74). Solid Color or Black pages A • The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. • The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89). • The machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Loose toner • Clean the inside of the machine (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 74). • Check the paper type and quality (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). • Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89). • If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Character Voids A Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black: • If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the composition of transparencies, some character voids are normal. • You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it over. • The paper may not meet paper specifications (See "Print media specifications" on page 93). Horizontal stripes A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear: • The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. • The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89). • If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine: • Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thin (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55). An unknown image repetitively appears on a few sheets or loose toner, light print, or contamination occurs. Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft.) or above. The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging. You can select a correct altitude of your machine location (See "Altitude adjustment" on page 46). CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTION Copies are too light or too dark. Adjust darkness to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies using Printer Settings Utility (See "Changing the settings for each copy" on page 62). CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONSTroubleshooting_ 86 Scanning problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The scanner does not work. • Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass. • There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan resolution rate. • Check that the machine cable is connected properly. • Make sure that the machine cable is not defective. Switch the cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace the cable. • Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the SmarThru or the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001). The unit scans very slowly. • Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed. • Graphics are scanned more slowly than text. Message appears on your computer screen: • Device can’t be set to the H/W mode you want. • Port is being used by another program. • Port is Disabled. • Scanner is busy receiving or printing data. When the current job is completed, try again. • Invalid handle. • Scanning has failed. • There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished. • The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again. • The machine cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off. • The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly. • Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer. • The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off. Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTION Samsung Scan and Fax Manager does not work. Check your system requirements. Samsung Scan and Fax Manager works in Windows and Mac OS (See "System requirements" on page 25). Smears, lines, marks, or spots appear on copies. • If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness to lighten the background of your copies using Printer Settings Utility (See "Changing the settings for each copy" on page 62). • If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 75). Copy image is skewed. • Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass. • Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly. Blank copies print out. Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass. Image rubs off the copy easily. • Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package. • In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time. Frequent copy paper jams occur. • Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if necessary. • Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight. • Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared. Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner. • Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other documents that use more toner. • The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made. • Turn the machine off and back on. CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONTroubleshooting_ 87 Common Windows problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS “File in Use” message appears during installation. Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver. “General Protection Fault”, “Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or “Illegal Operation” messages appear. Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again. “Fail To Print”, “A printer timeout error occurred” messages appear. These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has been completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred. Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages. Common Linux problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not print. • Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device. • Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list. Look at the description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped string, press Start button. After that normal operation of the machine should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred. For instance, this could be an attempt to print a document when the port is claimed by a scanning application. • Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional components of machine (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other user will encounter “device busy” response. You should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your machine. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application. If this is the case, you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button, if you are sure that the present application is not functioning properly. • Check if your application has special print option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter, then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command line parameter in the command item. • The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install a later version of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher). The machine does not print whole pages, and output is printed on half the page. It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252.The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem.Troubleshooting_ 88 Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages. Common Macintosh problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not print PDF files correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The document has printed, but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS X 10.3.2. Update your Mac OS to Mac OS X 10.3.3. or higher. Some letters are not displayed normally during the Cover page printing. Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the Cover page. When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly. Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader. Refer to the Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages. I cannot scan via Gimp Front-end. Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane: Device dialog on the Acquire menu. If not, you should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page. For the detailed information, refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end application. If you wish to use another kind of scan application, refer to application’s Help. I encounter the “Cannot open port device file” error when printing a document. Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port in Port configuration window. The machine does not appear on the scanners list. • Ensure your machine is attached to your computer, connected properly via the USB port, and is turned on. • Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system. Open Unified Linux Driver configurator, switch to Scanners configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine's name is listed in the window. • Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional components of machine (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other user will encounter “device busy” response. This usually happens when starting a scan procedure. An appropriate message box appears. To identify the source of the problem, open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner, port's symbol /dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start at /dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you can see if the port is occupied by another application. If this is the case, you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button, if you are sure that the present port application is not functioning properly. CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not scan. • Ensure a document is loaded into the machine, ensure your machine is connected to the computer. • If there is an I/O error while scanning. CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONSSupplies_ 89 13.supplies This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies and maintenance parts available for your machine. This chapter includes: • How to purchase • Available supplies • Available maintenance parts • Replacing the toner cartridge Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories. HOW TO PURCHASE To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine. You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, select your country/region, and obtain information on calling for service. AVAILABLE SUPPLIES When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of supplies for your machine: MODEL NUMBER • 104 (MLT-D104S): Available in all regions except those listed in Region A and B. • 1042 (MLT-D1042S): Region A a a.Region A: Albania, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, UK. • 1043 (MLT-D1043S): Region B b : b.Region B: China, Bangladesh, India, Nepal, Ukraine, Vietnam. • 104 (MLT-D104X): Not available in all regions. *Refer to your local Samsung website for availability. To replace a toner cartridge, see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89. Depending on the options and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ. You must purchase supplies, including toner cartridges, in the same country where you purchased your machine. Otherwise, supplies will be incompatible with your machine since the system configuration of these vary from country to country. Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. AVAILABLE MAINTENANCE PARTS To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the machine. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it has reached its “Average Yield”. Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts, see table below. The purpose of which is to maintain your machine in top working condition. The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each item has been met. PARTS AVERAGE YIELD A a.Yield is affected by operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, media type, media size, and job complexity. Transfer roller Approx. 30,000 pages Fuser unit Approx. 30,000 pages Pickup roller Approx. 30,000 pages REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge. When the toner cartridge reaches its estimated cartridge life, • The Smart Panel program window appears on the computer telling you the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. • The machine stops printing. At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the model number for the toner cartridge used in your machine (See "Available supplies" on page 89).Supplies_ 90 1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool. 2. Open the scan unit. 3. Open the inner cover. 4. Pull the toner cartridge out. 5. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package. 6. Slowly shake the cartridge side to side five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. It will assure maximum copies per cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. Do not touch the drum located in the toner cartridge or imaging unit. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 7. Remove the cap protecting the toner cartridge. 8. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine. Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely. 9. Close the inner cover and the scan unit completely in order. 10. Turn the machine on.Specifications_ 91 14.specifications This chapter covers the machines primary specifications. This chapter includes: • Hardware specifications • Environmental specifications • Electrical specifications • Print media specifications The specification values are listed below: specifications are subject to change without notice: See www.samsung.com/printer for possible changes in information. HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS ITEM DESCRIPTION Dimension Height 234 mm (9.21 inches) Depth 299 mm (11.77 inches) Width 388 mm (15.28 inches) Weight Machine with consumables 7.5 kg (16.53 lbs) Package weight Paper 1.22 kg (2.69 lbs) Plastic 0.24 kg (0.52 lbs) ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ITEM DESCRIPTION Noise Level a a.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing. Ready mode 26 dB(A) Printing mode 49 dB(A) Copying mode 49 dB(A) Temperature Operation 10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F) Storage (unpacked) 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) Humidity Operation 10 to 80% RH Storage (unpacked) 20 to 80% RH ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty.ITEM DESCRIPTION Power rating a a.See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and type of current (A) for your machine. 110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V 220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 270W Ready mode Less than 36W Power save mode • SCX-3200 Series: 3.8W • SCX-3205W(K): 5.6 W Power off mode Less than 0.45 W Specifications_ 92Specifications_ 93 PRINT MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS TYPE SIZE DIMENSIONS PRINT MEDIA WEIGHT A B a.If media weight is over 120 g/m2 (32 lbs), load a paper into the tray one by one. /CAPACITY Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.50 x 11.00 inches) 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lbs bond) • 150 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lbs bond) 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs bond) • 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.00 inches) US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.50 x 13.00 inches) A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches) Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.50 x 13.50 inches) JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches) Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 0 inches) A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.50 inches) 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.50 inches) • 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches) Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches) Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 90 g/m2 (24 lbs bond) • 140 sheets 90 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lbs bond) • 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) • 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray Transparency Letter, A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lbs bond) • 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray Labels c c. Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield). Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) • 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray Card stock Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 Refer to the Plain paper section 105 to 163 g/m2 (28 to 43 lbs bond) • 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray Minimum size (custom) 76 x 196 mm (3.00 x 7.70 inches) 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs bond) Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.02 inches) b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness and environmental conditions. TRAY MANUAL FEEDING IN THE TRAYContact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 94 contact samsung worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center. COUNTRY/REG ION CUSTOMER CARE CENTER WEB SITE ARGENTINE 0800-333-3733 www.samsung.com ARMENIA 0-800-05-555 AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com AUSTRIA 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 BAHRAIN 8000-4726 BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/be (Dutch) www.samsung.com/be_fr (French) BRAZIL 0800-124-421 4004-0000 www.samsung.com CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com CHILE 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com CHINA 400-810-5858 010-6475 1880 www.samsung.com COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 www.samsung.com COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com CZECH REPUBLIC 800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com ECUADOR 1-800-10-7267 www.samsung.com EGYPT 0800-726786 EIRE 0818 717100 www.samsung.com EL SALVADOR 800-6225 www.samsung.com ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 FINLAND 030-6227 515 www.samsung.com FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/min) www.samsung.com GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 www.samsung.com HONDURAS 800-7919267 www.samsung.com HONG KONG (852) 3698-4698 www.samsung.com/hk www.samsung.com/hk_en/ HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com INDIA 3030 8282 1800 110011 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 www.samsung.com INDONESIA 0800-112-8888 021-5699-7777 www.samsung.com ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com JORDAN 800-22273 KSA 9200-21230 www.samsung.com BAHRAIN 8000-4726 LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/min) www.samsung.com NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 www.samsung.com NORWAY 815-56 480 www.samsung.com PANAMA 800-7267 www.samsung.com COUNTRY/REG ION CUSTOMER CARE CENTER WEB SITEContact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 95 PHILIPPINES 1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 02-5805777 www.samsung.com POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678) 022-607-93-33 www.samsung.com PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com QATAR 800-2255 REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SPAIN 902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172 678) www.samsung.com SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com SYRIA 1825-22-73 TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 TAIWAN 0800-329-999 www.samsung.com THAILAND 1800-29-3232 02-689-3232 www.samsung.com TRINIDAD & TOBAGO 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com UKRAINE 8-800-502-000 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru COUNTRY/REG ION CUSTOMER CARE CENTER WEB SITE UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 www.samsung.com VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com COUNTRY/REG ION CUSTOMER CARE CENTER WEB SITEGlossary_ 96 glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide. 802.11 802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802). 802.11b/g 802.11b/g can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps; 802.11g up to 54 Mbps. 802.11b/g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices. Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals. ADF An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once. AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white. BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform. BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system. CCD Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine. Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies. Control Panel A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine. Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage. CSV Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms. DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper. Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized. DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts. DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.Glossary_ 97 DNS The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet. Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter. DPI Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size. DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle. Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day. ECM Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise. Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state. Ethernet Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present. EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. FDI Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine. FTP A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet). Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer. Gateway A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network. Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray. Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots. HDD Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces. IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity. IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer). Glossary_ 98 Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website. IP address An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard. IPM The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute. IPP The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones. IPX/SPX IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN). ISO The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards. ITU-T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication. ITU-T No. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions. JBIG Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images. JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web. LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP. LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine. MAC address Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks. MFP Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc. MH Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes. MMR Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6. Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information. MR Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted.Glossary_ 99 NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX. OPC Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper. Originals The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else. OSI Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical. PABX A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise. PCL Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers. PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format. PostScript PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image. Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer. Print Media The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier. PPM Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute. PRN file An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks. Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints. PS See PostScript. PSTN The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard. RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access. Resolution The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution. SMB Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication mechanism. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server. SSID Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters.Glossary_ 100 Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address. TCP/IP The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run. TCR Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions. TIFF Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications. Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper. TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems. UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: \\\\ URL Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located. USB Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals. Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting. WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. WIA Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP. WPA-PSK WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security. WPS The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer. XPS XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-independent document format. GT-P7100 Benutzerhandbuch2 Dieses Handbuch verwenden Dieses Handbuch verwenden Vielen Dank für den Erwerb dieses Samsung-Mobilgeräts. Dieses Gerät, das auf der herausragenden Technologie und den hohen Standards von Samsung beruht, bietet Ihnen mobile Kommunikation und Unterhaltung in hoher Qualität. Dieses Benutzerhandbuch wurde speziell entwickelt, um Sie Schritt für Schritt durch die Funktionen und Optionen Ihres Geräts zu führen. Lesen Sie den folgenden Abschnitt zuerst • Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und dieses Benutzerhandbuch vor der Verwendung des Geräts aufmerksam durch, um seine sichere und sachgemäße Verwendung zu gewährleisten. • Die Beschreibungen in diesem Handbuch beziehen sich auf die Standardeinstellungen Ihres Geräts. • Bilder und Bildschirmdarstellungen in diesem Benutzerhandbuch können vom Erscheinungsbild des tatsächlichen Produkts abweichen. • Der Inhalt in diesem Benutzerhandbuch kann vom Produkt oder von Software, die von Dienstanbietern oder Netzbetreibern bereitgestellt wird, abweichen. Änderungen des Inhalts dieses Benutzerhandbuchs ohne vorherige Bekanntmachung ist vorbehalten. Die neueste Version des Benutzerhandbuchs steht auf www.samsung.com zur Verfügung.Dieses Handbuch verwenden 3 • Die verfügbaren Funktionen und zusätzliche Dienste können sich je nach Gerät, Software und Netzbetreiber unterscheiden. • Der Aufbau und die Zustellung dieses Benutzerhandbuchs beruhen auf dem AndroidBetriebssystem und können abhängig vom Betriebssystem des Benutzers abweichen. • Anwendungen und ihre Funktionen können sich je nach Land, Region oder HardwareSpezifikationen unterscheiden. Samsung ist nicht haftbar für Leistungsprobleme, die durch Anwendungen von Drittanbietern verursacht werden. • Samsung ist nicht haftbar für Leistungsprobleme und Inkompatibilitäten, die durch Bearbeitung der Registry-Einstellungen durch den Benutzer verursacht werden. • Tonquellen, Hintergrundbilder und Bilder, die in diesem Gerät bereitgestellt werden, unterliegen einer Lizenzvereinbarung für eingeschränkte Nutzung zwischen Samsung und ihren jeweiligen Eigentümern. Extrahieren und Nutzen dieser Materialien für gewerbliche oder andere Zwecke stellt eine Verletzung der Urheberrechtsgesetze dar. Samsung ist nicht haftbar für derartige Verletzungen der Urheberrechte durch den Benutzer. • Bewahren Sie dieses Benutzerhandbuchs zum späteren Nachschlagen auf.4 Dieses Handbuch verwenden Copyright Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics Dieses Benutzerhandbuch ist durch internationale Urheberrechtsgesetze geschützt. Kein Teil dieses Benutzerhandbuchs darf ohne die vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung durch Samsung Electronics in irgendeiner Form oder durch irgendwelche Mittel, elektronisch oder mechanisch, einschließlich von Fotokopieren, Aufzeichnen oder Speichern in einem Informationsspeicher- und -abrufsystem, reproduziert, verteilt, übersetzt oder übertragen werden. Markenzeichen • SAMSUNG und das SAMSUNG-Logo sind eingetragene Markenzeichen von Samsung Electronics. • Google, das stilisierte Google-Logo, Android und das stilisierte Android-Logo sind Marken von Google, Inc. • Bluetooth® ist ein weltweit eingetragenes Warenzeichen der Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Dieses Handbuch verwenden 5 • Oracle und Java sind eingetragene Marken von Oracle und/oder ihren verbundenen Unternehmen. Andere Namen und Bezeichnungen können Marken ihrer jeweiligen Inhaber sein. • Wi-Fi®, das Logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED und das Logo Wi-Fi sind eingetragene Marken von Wi-Fi Alliance. • Alle anderen Markenzeichen und Urheberrechte sind das Eigentum ihrer jeweiligen Besitzer.6 Inhalt Inhalt Gerät und Zubehör ................................................................................ 7 Verpackungsinhalt ............................................................................................................. 8 Mit dem Gerät vertraut machen ..................................................................................... 9 SIM-Karte einsetzen ........................................................................................................ 12 Gerät laden ........................................................................................................................ 13 Gerät ein- und ausschalten ........................................................................................... 16 Sicherheitshinweise ............................................................................ 18Gerät und Zubehör 7 Gerät und Zubehör Ihr GALAXY Tab 10.1v™-Gerät beinhaltet umfangreiches Zubehör, einschließlich Headset, PC-Datenkabel und Adapter. In diesem Handbuch werden die Teile des Geräts, das Laden des Akkus, das Ein- und Ausschalten des Geräts sowie weitere hilfreiche Informationen beschrieben. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter www.samsung.com. In diesem Abschnitt Verpackungsinhalt auf Seite 8 Mit dem Gerät vertraut machen auf Seite 9 SIM-Karte einsetzen auf Seite 12 Gerät laden auf Seite 13 Gerät ein- und ausschalten auf Seite 168 Gerät und Zubehör Verpackungsinhalt Überprüfen Sie, ob der Produktkarton die folgenden Artikel enthält: • Mobilgerät • USB-Netzadapter • PC-Datenkabel • Headset • Benutzerhandbuch • Die mit dem Gerät mitgelieferten Artikel können sich unterscheiden, je nachdem welche Software und welches Zubehör in Ihrer Region erhältlich sind oder von Ihrem Netzbetreiber angeboten werden. • Bei Ihrem örtlichen Samsung-Händler können Sie zusätzliche Zubehörteile kaufen. • Die mitgelieferten Zubehörteile erbringen in Verbindung mit dem Gerät die optimale Leistung. • Andere Zubehörteile als die mitgelieferten sind unter Umständen nicht mit dem Gerät kompatibel.Gerät und Zubehör 9 Mit dem Gerät vertraut machen Ein/Aus-Taste 3,5-mm-Headsetbuchse Lautsprecher Lichtsensor Touchscreen Multifunktionsbuchse Vordere Kamera LED10 Gerät und Zubehör Lautstärketaste Mikrofon Fotolicht Hinteres Kameraobjektiv Interne Antenne SIM-Karten-Einschub LautsprecherGerät und Zubehör 11 Bevor Sie das Gerät zum ersten Mal verwenden, müssen Sie den Akku laden. Siehe „Gerät laden“ auf Seite 13.) Auf der Supportwebsite des Betreibers und im Benutzerhandbuch (verfügbar unter www.samsung.com) sind die grundlegenden Features des Geräts beschrieben, unter anderem das erstmalige Einschalten. Halten Sie die Linsen der vorderen und hinteren Kamera mit einem fusselfreien Lappen sauber. Schmierflecken und Fingerabdrücke entstellen Ihre Bilder. Das Fotolicht der hinteren Kamera befindet sich neben der Linse. Das Aufnehmen von Bildern und Videos wird im Benutzerhandbuch beschrieben. › Infos zum Touchscreen Mit dem Touchscreen des Geräts können Sie ganz einfach Elemente auswählen oder Funktionen durchführen. • Verwenden Sie keine scharfen Gegenstände, um ein Zerkratzen des Touchscreens zu vermeiden. • Achten Sie darauf, dass der Touchscreen nicht mit anderen elektrischen Vorrichtungen in Kontakt kommt. Elektrostatische Entladungen können Fehlfunktionen des Touchscreens verursachen. • Achten Sie darauf, dass der Touchscreen nicht mit Wasser in Kontakt kommt. Durch Feuchtigkeit oder Kontakt mit Wasser können Fehlfunktionen des Touchscreens verursacht werden.12 Gerät und Zubehör • Für die optimale Nutzung des Touchscreens sollten Sie die Schutzfolie vor der Verwendung des Geräts vom Bildschirm entfernen. • Der Touchscreen verfügt über eine Schicht, die geringe elektrische Ladungen erkennt, wie sie vom menschlichen Körper abgegeben werden. Zur Erzielung der optimalen Leistung tippen Sie mit der Fingerspitze auf den Touchscreen. Der Touchscreen reagiert nicht, wenn mit spitzen Gegenständen wie einem Eingabestift oder Bleistift darauf getippt wird. SIM-Karte einsetzen Vor der Nutzung des Geräts müssen Sie eine SIM-Karte einsetzen. 1 Öffnen Sie die Abdeckung des SIM-Karteneinschubs an der Seite des Geräts. 2 Setzen Sie die SIM-Karte ein, und schließen Sie die Abdeckung des SIM-Karteneinschubs.Gerät und Zubehör 13 Gerät laden Das Gerät verfügt über einen eingebauten Akku. Vor der Nutzung des Geräts muss es vollständig geladen werden. • Verwenden Sie nur von Samsung zugelassene Ladegeräte. Nicht zugelassene Ladegeräte können zu explodierenden Akkus bzw. Schäden am Gerät führen. • Wenn der Akku schwach ist, gibt das Gerät einen Warnton aus und zeigt eine entsprechende Warnmeldung auf dem Display an. Außerdem ist das Akkusymbol leer und wird rot angezeigt. Wenn der Akku zu schwach wird, schaltet sich das Gerät automatisch aus. Laden Sie den Akku umgehend auf, um das Gerät weiter nutzen zu können.14 Gerät und Zubehör › Gerät laden 1 Schließen Sie das PC-Datenkabel an den USB-Netzadapter und das andere Ende des PCDatenkabels an die Multifunktionsbuchse an. Falsches Anschließen des Reiseadapters kann zu schweren Schäden am Gerät führen. Schäden durch unsachgemäße Verwendung sind von der Garantie nicht abgedeckt.Gerät und Zubehör 15 2 Stecken Sie den USB-Netzadapter in eine Netzsteckdose. • Sie können das Gerät verwenden, während es geladen wird, dann kann das Aufladen des Akkus jedoch länger dauern. • Während das Gerät aufgeladen wird, kann es vorkommen, dass der Touchscreen und die Touchtasten aufgrund einer instabilen Spannungsversorgung nicht funktionieren. Sollte dies vorkommen, trennen Sie das USB-Netzteil von der Netzsteckdose ab oder trennen Sie das PCDatenkabel vom Gerät ab. • Beim Aufladen kann sich das Gerät erwärmen. Das ist normal und hat keine Auswirkung auf die Lebensdauer des Geräts oder seine Leistungsfähigkeit. • Falls das Gerät nicht richtig lädt, bringen Sie es zusammen mit dem Ladegerät in ein Samsung- Kundendienstzentrum. 3 Wenn das Gerät vollständig geladen ist, trennen Sie es vom Adapter.16 Gerät und Zubehör Gerät ein- und ausschalten Mit der Ein/Aus-Taste schalten Sie das Gerät ein und aus. Ein/Aus-Taste › Gerät einschalten Folgen Sie nach dem erstmaligen Einschalten des Geräts den Bildschirmhinweisen, um es für den Betrieb einzurichten.Gerät und Zubehör 17 › SIM entsperren Falls Sie dreimal die falsche SIM-PIN eingeben, wird die SIM-Karte gesperrt, und Sie können das Gerät nicht verwenden. Sie benötigen einen PUK (PIN Unblocking Key) von Ihrem Betreiber, um die SIM zu entsperren und eine neue PIN festzulegen. › Gerät ausschalten Halten Sie die Taste Ein/Aus gedrückt, und wählen Sie OK aus. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Touchscreen und Menüs finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch.18 Sicherheitshinweise Sicherheitshinweise Lesen Sie die nachstehenden Informationen vollständig durch, bevor Sie das Gerät verwenden, um Verletzungen Ihrer eigenen Person und anderer sowie Schäden am Gerät zu vermeiden. Warnung: Vermeidung von elektrischen Schlägen, Feuer und Explosionen Verwenden Sie keine beschädigten Netzkabel oder Stecker und keine lockeren Netzsteckdosen. Berühren Sie das Netzkabel nicht mit nassen Händen und trennen Sie das Ladegerät nicht durch Ziehen am Kabel ab. Das Netzkabel darf nicht gebogen oder beschädigt werden. Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht während des Ladevorgangs und berühren Sie das Gerät nicht mit nassen Händen. Schließen Sie das Ladegerät und den Akku nicht kurz. Lassen Sie das Ladegerät und den Akku nicht fallen und schützen Sie diese Teile vor Erschütterungen. Laden Sie den Akku nicht mit Ladegeräten, die nicht vom Hersteller zugelassen sind.Sicherheitshinweise 19 Verwenden Sie Ihr Gerät nicht während eines Gewitters. Bei dem Gerät können Fehlfunktionen auftreten und Sie setzen sich einem erhöhten Risiko aus, einen Stromschlag zu erleiden. Verwenden Sie keinen beschädigten oder leckenden Lithium-Ion-Akku (Li-Ion). Wenden Sie sich für die sichere Entsorgung von Li-Ion-Akkus an das nächste Kundendienstzentrum. Behandeln und entsorgen Sie Akkus und Ladegeräte mit Sorgfalt. • Verwenden Sie nur von Samsung zugelassene Akkus und Ladegeräte, die speziell für das Gerät ausgelegt sind. Inkompatible Akkus und Ladegeräte können schwere Verletzungen oder Schäden am Gerät verursachen. • Werfen Sie Akkus oder Geräte niemals ins Feuer. Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Akkus oder Geräte entsprechend den geltenden örtlichen Bestimmungen. • Legen Sie weder Akkus noch das Gerät auf oder in ein Heizgerät wie z.B. eine Mikrowelle, einen Ofen oder einen Heizkörper. Die Akkus können dadurch überhitzen und explodieren! • Zerdrücken oder zerstechen Sie den Akku nicht. Vermeiden Sie es, den Akku hohem Druck auszusetzen, der zu einem internen Kurzschluss und einer Überhitzung führen kann. Schutz von Gerät, Akkus und Ladegeräten vor Beschädigung. • Setzen Sie das Gerät und Akkus nicht sehr niedrigen oder sehr hohen Temperaturen aus. • Extreme Temperaturen können Verformungen des Geräts verursachen und verringern die Ladekapazität und Nutzungsdauer des Geräts und der Akkus. • Verhindern Sie versehentlichen Kontakt der Anschlussklemmen von Akkus mit Metallteilen, da auf diese Weise eine stromführende Verbindung hergestellt werden kann, die zu kurzfristiger oder dauerhafter Beschädigung des Akkus führen kann. • Verwenden Sie niemals ein beschädigtes Ladegerät oder einen beschädigten Akku.20 Sicherheitshinweise Achtung: Befolgen Sie alle Sicherheitswarnungen und Vorschriften bei der Verwendung des Geräts in Bereichen mit eingeschränkter Nutzung. Schalten Sie das Gerät aus, wo seine Verwendung verboten ist. Erfüllen Sie alle Vorschriften, die die Verwendung von Mobilgeräten in bestimmten Bereichen einschränken. Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht in der Nähe anderer elektronischer Geräte. Die meisten elektronischen Geräte arbeiten mit Hochfrequenzsignalen. Dieses Gerät kann andere elektronische Geräte stören. Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht in der Nähe eines Schrittmachers. • Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht innerhalb eines Abstands von 15 cm zu einem Schrittmacher, da dieses Gerät einen Schrittmacher stören kann. • Wenn Sie das Gerät verwenden halten Sie einen Mindestabstand von 15 cm zum Schrittmacher ein. • Um mögliche Störungen eines Schrittmachers zu minimieren, verwenden Sie das Gerät an der gegenüberliegenden Körperseite des Schrittmachers. Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht in einem Krankenhaus oder in der Nähe medizinischer Gerät, die durch Hochfrequenzen gestört werden können. Wenn Sie selbst medizinische Geräte verwenden, wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller dieser Geräte, um die Störfestigkeit dieser Geräte gegenüber Hochfrequenzen zu gewährleisten. Wenn Sie ein Hörgerät verwenden, wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller für Informationen über Funkstörungen. Einige Hörgeräte können durch die Hochfrequenzen dieses Geräts gestört werden. Wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller, um die Sicherheit Ihres Hörgeräts zu gewährleisten.Sicherheitshinweise 21 Schalten Sie das Gerät in explosionsgefährdeten Umgebungen aus. • Befolgen Sie in explosionsgefährdeten Umgebungen immer sämtliche Vorschriften, Anweisungen und Hinweisschilder. • Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht an einer Zapfsäule (Tankstelle), in der Nähe von Treibstoffen, Chemikalien oder in Sprengbereichen. • Lagern und transportieren Sie entzündliche Flüssigkeiten, Gase oder Sprengstoffe nicht am selben Ort, an dem sich das Gerät mit Zubehör befindet. Schalten Sie das Gerät in einem Flugzeug aus. Die Verwendung des Geräts in Flugzeugen ist verboten. Dieses Gerät kann die elektronischen Navigationsinstrumente von Flugzeugen stören. Elektronische Vorrichtungen in Kraftfahrzeugen können durch die Funkfrequenz des Geräts gestört werden. Die elektronischen Vorrichtungen in Ihrem Fahrzeug können durch die Funkfrequenz des Geräts gestört werden. Wenden Sie sich für weitere Informationen an den Hersteller. Richtige Pflege und Nutzung des Mobilgeräts Halten Sie das Gerät trocken. • Feuchtigkeit und Flüssigkeiten aller Art können Teile des Geräts oder elektronische Schaltkreise beschädigen. • Sollte das Gerät nass geworden sein, Schalten Sie das Gerät aus. Trocknen Sie das Gerät mit einem Tuch und bringen Sie es zu einem Kundendienstzentrum. • Durch Flüssigkeit wird die Farbe des Etiketts verändert, das Wasserschäden im Gerät anzeigt. Wasser beschädigt das Gerät und kann zum Erlöschen der Herstellergarantie führen.22 Sicherheitshinweise Bewahren Sie das Gerät nicht an staubigen und schmutzigen Plätzen auf. Durch Staub können Fehlfunktionen des Geräts verursacht werden. Legen Sie das Gerät nicht auf schräge Flächen. Das Gerät kann durch Herunterfallen beschädigt werden. Bewahren Sie das Gerät nicht an heißen oder kalten Plätzen auf. Verwenden Sie das Gerät bei -20 bis 45 °C. • Das Gerät kann explodieren, wenn es in einem geschlossenen Fahrzeug gelassen wird, da die Temperatur in Fahrzeugen bis zu 80 °C erreichen kann. • Setzen Sie das Gerät nicht über längere Zeit direkter Sonnenbestrahlung aus (wie auf dem Armaturenbrett eines Fahrzeugs). • Bewahren Sie den Akku bei -20 bis 45 °C auf. Bewahren Sie das Gerät nicht zusammen mit Metallgegenständen wie Münzen, Schlüssel und Schmuck auf. • Das Gerät kann sich verformen oder Schäden davontragen. • Wenn die Akkukontakte mit Metallgegenständen in Kontakt kommen, kann ein Feuer verursacht werden. Bringen Sie das Gerät nicht in die Nähe magnetischer Felder. • Durch Magnetfelder können Fehlfunktionen des Geräts oder Entladen des Akkus verursacht werden. • Karten mit Magnetstreifen wie Kreditkarten, Telefonkarten, Reisepässe und Bordkarten können durch Magnetfelder beschädigt werden. • Verwenden Sie keine Taschen oder Accessoires mit Magnetverschlüssen und bringen Sie das Gerät nicht für längere Zeit mit magnetischen Feldern in Kontakt.Sicherheitshinweise 23 Bewahren Sie das Gerät nicht in der Nähe von Heizungen, Mikrowellengeräten, Kochvorrichtungen oder Hochdruckbehältern auf. • Der Akku kann undicht werden. • Das Gerät kann sich überhitzen und ein Feuer verursachen. Lassen Sie das Gerät nicht fallen und setzen Sie es keinen Erschütterungen aus. • Der Bildschirm des Geräts kann beschädigt werden. • Durch Biegen oder Verformen können das Gerät oder Teile davon beschädigt werden. Verwenden Sie keinen Blitz nahe der Augen von Menschen oder Tieren. Durch Verwenden eines Blitzes in der Nähe von Augen können ein vorübergehender Sichtverlust oder Schäden an den Augen verursacht werden. Gewährleistung der maximale Nutzungsdauer des Akkus und des Ladegeräts. • Lassen Sie einen Akku nie länger als eine Woche am Ladegerät, da ein Überladen die Lebensdauer des Akkus verkürzt. • Mit der Zeit entladen sich unbenutzte Akkus und müssen vor Gebrauch erneut geladen werden. • Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Akku erst nach mehrmaligem, vollständigem Entladen und Laden die volle Kapazität erreicht. • Trennen Sie Ladegeräte von der Stromquelle, wenn sie nicht verwendet werden. • Verwenden Sie die Akkus nur für den vorgesehenen Zweck. Verwenden Sie nur vom Hersteller zugelassene Akkus, Ladegeräte, Zubehör und Teile. • Die Verwendung von Akkus oder Ladegeräten von Drittanbietern kann die Nutzungsdauer des Geräts verkürzen oder Fehlfunktionen verursachen. • Samsung ist nicht haftbar für die Sicherheit des Benutzers, wenn Zubehör und Teile verwendet werden, die nicht von Samsung zugelassen sind.24 Sicherheitshinweise Nicht auf das Gerät oder den Akku beißen oder daran saugen • Dadurch kann das Gerät beschädigt oder eine Explosion verursacht werden. • Wenn das Gerät von Kindern benutzt wird, achten Sie auf die sachgemäße Verwendung. Bei der Verwendung des Geräts: • Sprechen Sie direkt in das Mikrofon. • Vermeiden Sie Kontakt mit der eingebauten Antenne des Geräts. Das Berühren der Antenne führt möglicherweise zur Übertragung von mehr hochfrequenter Strahlung als erforderlich. • Halten Sie das Gerät entspannt, drücken Sie die Tasten nur leicht, verwenden Sie Spezialfunktionen, die die Anzahl der zu betätigenden Tasten verringern (wie z. B. Texterkennung), und machen Sie regelmäßig Pausen. Schützen Sie Ihr Gehör • Durch laute Töne über längere Zeit können Gehörschäden verursacht werden. • Laute Töne beim Lenken eines Fahrzeugs können Sie ablenken und einen Unfall verursachen. • Verringern Sie vor dem Anschließen der Ohrhörer an eine Audioquelle immer die Lautstärke und verwenden Sie nur die minimale Lautstärkeneinstellung, die zum Hören des Gesprächs oder der Musik erforderlich ist. Geben Sie Obacht, wenn Sie das Gerät beim Gehen oder Laufen verwenden. Achten Sie immer auf Ihre Umgebung, um sich und andere nicht zu verletzen. Tragen Sie das Gerät nicht in der Gesäßtasche oder an der Hüfte. Sie können sich verletzen oder das Gerät beschädigen, wenn Sie fallen.Sicherheitshinweise 25 Zerlegen, modifizieren oder reparieren Sie das Gerät nicht. • Veränderungen oder Modifizierungen am Gerät können zum Erlöschen der Herstellergarantie führen. Lassen Sie das Gerät in einem Samsung-Kundendienstzentrum warten. • Bauen Sie den Akku nicht auseinander und stechen Sie nicht hinein, weil dadurch eine Explosion oder ein Feuer verursacht werden können. Das Gerät weder mit Farbe anmalen noch mit Aufklebern bekleben. Farbe und Aufkleber können bewegliche Teile verstopfen oder behindern und dadurch den ordnungsgemäßen Betrieb Ihres Geräts verhindern. Falls Sie auf die Farbe oder Metallteile dieses Produkts allergisch reagieren, kann dies bei Ihnen eventuell Juckreiz, Ausschläge oder Hautschwellungen verursachen. Nutzen Sie das Produkt in diesem Fall keinesfalls weiter und suchen Sie umgehend einen Arzt auf. Reinigung des Geräts: • Reinigen Sie das Gerät und das Ladegerät mit einem Tuch oder einem Radiergummi. • Verwenden Sie keine Chemikalien oder Lösungsmittel. Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht, wenn das Display gesprungen oder zerbrochen ist. Zerbrochenes Glas oder Kunststoff kann Verletzungen an Händen und Gesicht verursachen. Lassen Sie das Gerät von einem Samsung-Kundendienstzentrum reparieren. Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht für andere als die vorgesehenen Zwecke. Stören Sie nicht andere, wenn Sie das Gerät in der Öffentlichkeit verwenden. Lassen Sie das Gerät nicht von Kindern verwenden. Ihr Gerät ist kein Spielzeug. Lassen Sie keine Kinder damit spielen, da diese sich selbst und andere verletzen bzw. das Gerät beschädigen könnten.26 Sicherheitshinweise Installieren Sie Mobilgeräte und Ausrüstung mit Sorgfalt. • Stellen Sie sicher, dass alle Mobilgeräte oder zugehörige Ausrüstung, die in Ihrem Fahrzeug eingebaut ist, sicher befestigt sind. • Legen Sie das Gerät und Zubehör nicht in der Nähe oder im Aktionsbereich eines Airbags ab. Bei unsachgemäß eingebauten Mobilgeräten können durch sich schnell aufblasende Airbags schwere Verletzungen herbeigeführt werden. Mobilgeräte dürfen nur von ausgebildetem Fachpersonal gewartet und repariert werden. Kundendienst durch nicht entsprechend ausgebildetes Personal kann das Gerät beschädigen und zum Erlöschen der Herstellergarantie führen. Behandeln Sie SIM-Karten mit Sorgfalt. • Entfernen Sie niemals eine Speicherkarte aus dem Gerät, während Daten auf der Karte gelesen oder gespeichert werden. Anderenfalls kann es zu Datenverlusten und/oder Schäden an der Karte oder am Gerät kommen. • Schützen Sie die Karten vor starken Erschütterungen, statischer Entladung und elektrischer Störung durch andere Geräte. • Berühren Sie die goldfarbenen Kontakte von Speicherkarten nicht mit Ihren Fingern oder mit metallischen Gegenständen. Wenn die Kontakte verschmutzt sind, reinigen Sie sie mit einem weichen Tuch. Sichern Sie alle wichtigen Daten. Samsung übernimmt keinerlei Haftung oder Verantwortung für Datenverluste.Sicherheitshinweise 27 Verbreiten Sie keine urheberrechtlich geschützten Materialien Verbreiten Sie keine urheberrechtlich geschützten Materialien, die Sie ohne Erlaubnis der Eigentümer des Inhalts für andere aufgenommen haben. Dies stellt einen Verstoß gegen die Urheberrechtsgesetze dar. Der Hersteller haftet nicht für rechtliche Probleme, die durch die illegale Nutzung urheberrechtlich geschützter Materialien durch den Benutzer verursacht werden. Informationen zur SAR-Zertifizierung (Spezifische Absorptionsrate) Ihr Gerät entspricht den Normen der Europäischen Union (EU), die Grenzwerte für die Belastung durch elektromagnetische Funkwellen (HF) von Radio- und Telekommunikationsausrüstung vorgeben. Diese Standards verbieten den Verkauf von Mobilgeräten, die eine maximale Belastungsrate (auch Specific Absorption Rate oder SAR genannt) von 2,0 W/kg überschreiten. Bei Tests wurde eine maximale SAR von 0,939 W/kg für dieses Modell ermittelt. Bei normalem Gebrauch ist der tatsächliche SAR-Wert wahrscheinlich erheblich niedriger, da das Gerät so ausgelegt ist, dass nur die für die Übertragung zur nächsten Basisstation erforderliche HF-Energie abgestrahlt wird. Durch das automatische Senden bei möglichst niedrigen SARWerten wird Ihre Gesamtbelastung durch HF-Energie verringert. Die Konformitätserklärung auf der Rückseite dieses Handbuchs bestätigt die Konformität dieses Geräts mit der europäischen Richtlinie über Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationseinrichtungen (R&TTE – Radio & Terminal Telecommunications Equipment). Wenn Sie dieses Produkt am Körper tragen oder benutzen, müssen Sie damit gemäß der RF Strahlenschutzrichtlinie stets einen Mindestabstand von 5 mm zu Ihrem Körper einhalten.28 Sicherheitshinweise Korrekte Entsorgung von Altgeräten (Elektroschrott) (In den Ländern der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen Ländern mit einem separaten Sammelsystem) Die Kennzeichnung auf dem Produkt, Zubehörteilen bzw. auf der dazugehörigen Dokumentation gibt an, dass das Produkt und Zubehörteile (z.B. Ladegerät, Kopfhörer, USB-Kabel) nach ihrer Lebensdauer nicht zusammen mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden dürfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät und Zubehörteile bitte getrennt von anderen Abfällen, um der Umwelt bzw. der menschlichen Gesundheit nicht durch unkontrollierte Müllbeseitigung zu schaden. Helfen Sie mit, das Altgerät und Zubehörteile fachgerecht zu entsorgen, um die nachhaltige Wiederverwertung von stofflichen Ressourcen zu fördern. Private Nutzer wenden sich an den Händler, bei dem das Produkt gekauft wurde, oder kontaktieren die zuständigen Behörden, um in Erfahrung zu bringen, wo Sie das Altgerät bzw. Zubehörteile für eine umweltfreundliche Entsorgung abgeben können. Gewerbliche Nutzer wenden sich an ihren Lieferanten und gehen nach den Bedingungen des Verkaufsvertrags vor. Dieses Produkt und elektronische Zubehörteile dürfen nicht zusammen mit anderem Gewerbemüll entsorgt werden.Sicherheitshinweise 29 Korrekte Entsorgung des Akkus dieses Produkts (In den Ländern der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen Ländern mit einem separaten Altbatterie-Rücknahmesystem) Die Kennzeichnung auf dem Akku bzw. auf der dazugehörigen Dokumentation oder Verpackung gibt an, dass der Akku zu diesem Produkt nach seiner Lebensdauer nicht zusammen mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden darf. Wenn der Akku mit den chemischen Symbolen Hg, Cd oder Pb gekennzeichnet ist, liegt der Quecksilber-, Cadmium- oder Blei-Gehalt der Akku über den in der EG-Richtlinie 2006/66 festgelegten Referenzwerten. Wenn Akkus nicht ordnungsgemäß entsorgt werden, können sie der menschlichen Gesundheit bzw. der Umwelt schaden. Bitte helfen Sie, die natürlichen Ressourcen zu schützen und die nachhaltige Wiederverwertung von stofflichen Ressourcen zu fördern, indem Sie die Akkus von anderen Abfällen getrennt über Ihr örtliches kostenloses AltbatterieRücknahmesystem entsorgen. Der Akku in diesem Produkt ist nicht austauschbar. Für weitere Informationen bezüglich eines Akkuaustauschs kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihren Netzanbieter oder Verkäufer.30 Sicherheitshinweise Haftungsausschlussklausel Bestimmte Inhalte und Dienste, die durch dieses Gerät zugänglich sind, sind Eigentum von Dritten und durch Urheberrechts-, Patent-, Markenrechts- und/oder andere Gesetze zum Schutz von geistigem Eigentum geschützt. Derartige Inhalte und Dienste werden ausschließlich für Ihre persönliche, nichtkommerzielle Nutzung bereitgestellt. Sie dürfen keine Inhalte oder Dienste in einer Weise nutzen, die nicht durch den Eigentümer der Inhalte oder den Dienstanbieter genehmigt wurde. Ohne das Vorstehende einzuschränken, dürfen Sie keine Inhalte oder Dienste, die durch dieses Gerät angezeigt werden, modifizieren, kopieren, erneut veröffentlichen, hochladen, zur Verfügung stellen, übertragen, übersetzen, verkaufen, damit abgeleitete Werke schaffen oder in irgendeiner Weise oder auf irgendeinem Medium verteilen, außer wenn Sie dazu ausdrücklich durch den jeweiligen Eigentümer der Inhalte oder Dienstanbieter autorisiert wurden. “DIE INHALTE UND DIENSTE DRITTER WERDEN OHNE MÄNGELGEWÄHR BEREITGESTELLT. SAMSUNG ÜBERNIMMT KEINE HAFTUNG FÜR DERART BEREITGESTELLTE INHALTE ODER DIENSTE, WEDER AUSDRÜCKLICH NOCH IMPLIZIT, FÜR KEINE ZWECKE. SAMSUNG WEIST AUSDRÜCKLICH JEGLICHE IMPLIZITE GARANTIEN ZURÜCK, EINSCHLIESSLICH, ABER NICHT BESCHRÄNKT AUF, GARANTIEN DER MARKTFÄHIGKEIT ODER EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK. SAMSUNG ÜBERNIMMT KEINE GARANTIE FÜR DIE FEHLERFREIHEIT, GÜLTIGKEIT, RECHTZEITIGKEIT, RECHTMÄSSIGKEIT ODER VOLLSTÄNDIGKEIT VON IRGENDWELCHEN INHALTEN ODER DIENSTEN, DIE DURCH DIESES GERÄT VERFÜGBAR GEMACHT WERDEN, UND UNTER KEINEN UMSTÄNDEN, EINSCHLIESSLICH VON FAHRLÄSSIGKEIT, IST SAMSUNG HAFTBAR, WEDER AUS VERTRAG NOCH AUS UNERLAUBTER HANDLUNG, FÜR IRGENDWELCHE DIREKTE, INDIREKTE, NEBEN-, BESONDERE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN, ANWALTSGEBÜHREN, KOSTEN ODER IRGENDWELCHE ANDERE SCHÄDEN, DIE AUS ODER IN VERBINDUNG MIT IRGENDWELCHEN DARIN ENTHALTENEN INFORMATIONEN ODER ALS EIN ERGEBNIS DER VERWENDUNG IRGENDWELCHER INHALTE ODER DIENSTE DURCH SIE ODER DRITTE ENTSTEHEN, SELBST WENN SAMSUNG AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DERARTIGER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE”. Sicherheitshinweise 31 Dienste Dritter können jederzeit beendet oder unterbrochen werden, und Samsung gibt keine Erklärung ab und übernimmt keine Garantie, dass irgendwelche Inhalte oder Dienste für irgendeine Zeitdauer verfügbar bleiben werden. Inhalte und Dienste werden von Dritten mit der Hilfe von Netzen und Übertragungseinrichtungen übertragen, über die Samsung keine Kontrolle hat. Ohne die Allgemeingültigkeit dieser Haftungsausschlussklausel einzuschränken, weist Samsung ausdrücklich jegliche Verantwortung oder Haftung für irgendwelche Unterbrechungen oder Aussetzungen von irgendwelchen Inhalten oder Diensten, die durch dieses Gerät verfügbar gemacht werden, zurück. Samsung ist weder verantwortlich noch haftbar für Kundendienste, die zu den Inhalten und Diensten in Beziehung stehen. Jegliche Fragen oder Anforderungen nach Diensten, die zu den Inhalten oder Diensten in Beziehung stehen, sind direkt an die jeweiligen Inhalts- und Dienstanbieter zu richten.Das in Abschnitt 10 genannte Verfahren für die Feststellung der Konformität, das im Anhang [IV] der Richtlinie 1999/5/ EC beschrieben wird, wurde unter Beteiligung der benannten Stelle(n) durchgeführt: BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK* Kennzeichen: 0168 Die technische Dokumentation wird unter folgender Anschrift geführt: Samsung Electronics QA Lab. und kann auf Anfrage eingesehen werden. (Vertreter in der EU) Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK* 2011. 02. 14 Joong-Hoon Choi / Lab Manager (Ort und Datum) (Name und Unterschrift der/des Bevollmächtigten) * Dies ist nicht die Adresse des Samsung-Kundendienstzentrums. Die Adresse oder Telefonnummer des Samsung-Kundendienstzentrums finden Sie auf der Garantiekarte oder erfahren Sie von dem Geschäft, in dem Sie das Produkt erworben haben. Konformitätserklärung (Funkanlagen und elekommunikationsendeinrichtungen) Wir, Samsung Electronics erklären unter unserer alleinigen Verantwortung, dass dem Produkt GSM-WCDMA-Wi-Fi-Mobilgerät : GT-P7100 die Konformität mit den folgenden Normen und/oder anderen normgebenden Dokumenten bescheinigt wird: Sicherheit EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A11 : 2009 SAR EN 50371 : 2002 EN 62311 : 2008 IEC 62209-2 : 2010 Empfehlung des Rates 1999/519/EC EMV EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008) EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005) EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009) EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007) EN 55022 : 2006 + A1 : 2007 EN 55024 : 1998 + A1 : 2001 + A2 : 2003 Funk EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003) EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006) EN 300 440-1 V1.5.1 (2009-03) EN 300 440-2 V1.3.1 (2009-03) EN 301 908-1 V4.2.1 (2010-03) EN 301 908-2 V4.2.1 (2010-03) EN 301 893 V1.5.1 (2008-12) Hiermit erklären wir, dass alle wesentlichen Funktestreihen ausgeführt wurden und dass das oben genannte Produkt allen wesentlichen Anforderungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EC entspricht.Printed in Korea GH68-33615A www.samsung.com German. 03/2011. Rev. 1.0 Einige der Inhalte in diesem Handbuch können sich von Ihrem Gerät unterscheiden, dies ist abhängig von der Software oder dem Dienstanbieter. P7100 Guide de prise en main rapide2 Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi Nous vous remercions de la confiance que vous nous accordez en achetant ce SmartPad Samsung. Ce SmartPad vous permettra d’accéder à des outils de communication et de divertissement exceptionnels, basés sur les critères de qualité et sur la technologie innovante de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et caractéristiques de votre SmartPad. A lire avant toute utilisation • Veuillez lire attentivement ce guide avant d’utiliser votre SmartPad, afin de l’utiliser en toute sécurité. • Les instructions et descriptions mentionnées dans ce guide sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre SmartPad. • Les illustrations utilisées dans ce guide peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit. • Le contenu de ce guide peut différer en fonction du produit et de la version logicielle fournie par votre opérateur et peut faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d’emploi, rendez-vous sur le site www.samsung.com. • Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier en fonction de la version logicielle ou de l’opérateur. • La mise en forme et la distribution de ce guide sont basées sur les systèmes d’exploitation Android et peuvent varier en fonction du système d’exploitation de l’utilisateur.Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 3 • Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre région ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung n’est pas responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des tiers. • Samsung n’est pas responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. • Les sons, fonds d’écran et images fournies dans ce SmartPad sont sous licence pour une utilisation limitée entre Samsung et leurs propriétaires respectifs. Extraire et utiliser ces supports à des fins commerciales ou autres constitue une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Samsung n’est pas responsable des infractions sur les droits d’auteur commises par l’utilisateur. • Veuillez conserver ce guide pour pouvoir l’utiliser ultérieurement. Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics Ce guide est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics.4 Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi Marques déposées • SAMSUNG, et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées et enregistrées de Samsung Electronics. • Google, le logo Google, Android et le logo Android sont des marques de Google Inc. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées de Oracle et/ou de ses filiales. Les autres marques sont déposées et demeurent la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. • Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Toutes les autres marques déposées et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs.Sommaire 5 Sommaire Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires ..................................................... 6 Contenu du coffret ............................................................................................................. 7 Présentation du SmartPad ............................................................................................... 8 Insérer de la carte SIM .................................................................................................... 11 Mettre la batterie en charge ......................................................................................... 12 Allumer le SmartPad ....................................................................................................... 15 Consignes de sécurité ......................................................................... 176 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires Votre SmartPad GALAXY Tab 10.1v™ est fourni avec plusieurs accessoires, notamment un casque, un câble de connexion PC et un chargeur. Ce guide vous permettra de découvrir les différents composants de votre SmartPad, la façon dont vous pourrez installer et recharger la batterie et allumer et éteindre votre SmartPad. Pour obtenir des informations détaillées, consultez le site www.samsung.com. Contenu de cette section Contenu du coffret - page 7 Présentation du SmartPad - page 8 Insérer de la carte SIM - page 11 Mettre la batterie en charge - page 12 Allumer le SmartPad - page 15Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires 7 Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents: • SmartPad • Adaptateur secteur USB • Câble de connexion • Kit piéton • Guide de prise en main rapide • Les éléments fournis avec votre SmartPad peuvent varier en fonction des logiciels et accessoires disponibles dans votre zone géographique ou proposés par votre opérateur. • Vous pouvez acquérir d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. • Les accessoires fournis sont spécialement conçus pour votre SmartPad. • Il est possible que certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, ne soient pas compatibles avec votre SmartPad.8 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires Présentation du SmartPad Touche marche/arrêt Prise audio de 3,5 mm Haut-parleur Capteur de luminosité Écran tactile Connecteur à fonctions multiples Objectif avant Témoin lumineuxVotre SmartPad et ses accessoires 9 Touche de volume Microphone Flash de l’appareil photo Antenne interne Objectif photo arrière Compartiment pour carte SIM Haut-parleur10 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires Vous devez recharger la batterie avant d’utiliser le SmartPad pour la première fois. (Reportez-vous à la section « Mettre la batterie en charge » à la page 12.) Le site d’assistance de votre fournisseur d’accès Internet et le mode d’emploi (disponible sur www.samsung.com) vous permettront de découvrir comment allumer votre SmartPad et vous fourniront une description des autres fonctions de base de votre SmartPad. Veillez à ce que les objectifs avant et arrière de l’appareil photo soient toujours propres en les nettoyant avec un chiffon doux. Les tâches et les empreintes de doigt risquent de réduire la qualité des photos. Le flash de l’appareil photo arrière se trouve à côté de l’objectif. La prise de photos et l’enregistrement de vidéos sont décrits dans le Mode d’emploi. › À propos de l’écran tactile L’écran tactile de votre SmartPad facilite la sélection des éléments et des fonctions. Découvrez les manipulations de base relatives à l’utilisation de l’écran tactile. • N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus afin de ne pas rayer l’écran. • Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Pour un fonctionnement optimal de l’écran tactile, retirez le film de protection avant d’utiliser votre SmartPad.Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires 11 • Votre écran tactile comporte une couche qui détecte les petites charges électriques émises par le corps humain. Pour de meilleures performances, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec le bout de votre doigt. L’écran tactile ne réagira pas si vous utilisez des outils pointus, stylet ou stylo par exemple. Insérer de la carte SIM Vous devez insérer une carte SIM avant d’utiliser le SamrtPad. 1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment pour carte SIM situé sur le côté du SmartPad. 2 Insérez la carte SIM, puis fermez le cache du compartiment.12 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires Mettre la batterie en charge Votre SmartPad dispose d’une batterie interne non amovible. Avant de pouvoir utiliser votre SmartPad, vous devez l’avoir rechargé complètement. • Utilisez exclusivement un chargeur homologué par Samsung. L’utilisation d’un chargeur non homologué peut provoquer l’explosion de la batterie ou endommager votre SmartPad. • Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, le SmartPad émet un signal sonore et affiche un message d’avertissement. L’icône de batterie est alors vide et clignote. Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est vraiment insuffisant, le SmartPad s’éteint automatiquement. Rechargez la batterie pour remettre le SmartPad en marche.Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires 13 › Recharger le SmartPad 1 Branchez la fiche USB du câble de connexion sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis branchez l’autre fiche sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples du SmartPad. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager le SmartPad. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.14 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires 2 Branchez l’adaptateur secteur USB sur une prise de courant. • Vous pouvez utiliser le SmartPad lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Dans ce cas, il est possible que le rechargement complet de la batterie prenne plus de temps. • Lorsque le SmartPad est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison d’une alimentation électrique instable. Dans ce cas, débranchez l’adaptateur secteur USB de la prise de courant ou débranchez le câble de connexion du SmartPad. • Il est possible que le SmartPad chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de rechargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ni les performances du SmartPad. • Si votre SmartPad ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. 3 Lorsque le SmartPad est complètement chargé, débranchez-le du chargeur.Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires 15 Allumer le SmartPad La touche marche/arrêt permet d’allumer et d’éteindre le SmartPad. Touche marche/ arrêt › Allumer l’appareil Si vous allumez votre SmartPad pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour le configurer.16 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires › Débloquer une carte SIM Si vous saisissez un code PIN de déverrouillage de la carte SIM incorrect à trois reprises, la carte SIM est bloquée et vous ne pouvez alors pas utiliser votre SmartPad. Il vous faut alors obtenir une clé de déverrouillage du code PIN (PUK) auprès de votre opérateur pour débloquer la carte SIM et définir un nouveau code PIN. › Eteindre le SmartPad Maintenez la touche marche/arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour plus d’informations sur l’utilisation de l’écran tactile et des menus, reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi.Consignes de sécurité 17 Consignes de sécurité Afin d’éviter de blesser votre entourage ou vous-même, ou bien d’endommager votre SmartPad, veuillez lire toutes les informations suivantes avant d’utiliser votre SmartPad. Avertissement : Évitez les chocs électriques, le feu et les explosions N’utilisez pas de prises et de cordons d’alimentation endommagé(e)s ou de prises électriques mal fixées Ne touchez pas le cordon d’alimentation lorsque vos mains sont mouillées et ne tirez pas sur le chargeur pour le débrancher Ne tordez pas ou n’endommagez pas le cordon d’alimentation N’utilisez et ne touchez pas votre SmartPad avec les mains mouillées lorsque celui-ci est en cours de chargement Ne provoquez pas de court-circuit avec le chargeur ou la batterie Ne laissez pas tomber le chargeur ou la batterie et ne les exposez pas aux chocs Ne rechargez pas la batterie en utilisant un chargeur non homologué par Samsung N’utilisez pas votre SmartPad pendant un orage Le SmartPad peut mal fonctionner et les risques de choc électrique peuvent augmenter.18 Consignes de sécurité Ne manipulez pas la batterie Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) lorsque celle-ci coule ou est endommagée Contactez le centre de traitement agréé le plus proche de chez vous afin de vous séparer de vos batteries Li-Ion en toute sécurité. Manipulez et jetez les batteries et les chargeurs avec précaution • N’utilisez que les batteries et les chargeurs homologués par Samsung et spécialement conçus pour votre SmartPad. L’utilisation de batteries et de chargeurs incompatibles peut provoquer des blessures graves ou endommager votre SmartPad. • Ne jetez jamais une batterie ou un SmartPad au feu. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur dans votre pays concernant l’élimination des batteries et des appareils mobiles usagé(e)s. • Ne posez jamais une batterie ou un SmartPad à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’appareils chauffants, tels que des fours à micro-ondes, des cuisinières ou des radiateurs. En cas de surchauffe, la batterie peut exploser. • N’écrasez ou ne perforez jamais la batterie. Évitez d’exposer la batterie à une pression externe élevée qui risquerait d’entraîner un court-circuit interne et une surchauffe. Protégez le SmartPad, la batterie et le chargeur contre toute détérioration • Évitez d’exposer votre SmartPad et la batterie à des températures très basses ou très élevées. • Des températures extrêmes peuvent déformer le SmartPad et réduire la capacité de chargement, ainsi que sa durée de vie et celle de la batterie. • Évitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car cela risquerait de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et – de la batterie et de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente. • N’utilisez jamais une batterie ou un chargeur endommagé(e).Consignes de sécurité 19 Attention : Respectez tous les avertissements de sécurité et les réglementations en vigueur lorsque vous utilisez votre SmartPad dans un endroit où son utilisation est réglementée Éteignez votre SmartPad lorsque son utilisation est interdite Respectez toutes les réglementations interdisant l’utilisation des appareils mobiles dans certaines zones spécifiques. N’utilisez pas votre SmartPad à proximité d’autres appareils électroniques La plupart des appareils électroniques utilisent des signaux de radiofréquence radiofréquence. Il est possible que votre SmartPad cause des interférences avec d’autres appareils électroniques. N’utilisez pas votre SmartPad à proximité d’un stimulateur cardiaque • Maintenez une distance minimale de 15 cm entre votre SmartPad et le stimulateur cardiaque pour éviter toute interférence. • Il est fortement conseillé, lors d’un appel, de positionner le SmartPad sur le côté opposé à l’implant. • Si vous pensez que votre SmartPad vient perturber le fonctionnement d’un stimulateur cardiaque ou d’un appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur ou de l’appareil médical. N’utilisez pas votre SmartPad dans un hôpital ou à proximité d’équipements médicaux en raison des interférences qu’il pourrait produire Si vous utilisez vous-même des équipements médicaux, contactez votre fabriquant afin d’éviter toute interférence de radiofréquence.20 Consignes de sécurité Si vous utilisez un appareil auditif, contactez votre fabriquant afin d’obtenir plus d’informations sur les interférences Il est possible que certains appareils auditifs subissent des interférences causées par la radiofréquence de votre SmartPad. Afin de vous assurer d’une utilisation de votre appareil auditif en toute sécurité, contactez votre fabriquant. Éteignez le SmartPad dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion • Respectez toujours les consignes, les instructions et la signalétique d’utilisation dans un environnement explosif. • N’utilisez pas votre SmartPad dans une station-service, dans les zones potentiellement explosives ou à proximité de produits combustibles ou chimiques. • Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même habitacle que le SmartPad, ses composants ou ses accessoires. Éteignez votre SmartPad lorsque vous voyagez en avion Les SmartPads peuvent engendrer des interférences avec les équipements aéronautiques. Conformez-vous aux réglementations en vigueur et éteignez votre SmartPad. Il est possible que les appareils électroniques se trouvant à bord d’un véhicule motorisé subissent des dysfonctionnements provoqués par la radiofréquence de votre propre SmartPadConsignes de sécurité 21 Pour entretenir et bien utiliser votre SmartPad Conservez votre SmartPad au sec • L’humidité et tous types de liquides peuvent endommager les pièces ou les circuits éléctroniques de votre SmartPad. • En cas de contact avec un liquide, retirez la batterie sans allumer votre SmartPad. Séchez votre SmartPad avec un chiffon et confiez-le à un service de réparation. • Les liquides modifient la couleur de l’étiquette indiquant que l’intérieur du SmartPad a été endommagé. L’eau peut endommager votre SmartPad et entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant. N’utilisez pas ou ne rangez pas votre SmartPad dans des endroits poussiéreux ou sales La poussière peut causer des dysfonctionnements de votre SmartPad. Ne posez pas votre SmartPad sur des surfaces inclinées Si votre SmartPad tombe, il peut être endommagé. Ne conservez pas votre SmartPad dans des endroits chauds ou froids. Utilisez votre SmartPad à des températures comprises entre -20° C et 45° C • Votre SmartPad peut exploser si vous le laissez dans un véhicule fermé, la température intérieure pouvant monter jusqu’à 80°C. • N’exposez pas votre SmartPad à la lumière directe du soleil de manière prolongée (comme par exemple sur le tableau de bord d’une voiture). • Conservez la batterie à des températures allant de -20°C à 45°C.22 Consignes de sécurité Ne conservez pas votre SmartPad à proximité d’objets métalliques, comme par exemple des pièces, des clés ou des colliers • Votre SmartPad pourrait être déformé ou subir des dysfonctionnements. • Les bornes de la batterie peuvent causer des incendies si elles sont mises en contact avec des objets métalliques. Ne conservez pas votre SmartPad à proximité de champs magnétiques • Lorsqu’il est exposé à des champs magnétiques, votre SmartPad peut subir des dysfonctionnements ou la batterie peut se décharger. • Les cartes à piste, comme par exemple les cartes de crédit, les cartes de téléphone et les cartes d’embarquement peuvent être endommagées par des champs magnétiques. • N’utilisez pas de housses ou d’accessoires équipés de fermetures aimantées et évitez toute exposition prolongée de votre SmartPad à des champs magnétiques. Ne conservez pas votre SmartPad à proximité ou à l’intérieur de radiateurs, de fours à microondes, d’équipements de cuisine chauffants ou de conteneurs à haute pression • La batterie peut couler. • Votre SmartPad peut surchauffer et causer un incendie. Ne laissez pas tomber votre SmartPad et ne l’exposez pas aux chocs • L’écran de votre SmartPad pourrait être endommagé. • Votre SmartPad peut être endommagé ou certaines pièces peuvent subir des dysfonctionnements si vous le tordez ou le déformez. N’utilisez pas le flash de l’appareil photo trop près des yeux de personnes ou d’animaux Utiliser un flash à proximité des yeux peut causer des lésions oculaires ou une perte temporaire de la vue.Consignes de sécurité 23 Préservez la durée de vie de la batterie et du chargeur • Ne laissez pas la batterie en charge pendant plus d’une semaine, car une surcharge risque de réduire sa durée de vie. • Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit être rechargée avant utilisation. • Lorsque le chargeur n’est pas utilisé, ne le laissez pas branché à une prise de courant. • Utilisez la batterie pour votre SmartPad uniquement. N’utilisez que des batteries, chargeurs, accessoires et fournitures homologué(e)s par Samsung • Utiliser des batteries ou des chargeurs génériques peut réduire la durée de vie de votre SmartPad ou provoquer des dysfonctionnements. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la sécurité de l’utilisateur si celui-ci utilise des accessoires ou des éléments non homologués par Samsung. Ne mordez et ne portez pas à votre bouche le SmartPad ou la batterie • Mordre ou porter le SmartPad ou la batterie à votre bouche pourrait endommager votre SmartPad ou provoquer une explosion. • Assurez-vous que les enfants manipulent le SmartPad de façon appropriée s’ils doivent l’utiliser. Lors de l’utilisation du SmartPad: • Parlez directement dans le microphone. • Évitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne de votre SmartPad. Le fait de toucher l’antenne peut entraîner la transmission par l’appareil d’un nombre de fréquences radio plus important que nécessaire. • Tenez le SmartPad de façon décontractée, appuyez légèrement sur les touches, utilisez des fonctions spéciales afin de réduire le nombre de touches sur lesquelles vous devez appuyer (telle que la fonction de saisie prédictive) et prenez des pauses fréquentes.24 Consignes de sécurité Restez prudent lorsque vous utilisez votre SmartPad en marchant ou en bougeant Restez toujours conscient de votre environnement afin d’éviter de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes. Ne placez pas votre SmartPad dans vos poches arrières ou à votre ceinture Vous pouvez être blessé ou endommager votre SmartPad si vous tombez. Ne démontez pas, ne modifiez pas ou ne réparez pas vous-même votre SmartPad • Toute modification ou tout changement effectué(e) sur votre SmartPad peut entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant. Pour tout besoin de service, confiez votre SmartPad à un service après-vente Samsung. • Ne démontez pas ou ne perforez pas la batterie, car ceci peut causer une explosion ou un incendie. Ne peignez jamais votre SmartPad et n’y apposez jamais d’autocollants La peinture et les autocollants risquent de bloquer les pièces mobiles du SmartPad et perturber son fonctionnement. Si vous êtes allergique à la peinture ou aux pièces métalliques du SmartPad, vous pouvez souffrir de démangeaisons, d’eczéma ou de boursouflures de la peau. Si ces symptômes apparaissent, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser le SmartPad et consultez un médecin. Lors du nettoyage de votre SmartPad : • Essuyez votre SmartPad ou le chargeur avec un chiffon ou une gomme. • N’utilisez pas de produits chimiques ou de détergents. N’utilisez pas le SmartPad si son écran est fissuré ou cassé Le verre ou l’acrylique brisé risque de vous blesser à la main ou au visage. Confiez votre SmartPad à un service après-vente Samsung afin de le faire réparer.Consignes de sécurité 25 Utilisez votre SmartPad uniquement pour vous servir des fonctions auxquelles il est destiné Évitez de déranger votre entourage lorsque vous utilisez votre SmartPad dans un lieu public Ne laissez pas les enfants utiliser votre SmartPad Votre SmartPad n’est pas un jouet. Ne laissez pas les enfants jouer avec, car ils pourraient se blesser ou blesser d’autres personnes et endommager le SmartPad. Installez le SmartPad et ses accessoires avec précaution • Veillez à la bonne fixation de votre SmartPad et de ses accessoires dans votre véhicule. • Évitez de placer votre SmartPad ou ses accessoires à proximité de la zone d’ouverture des airbags. Si l’équipement mobile n’est pas installé correctement, le déclenchement de l’airbag risque de provoquer des blessures graves. Toute réparation doit être réalisée par un technicien agréé Le recours aux services d’un technicien non agréé risque d’entraîner des dégâts sur le SmartPad et d’annuler la garantie du fabricant.26 Consignes de sécurité Manipuler les cartes SIM avec soin • Ne retirez pas une carte lorsque le SmartPad y enregistre ou y lit des informations, car vous risqueriez de perdre des données et/ou d’endommager la carte ou le SmartPad lui-même. • Protégez les cartes contre les chocs violents, les décharges électrostatiques et les interférences émises par d’autres appareils. • Ne touchez pas les contacts dorés de la carte avec vos doigts ou avec des objets métalliques. Si la carte est sale, nettoyezla avec un chiffon doux. Veillez à sauvegarder les données importantes Samsung ne sera en aucun cas tenu responsable en cas de perte de données. Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur que vous avez enregistrés sans la permission des détenteurs de ces droits. Dans le cas contraire, vous seriez en infraction avec la législation sur les droits d’auteur. Le fabricant n’est en aucun cas responsable de l’utilisation frauduleuse des éléments protégés par les droits d’auteur.Consignes de sécurité 27 Informations sur la certification DAS Votre SmartPad a été conçu pour ne pas dépasser les limites d’exposition aux radiofréquences (RF) émises recommandées par le Conseil de l’Union européenne. Ces normes empêchent la vente d’appareils mobiles qui dépassent le niveau d’exposition maximal (également connu sous le nom de DAS ou Débit d’absorption spécifique) de 2 watts par kilogramme. Lors des tests, la valeur DAS maximum enregistrée pour ce modèle était de 0,939 W/kg. En condition normale d’utilisation, la valeur DAS réelle sera généralement beaucoup plus faible, car le SmartPad n’émet que l’énergie RF nécessaire à la transmission du signal vers la station de base la plus proche. Le SmartPad minimise ainsi votre exposition globale à l’énergie RF en émettant automatiquement à des niveaux plus faibles dès que cela est possible. Par ailleurs, il est également recommandé d’utiliser autant que possible le kit piéton. Cependant, on veillera dans ce cas à éloigner le SmartPad du ventre des femmes enceintes et du bas ventre des enfants et des adolescents. Les informations scientifiques actuelles n’indiquent en rien que l’utilisation des appareils mobiles exige de prendre de quelconques précautions. Cependant, si certains s’inquiètent des risques potentiels liés à une durée d’utilisation excessive du SmartPad, nous leur conseillons d’utiliser le kit piéton afin de tenir le SmartPad éloigné de la tête et du corps. La Déclaration de conformité figurant au dos de ce mode d’emploi prouve que votre SmartPad est conforme à la directive européenne relative aux équipements terminaux de télécommunications et aux équipements radio. Pour plus d’informations sur le DAS et les normes européennes correspondantes, veuillez consulter le site Web de Samsung mobile. Lorsque vous transportez le produit ou que vous le portez sur vous, respectez une distance de 5 mm entre votre corps et le produit, conformement aux directives en matiere d’exposition RF.28 Consignes de sécurité Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif) Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux.Consignes de sécurité 29 Élimination de la batterie de ce produit (Applicable aux pays de l’Union européenne et aux autres pays européens dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte sélective sont mis en place) Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que la batterie de ce produit ne doit pas être éliminée en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. L’indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si la batterie n’est pas correctement éliminée, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d’encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer la batterie des autres types de déchets et à la recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des piles et batteries. La batterie rechargeable integree a ce produit ne peut pas etre remplacee par l’utilisateur. Pour savoir comment la remplacer, veuillez contacter votre fournisseur de services. Limitation de responsabilité Les contenus et les services accessibles par l’intermédiaire de ce SmartPad appartiennent dans leur intégralité à des tiers et sont protégés par les lois sur les droits d’auteur, les brevets, les marques et/ou d’autres lois sur la propriété intellectuelle. Ces contenus et services sont fournis uniquement pour votre usage personnel et non pour une utilisation commerciale. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser ces contenus ou services d’une manière qui n’a pas été autorisée par le propriétaire des contenus ou le fournisseur des services. Sans que cela ne limite ce qui précède, sauf autorisation expresse du propriétaire de contenus ou du fournisseur de services concerné, il vous est interdit de modifier, de copier, de republier, de transférer, de diffuser, de transmettre, de traduire, de vendre, d’exploiter ou de distribuer, d’une quelconque manière et sur quelque support que ce soit, des contenus ou des services affichés par l’intermédiaire de ce SmartPad, ou d’en créer des dérivés. LES CONTENUS ET SERVICES DE TIERS SONT FOURNIS “ EN L’ÉTAT “. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI LOCALE, SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS LES CONTENUS OU LES SERVICES AINSI FOURNIS, EXPRESSÉMENT OU IMPLICITEMENT, 30 Consignes de sécurité À QUELQUE FIN QUE CE SOIT. SAMSUNG EXCLUT EXPRESSÉMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS QUE CELA SOIT LIMITATIF, LES GARANTIES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER. SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS L’EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITÉ, L’ACTUALITÉ, LA LÉGALITÉ OU L’EXHAUSTIVITÉ DES CONTENUS OU DES SERVICES FOURNIS PAR L’INTERMÉDIAIRE DE CET APPAREIL, ET SAMSUNG NE SERA RESPONSABLE EN AUCUN CAS, Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE, QUE CE SOIT AU TITRE DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE OU DÉLICTUELLE, DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCESSOIRES, SPÉCIAUX OU CONSÉCUTIFS, DES HONORAIRES D’AVOCAT, DES FRAIS OU DE TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE DÉCOULANT DE L’UTILISATION DE TOUT CONTENU OU SERVICE PAR VOUS-MÊME OU PAR UN TIERS (OU DE TOUTE INFORMATION FIGURANT DANS LEDIT CONTENU OU SERVICE), MÊME SI SAMSUNG A ÉTÉ INFORMÉ DE L’ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. DANS LA MESURE OÙ CERTAINS PAYS N’AUTORISENT PAS L’EXCLUSION DES GARANTIES IMPLICITES OU LA LIMITATION DES DROITS LÉGAUX DU CONSOMMATEUR, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CES EXCLUSIONS ET LIMITATIONS NE VOUS SOIENT PAS APPLICABLES. Les services tiers peuvent être suspendus ou interrompus à tout moment, et Samsung ne garantit pas qu’un contenu ou un service restera disponible pendant une certaine période. Les contenus et les services sont transmis par des tiers au moyen de réseaux et d’équipements de transmission qui échappent au contrôle de Samsung. Sans que cela ne limite le caractère général du présent avis, Samsung décline expressément toute responsabilité en cas d’interruption ou de suspension de tout contenu ou service fourni par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil. Samsung n’est pas responsable du service client lié aux contenus et aux services. Toute question ou demande de service portant sur les contenus ou les services doit être adressée directement aux fournisseurs de contenus et de services concernésLa procédure de déclaration de conformité, définie dans l’article 10, puis reprise à l’alinéa [IV] de la directive 1999/5/EC a été conduite sous contrôle de l’organisme suivant : BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK* Numéro d’identification : 0168 Documentation technique détenue par : Samsung Electronics QA Lab. disponible sur simple demande. (Représentant pour l’union européenne) Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK* 2011. 02. 14 Joong-Hoon Choi / Directeur Général (lieu et date de parution) (nom et signature du responsable dûment habilité) * Il ne s’agit pas de l’adresse du service après-vente de Samsung. Pour obtenir l’adresse ou le numéro de téléphone du service après-vente de Samsung, reportez-vous au certificat de garantie ou contactez le revendeur auprès duquel vous avez acheté ce produit. Déclaration de conformité (R&TTE) Nous, Samsung Electronics déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité que le produit SmartPad : GT-P7100 en relation avec cette déclaration est en conformité avec les normes suivantes et/ou d’autres documents normatifs. SAFETY EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A11 : 2009 SAR EN 50371 : 2002 EN 62311 : 2008 IEC 62209-2 : 2010 Recommandation du Conseil 1999/519/EC EMC EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008) EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005) EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009) EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007) N 55022 : 2006 + A1 : 2007 EN 55024 : 1998 + A1 : 2001 + A2 : 2003 RADIO EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003) EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006) EN 300 440-1 V1.5.1 (2009-03) EN 300 440-2 V1.3.1 (2009-03) EN 301 908-1 V4.2.1 (2010-03) EN 301 908-2 V4.2.1 (2010-03) EN 301 893 V1.5.1 (2008-12) Ce SmartPad a été testé et s’est avéré conforme aux normes relatives à l’émission de fréquences radio. En outre, nous déclarons que cet appareil répond à la directive 1999/5/EC.Printed in Korea GH68-33612A French. 04/2011. Rev. 1.0 Protégez votre acuité auditive • Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé peut endommager votre audition. • Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé lorsque vous êtes au volant peut détourner votre attention et provoquer un accident. • Diminuez toujours le volume avant de connecter des écouteurs à une source audio et réglez le volume minimum nécessaire vous permettant d’entendre votre conversation ou la musique. Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut ne pas correspondre fidèlement à votre appareil en fonction de votre version logicielle. www.samsung.com GT-P7100 Snelstartgids2 Over deze snelstartgids Over deze snelstartgids Dank u voor de aanschaf van dit mobiele apparaat van Samsung. Dit toestel biedt hoogwaardige mobiele communicatie en amusement op basis van de uitzonderlijke technologie en hoge normen van Samsung. Deze snelstartgids is bedoeld om u stap voor stap bekend te maken met de functies en onderdelen van het toestel. Lees dit eerst • Lees alle veiligheidsinformatie en deze gids zorgvuldig door zodat u verzekerd bent van veilig en correct gebruik voordat u het toestel in gebruik neemt. • De beschrijvingen in deze gids zijn gebaseerd op de standaardinstellingen van het toestel. • Afbeeldingen en screenshots die in deze gids worden gebruikt, kunnen er anders uitzien dan het daadwerkelijke product. • De inhoud van deze gids kan van product tot product verschillen of anders zijn dan de software die door serviceproviders wordt geleverd en is onderhevig aan wijzigingen zonder voorafgaande mededelingen. Ga naar www.samsung.com voor de meest recente versie van de volledige gebruiksaanwijzing.Over deze snelstartgids 3 • Welke functies en extra diensten beschikbaar zijn, is afhankelijk van het toestel, de software en uw provider. • De opmaak en presentatie van deze gids is gebaseerd op het besturingssysteem Android en kan verschillen afhankelijk van het besturingssysteem van de gebruiker. • Toepassingen en de bijbehorende functies kunnen per land, regio of hardwarespecificatie verschillen. Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor prestatieproblemen die worden veroorzaakt door toepassingen van derden. • Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor prestatie- of compatibiliteitsproblemen die worden veroorzaakt door het bewerken van de instellingen in het register door de gebruiker. • Geluidsbronnen, achtergronden en afbeeldingen in dit apparaat zijn onder licentie verstrekt met beperkte gebruiksrechten tussen Samsung en de betreffende eigenaren. Het overnemen en gebruiken van deze materialen voor commerciële of andere doeleinden maakt inbreuk op de copyright-wetgeving. Samsung is niet verantwoordelijk voor inbreuk op het copyright door de gebruiker. • Bewaar de gids, zodat u deze later kunt raadplegen.4 Over deze snelstartgids Auteursrechten Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics Deze gebruiksaanwijzing is beschermd onder internationale auteursrechtwetten. Geen enkel onderdeel van deze snelstartgids mag worden gereproduceerd, gedistribueerd, vertaald of verzonden in welke vorm dan ook of op welke elektronische of mechanische wijze dan ook, inclusief door deze te fotokopiëren, op te nemen of op te slaan in een systeem voor het opslaan en ophalen van informatie, zonder voorafgaande schriftelijke toestemming van Samsung Electronics. Handelsmerken • SAMSUNG en het SAMSUNG-logo zijn geregistreerde handelsmerken van Samsung Electronics. • Google, het gestileerde Google-logo, Android en het gestileerde Android-logo zijn handelsmerken van Google Inc. • Bluetooth® is wereldwijd een gedeponeerd handelsmerk van Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Oracle en Java zijn geregistreerde handelsmerken van Oracle en/of daarbij aangesloten bedrijven. Andere namen kunnen handelsmerken zijn van de betreffende eigenaars.Over deze snelstartgids 5 • Wi-Fi®, het Wi-Fi CERTIFIED-logo en het Wi-Fi-logo zijn geregistreerde handelsmerken van de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Alle overige handelsmerken en auteursrechten zijn het eigendom van de betreffende eigenaars.6 Inhoudsopgave Inhoudsopgave Uw toestel en accessoires .................................................................... 7 Uitpakken ............................................................................................................................. 8 Kennismaken met het toestel .......................................................................................... 9 De SIM-kaart plaatsen .................................................................................................... 12 Het toestel opladen ......................................................................................................... 13 Het toestel in- en uitschakelen ..................................................................................... 16 Veiligheidsvoorschriften .................................................................... 18Uw toestel en accessoires 7 Uw toestel en accessoires Uw GALAXY Tab 10.1v™-toestel wordt geleverd met een aantal accessoires, waaronder een headset, pc-datakabel en adapter. In deze gids worden de onderdelen van het toestel beschreven, hoe u de batterij kunt opladen, hoe u het toestel kunt in- en uitschakelen en andere nuttige informatie. Raadpleeg www.samsung.com voor de volledige gebruiksaanwijzing. In dit gedeelte Uitpakken op pagina 8 Kennismaken met het toestel op pagina 9 De SIM-kaart plaatsen op pagina 12 Het toestel opladen op pagina 13 Het toestel in- en uitschakelen op pagina 168 Uw toestel en accessoires Uitpakken Controleer of de doos de volgende onderdelen bevat: • Mobiel toestel • USB-stroomadapter • Datakabel voor pc • Headset • Snelstartgids • Welke onderdelen bij het toestel worden geleverd is afhankelijk van de software en de accessoires die in uw regio beschikbaar zijn of door uw serviceprovider worden aangeboden. • Bij de plaatselijke Samsung-dealer zijn extra accessoires verkrijgbaar. • De meegeleverde accessoires werken het beste met uw toestel. • Accessoires die niet door de fabrikant worden verstrekt, zijn mogelijk niet compatibel met het toestel.Uw toestel en accessoires 9 Kennismaken met het toestel Aan/uit-toet 3,5-mm headsetaansluiting Luidspreker Lichtsensor Aanraakscherm Multifunctionele aansluiting Camera aan de voorzijde LED10 Uw toestel en accessoires Volumetoets Microfoon Cameraflitser Interne antenne Cameralens achterzijde Sleuf voor SIM-kaart LuidsprekerUw toestel en accessoires 11 U moet de batterij opladen voordat u het toestel voor de eerste keer gebruikt. (Zie “Het toestel opladen” op pagina 13.) Op de ondersteuningssite van uw provider en in de gebruiksaanwijzing (beschikbaar op www.samsung.com) worden de basisfuncties van het toestel beschreven, waaronder het toestel voor het eerst inschakelen. Maak de cameralenzen aan de voor- en achterkant schoon met een pluisvrije doek; vlekken en vingerafdrukken kunnen uw foto’s vervormen. De LED-flitser van de camera op de achterzijde bevindt zich naast de lens. Het maken van foto’s en opnemen van video’s wordt beschreven in de Gebruiksaanwijzing. › Over het aanraakscherm Met het aanraakscherm van het toestel kunt u eenvoudig items selecteren en functies uitvoeren. • Gebruik geen scherpe hulpmiddelen, om krassen op het aanraakscherm te voorkomen. • Zorg dat het aanraakscherm niet met andere elektrische apparaten in aanraking komt. Door elektrostatische ontladingen kan het aanraakscherm beschadigd raken. • Zorg dat het aanraakscherm niet met water in aanraking komt. Het aanraakscherm kan in vochtige omstandigheden of door water beschadigd raken.12 Uw toestel en accessoires • Om het aanraakscherm optimaal te kunnen gebruiken, dient u het beschermende folie te verwijderen alvorens u het toestel gebruikt. • Het aanraakscherm heeft een laag die kleine elektrische ladingen die door het menselijk lichaam worden veroorzaakt, detecteert. Voor de beste prestaties tikt u met uw vingertop op het aanraakscherm. Het aanraakscherm reageert niet als het door scherpe hulpmiddelen zoals een stylus of een pen wordt aangeraakt. De SIM-kaart plaatsen U moet een SIM-kaart plaatsen voordat u het toestel kunt gebruiken. 1 Open het klepje van de SIM-kaartsleuf aan de zijkant van het toestel. 2 Plaats de SIM-kaart in het toestel en sluit het klepje van de SIM-kaartsleuf.Uw toestel en accessoires 13 Het toestel opladen Het toestel heeft een ingebouwde batterij. Voordat u het toestel kunt gebruiken, moet u dit volledig opladen. • Gebruik alleen door Samsung goedgekeurde opladers. Bij gebruik van nietgoedgekeurde opladers bestaat het risico dat batterijen ontploffen of dat het toestel schade oploopt. • Als de batterij bijna leeg is, laat het toestel een waarschuwingstoon horen en wordt er een bericht weergegeven. Ook is het batterijsymbool leeg en wordt het rood. Als de batterij zo zwak is dat het toestel niet meer kan worden gebruikt, wordt het toestel automatisch uitgeschakeld. Laad de batterij op als u het toestel weer wilt gebruiken.14 Uw toestel en accessoires › Het toestel opladen 1 Sluit het ene uiteinde van de pc-datakabel op de USB-stroomadapter aan en het andere op de multifunctionele aansluiting. Als u de reisadapter verkeerd aansluit, kan het toestel ernstig beschadigd raken. Schade veroorzaakt door verkeerd gebruik valt niet onder de garantie.Uw toestel en accessoires 15 2 Sluit de USB-stroomadapter op een stopcontact aan. • U kunt het toestel tijdens het opladen van de batterij blijven gebruiken. Hierdoor kan het echter wel langer duren voordat de batterij volledig is opgeladen. • Het is mogelijk dat het aanraakscherm en de aanraaktoetsen tijdens het laden niet werken wegens een onregelmatige stroomtoevoer. Als dit gebeurt, haalt u de stekker van de USB-adapter uit het stopcontact of haalt u de pc-datakabel uit het toestel. • Tijdens het opladen kan het toestel warm worden. Dit is normaal en heeft geen nadelige invloed op de levensduur of prestaties van het toestel. • Als uw toestel niet goed oplaadt, kunt u met het toestel en de oplader naar een Samsung Servicecenter gaan. 3 Wanneer het toestel volledig is opgeladen, koppelt u het los van de adapter.16 Uw toestel en accessoires Het toestel in- en uitschakelen U kunt het toestel in- en uitschakelen met de aan/uit-toets. Aan/uit-toets › Het toestel inschakelen Als u het toestel voor het eerst inschakelt, volgt u de instructies op het scherm om het toestel in te stellen.Uw toestel en accessoires 17 › Een SIM-kaart deblokkeren Als u drie keer een onjuiste ontgrendelings-PIN-code voor de SIM-kaart ingeeft, wordt de SIM-kaart geblokkeerd en kunt u uw toestel niet meer gebruiken. U moet een PUK-code (PIN Unblocking Key; deblokkeringscode voor de PIN-code) bij uw provider aanvragen om de SIMkaart te deblokkeren en een nieuwe PIN-code in te stellen. › Het toestel uitschakelen Houd de aan/uit-toets ingedrukt en selecteer vervolgens OK. Raadpleeg de gebruiksaanwijzing voor meer informatie over het gebruik van het aanraakscherm en de menu’s.18 Veiligheidsvoorschriften Veiligheidsvoorschriften Lees de volgende informatie zorgvuldig door voordat u het toestel gebruikt om uzelf en anderen tegen letsel te beschermen of schade aan het toestel te voorkomen. Waarschuwing: Voorkom elektrische schokken, brand of explosies Gebruik geen beschadigde elektriciteitssnoeren of stekkers of losse elektrische aansluitingen Raak het elektriciteitssnoer niet met natte handen aan en haal de oplader niet uit het stopcontact door aan het snoer te trekken Buig of beschadig het elektriciteitssnoer niet Gebruik het toestel niet terwijl het wordt opgeladen en raak het toestel niet met natte handen aan Veroorzaak geen kortsluiting in de oplader of de batterij Laat de oplader of de batterij niet vallen en voorkom andere plotselinge schokken Laad de batterij niet op met opladers die niet zijn goedgekeurd door de fabrikant Maak geen gebruik van het toestel tijdens een onweersbui Er kan een storing optreden in uw toestel en het risico van een elektrische schok wordt verhoogd. Raak een beschadigde of lekkende Li-Ion-batterij (Lithium Ion) niet aan Neem contact op met het dichtstbijzijnde geautoriseerde servicecenter om Li-Ion-batterijen veilig te laten vervangen.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 19 Behandel batterijen en oplader voorzichtig en voer deze volgens de voorschriften af • Gebruik alleen batterijen en opladers die door Samsung zijn goedgekeurd en speciaal zijn bedoeld voor uw toestel. Incompatibele batterijen en opladers kunnen ernstig letsel of schade aan uw toestel veroorzaken. • Gooi batterijen of apparaten nooit in open vuur. Volg alle plaatselijke voorschriften bij het afvoeren van gebruikte batterijen of apparaten. • Leg batterijen of apparaten nooit in of op verwarmingsapparaten, zoals een magnetron, kachel of radiator. Batterijen kunnen exploderen als ze te heet worden. • U mag de batterij nooit indrukken of doorboren. Stel de batterij niet bloot aan hoge externe druk om interne kortsluiting en oververhitting te voorkomen. Bescherm uw toestel, batterijen en opladers tegen schade • Vermijd blootstelling van uw toestel en batterijen aan erg hoge of erg lage temperaturen. • Door extreme temperaturen kan het toestel vervormen en kunnen de oplaadcapaciteit en levensduur van het toestel en de batterijen afnemen. • Voorkom dat batterijen in aanraking komen met metalen voorwerpen. Dit kan een verbinding vormen tussen de plus- en minpolen van uw batterijen en tijdelijke of permanente schade aan batterijen veroorzaken. • Gebruik nooit een beschadigde oplader of batterij. Let op: Volg alle veiligheidsvoorschriften en regelgeving bij het gebruik van het toestel in een gesloten ruimte Schakel het toestel uit als het gebruik ervan is verboden Houd u aan alle voorschriften die het gebruik van mobiele apparaten in bepaalde omgevingen beperkt.20 Veiligheidsvoorschriften Gebruik het toestel niet in de buurt van andere elektronische apparaten De meeste elektronische apparaten gebruiken RF-signalen (radio frequency). Het toestel kan storing veroorzaken op andere elektronische apparaten. Gebruik het toestel niet in de buurt van een pacemaker • Vermijd indien mogelijk het gebruik van het toestel binnen 15 cm van een pacemaker omdat het toestel storing kan veroorzaken op de pacemaker. • Zorg ervoor dat er minstens 15 cm afstand is tussen het toestel en de pacemaker als u het toestel toch moet gebruiken. • Gebruik het toestel niet aan de zijde van het lichaam waar de pacemaker zich bevindt, om de kans op storing op de pacemaker te minimaliseren. Gebruik het toestel niet in een ziekenhuis of in de buurt van medische apparatuur die gevoelig is voor RF-signalen (radio frequency) Als u zelf medische apparatuur gebruikt, neemt u contact op met de fabrikant van de apparatuur om te controleren of deze beschermd is tegen RF-signalen (radio frequency). Als u een gehoorapparaat gebruikt, neemt u contact op met de fabrikant voor informatie over storing via radiogolven Sommige gehoorapparaten kunnen worden gestoord door de radiofrequentie van uw toestel. Neem contact op met de fabrikant om te controleren of u uw gehoorapparaat veilig kunt gebruiken. Schakel het toestel uit in omgevingen met explosiegevaar • Houd u aan alle voorschriften, instructies en informatie in omgevingen met potentieel explosiegevaar. • Gebruik het toestel niet bij tankstations of in de buurt van brandstoffen of chemicaliën, en in gebieden met explosiegevaar. • Bewaar geen ontvlambare vloeistoffen, gassen en explosief materiaal in dezelfde ruimte als het toestel of de onderdelen of accessoires van het toestel.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 21 Zet uw telefoon uit wanneer u zich in een vliegtuig bevindt Het gebruik van het toestel in vliegtuigen is niet toegestaan. Het toestel kan storing veroorzaken op de elektronische navigatie-instrumenten van het vliegtuig. Elektronische apparaten in motorvoertuigen kunnen worden gestoord door de radiofrequentie van het toestel Elektronische apparaten in uw auto kunnen worden gestoord door de radiofrequentie van het toestel. Neem voor meer informatie contact op met de fabrikant. Het mobiele toestel goed onderhouden en gebruiken Houd het toestel droog • Vocht en allerlei soorten vloeistoffen kunnen onderdelen van het toestel of elektronische circuits beschadigen. • Als het toestel nat is geworden, moet u het uitschakelen. Droog het toestel met een doek en breng het naar een servicecenter. • Door de vloeistof verandert de kleur van het label dat de waterschade in het toestel aangeeft. Waterschade aan het toestel kan de garantie van de fabrikant laten vervallen. Gebruik of bewaar het toestel niet in stoffige of vuile omgevingen Door stof kan het toestel beschadigd raken. Leg het toestel niet op hellende vlakken Als het toestel valt, kan het beschadigd raken.22 Veiligheidsvoorschriften Bewaar het toestel niet in een te warme of te koude omgeving. Gebruik het toestel bij een temperatuur tussen -20°C en 45°C • Het toestel kan ontploffen als u het achterlaat in een gesloten voertuig, omdat de temperatuur daarin tot 80°C kan oplopen. • Stel het toestel niet gedurende lange tijd aan direct zonlicht bloot (bijvoorbeeld op het dashboard van een auto). • Bewaar de batterij bij een temperatuur tussen -20°C en 45°C. Bewaar het toestel niet samen met metalen objecten zoals munten, sleutels en halsbanden. • Het toestel kan daardoor vervormd of beschadigd worden. • Als de contactpunten van de batterij in contact komen met metalen objecten, kan brand ontstaan. Bewaar het toestel niet in de buurt van magnetische velden • Het toestel kan worden beschadigd of de batterij kan worden ontladen bij blootstelling aan magnetische velden. • Kaarten met magnetische strips, waaronder credit cards, telefoonkaarten, bankpasjes en OV-kaarten kunnen beschadigd raken door magnetische velden. • Gebruik geen telefoonhoesjes of accessoires met magnetische sluitingen en stel het toestel niet gedurende langere tijd bloot aan magnetische velden. Bewaar het toestel niet dichtbij of in verwarmingsapparatuur, magnetrons, warme kooktoestellen of hogedrukcompartimenten. • De batterij kan lekken. • Het toestel kan oververhit raken en brand veroorzaken.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 23 Laat het toestel niet vallen en stel het niet bloot aan plotselinge schokken. • Het scherm van het toestel kan beschadigd raken. • Als het toestel wordt verbogen of vervormd, kan het beschadigd raken of functioneren onderdelen wellicht niet meer goed. Gebruik de flitser niet vlakbij de ogen van mensen of dieren. Het gebruik van de flitser dichtbij de ogen kan tijdelijke verblinding of schade aan de ogen veroorzaken. Zorg voor een optimale levensduur van batterij en oplader • Laat batterijen niet langer dan een week achtereen opladen, aangezien te veel opladen niet bevorderlijk is voor de levensduur. • Batterijen die niet worden gebruikt, ontladen zich na verloop van tijd en moeten voor gebruik opnieuw worden opgeladen. • Laat de stekker van de oplader niet in het stopcontact zitten als u de oplader niet gebruikt. • Gebruik de batterijen alleen voor de doelen waarvoor ze zijn bedoeld. Gebruik alleen door de fabrikant goedgekeurde batterijen, opladers, accessoires en onderdelen • Het gebruik van merkloze batterijen en opladers kan de levensduur van het toestel beperken of storingen in het toestel veroorzaken. • Samsung kan niet verantwoordelijk worden gehouden voor de veiligheid van de gebruiker wanneer de gebruikte accessoires of onderdelen niet door Samsung zijn goedgekeurd. Bijt of zuig niet op het toestel of op de batterij • Hierdoor kan het toestel beschadigd raken of exploderen. • Als kinderen gebruik maken van het toestel, zorg er dan voor dat zij het op de juiste wijze gebruiken.24 Veiligheidsvoorschriften Bij gebruik van het toestel: • Spreek rechtstreeks in de microfoon. • Vermijd aanraking met de interne antenne van het toestel. Als u de antenne aanraakt, kan dit ervoor zorgen dat het toestel meer radiogolven uitzendt dan nodig is. • Houd het apparaat ontspannen vast, druk licht op de toetsen, gebruik speciale functies waardoor u op minder toetsen hoeft te drukken (zoals voorspellende tekst) en neem regelmatig pauze. Bescherm uw gehoor • Overmatige blootstelling aan harde geluiden kan leiden tot gehoorbeschadiging. • Blootstelling aan harde geluiden onder het rijden, kan de aandacht afleiden en een ongeval veroorzaken. • Zet het geluidsvolume altijd laag voordat u de oortelefoon in de geluidsbron steekt. Gebruik alleen het minimale geluidsniveau dat nodig is om uw gesprek of muziek te kunnen horen. Wees voorzichtig als u het toestel gebruikt tijdens het wandelen of wanneer u zich verplaatst Wees u altijd bewust van uw omgeving om letsel voor uzelf of anderen te vermijden. Draag het toestel niet in een achterzak of om uw middel. Als u valt, kunt u gewond raken of het toestel beschadigen. Haal uw toestel nooit uit elkaar, breng er geen wijzigingen in aan en probeer het niet te repareren • Door wijzigingen of aanpassingen van het toestel kan de garantie van de fabrikant vervallen. Breng het toestel naar een Samsung Servicecenter voor service. • Haal de batterij niet uit elkaar en probeer deze niet te doorboren omdat hierdoor explosie- of brandgevaar ontstaat.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 25 Verf het toestel niet en plak geen stickers op het toestel Verf en stickers kunnen ervoor zorgen dat de bewegende onderdelen vastlopen, waardoor het toestel niet correct kan werken. Als u allergisch bent voor de verf of metalen onderdelen van het product, kunt u last krijgen van jeuk, eczeem of zwelling van de huid. Als dit gebeurt, moet u het product niet langer gebruiken en moet u uw huisarts raadplegen. Als u het toestel schoonmaakt, gaat u als volgt te werk: • Veeg het toestel of de oplader met een doek of een gum schoon. • Gebruik geen chemicaliën of schoonmaakmiddelen. Gebruik het toestel niet als het scherm gebarsten of gebroken is. Gebroken glas of plastic kan leiden tot letsel aan uw handen en gezicht. Breng het toestel naar een Samsung Servicecenter voor reparatie. Gebruik het toestel voor geen ander doel dan waarvoor het bedoeld is Probeer andere mensen niet te storen wanneer u het toestel in het openbaar gebruikt Laat het toestel niet gebruiken door kinderen Uw toestel is geen speelgoed. Laat kinderen niet met het toestel spelen omdat ze zichzelf en anderen kunnen bezeren of het toestel kunnen beschadigen. Installeer mobiele apparatuur zorgvuldig • Zorg ervoor dat mobiele apparaten of daaraan verwante apparatuur naar behoren zijn bevestigd in uw voertuig. • Vermijd het plaatsen van apparatuur en accessoires op een plek waar de airbag zich kan ontvouwen. Verkeerd geïnstalleerde draadloze apparaten kunnen ernstig letsel veroorzaken als airbags zich snel ontvouwen.26 Veiligheidsvoorschriften Laat reparaties aan het toestel alleen uitvoeren door gekwalificeerd personeel Als u het toestel laat repareren door niet-gekwalificeerd personeel kan het toestel beschadigd raken en is de garantie van de fabrikant niet meer geldig. Ga voorzichtig om met SIM-kaarten • Verwijder een kaart niet als het toestel bezig is met de overdracht of het ophalen van gegevens. Dit kan leiden tot gegevensverlies en/of schade aan de kaart of het toestel. • Bescherm kaarten tegen sterke schokken, statische elektriciteit en elektrische storing van andere apparaten. • Raak geen goudkleurige contactpunten of polen aan met uw vingers of met metalen voorwerpen. Veeg, indien nodig, geheugenkaarten schoon met een zachte doek. Maak een back-up van belangrijke gegevens Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor gegevensverlies. Verspreid auteursrechtelijk beschermd materiaal niet Verspreid auteursrechtelijk beschermd materiaal dat u hebt opgenomen, niet aan anderen zonder de toestemming van de eigenaars van de inhoud. Als u dit wel doet, kan dit in strijd zijn met de auteursrechtwetgeving. De fabrikant is niet aansprakelijk voor juridische problemen die worden veroorzaakt door illegaal gebruik van auteursrechtelijk beschermd materiaal door de gebruiker. Informatie over het SAR-certificaat (Specific Absorption Rate) Uw toestel voldoet aan de standaarden die in de EU zijn opgesteld voor blootstelling aan radiofrequentie-energie die wordt afgegeven door radio- en telecommunicatie-apparatuur. Deze standaarden verbieden de verkoop van mobiele apparaten die het maximumniveau voor blootstelling overschrijden, de zogenaamde SAR (Specific Absorption Rate), van 2,0 W/kg.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 27 Tijdens tests bleek dat de maximale SAR die is opgegeven voor dit model 0.939 W/kg. Bij normaal gebruik is de feitelijke SAR waarschijnlijk veel lager, aangezien het toestel zo is ontworpen dat slechts de minimaal benodigde hoeveelheid RF-energie wordt gebruikt voor het verzenden van een signaal naar het dichtstbijzijnde basisstation. Door waar mogelijk automatisch lagere niveaus te gebruiken, beperkt het toestel blootstelling aan RF-energie nog verder. De conformiteitsverklaring achter in deze gebruiksaanwijzing geeft aan dat de telefoon voldoet aan de richtlijn van de EU betreffende radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie-eindapparatuur. Wanneer u het toestel meeneemt of het gebruikt terwijl u het op uw lichaam draagt, moet u het toestel op 5 mm van uw lichaam houden om te voldoen aan de vereisten voor blootstelling aan RF-signalen. Correcte verwijdering van dit product (elektrische & elektronische afvalapparatuur) (Van toepassing in de Europese Unie en andere Europese landen waar afval gescheiden wordt ingezameld) Dit merkteken op het product, de accessoires of het informatiemateriaal duidt erop dat het product en zijn elektronische accessoires (bv. lader, headset, USB-kabel) niet met ander huishoudelijk afval verwijderd mogen worden aan het einde van hun gebruiksduur. Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of de menselijke gezondheid door ongecontroleerde afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, moet u deze artikelen van andere soorten afval scheiden en op een verantwoorde manier recyclen, zodat het duurzame hergebruik van materiaalbronnen wordt bevorderd. Huishoudelijke gebruikers moeten contact opnemen met de winkel waar ze dit product hebben gekocht of met de gemeente waar ze wonen om te vernemen waar en hoe ze deze artikelen milieuvriendelijk kunnen laten recyclen. Zakelijke gebruikers moeten contact opnemen met hun leverancier en de algemene voorwaarden van de koopovereenkomst nalezen. Dit product en zijn elektronische accessoires mogen niet met ander bedrijfsafval voor verwijdering worden gemengd.28 Veiligheidsvoorschriften Correcte behandeling van een gebruikte batterij uit dit product (Van toepassing op de Europese Unie en andere Europese landen met afzonderlijke inzamelingssystemen voor accu’s en batterijen) Dit merkteken op de batterij, gebruiksaanwijzing of verpakking geeft aan dat de batterij in dit product aan het einde van de levensduur niet samen met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden weggegooid. De chemische symbolen Hg, Cd of Pb geven aan dat het kwik-, cadmium- of loodgehalte in de batterij hoger is dan de referentieniveaus in de Richtlijn 2006/66/EC. Indien de gebruikte batterij niet op de juiste wijze wordt behandeld, kunnen deze stoffen schadelijk zijn voor de gezondheid van mensen of het milieu. Ter bescherming van de natuurlijke hulpbronnen en ter bevordering van het hergebruik van materialen, verzoeken wij u afgedankte accu’s en batterijen te scheiden van andere soorten afval en voor recycling aan te bieden bij het gratis inzamelingssysteem voor accu’s en batterijen in uw omgeving. De oplaadbare batterij in dit product kan niet door de gebruiker worden vervangen. Neem contact op met uw serviceprovider voor informatie over vervanging. Vrijwaring Bepaald materiaal en bepaalde services die via dit apparaat beschikbaar zijn, zijn het eigendom van derden en worden beschermd door het auteursrecht, patenten, handelsmerken en/of andere wetgeving met betrekking tot intellectueeleigendomsrecht. Dergelijk materiaal en dergelijke services worden alleen voor persoonlijke, nietcommerciële doeleinden beschikbaar gesteld. Het is verboden om materiaal of services te gebruiken op een manier die niet door de eigenaar van het materiaal of de leverancier van de service is toegestaan. Zonder het voorafgaande te beperken, is het verboden om enig materiaal of enige services die via dit apparaat worden weergegeven, via welk medium en op welke manier dan ook aan te passen, te kopiëren, opnieuw te publiceren, te uploaden, op het web te plaatsen, te verzenden, te verkopen, daarvan afgeleide werken te maken, het te exploiteren of te distribueren, tenzij uitdrukkelijk toegestaan door de desbetreffende materiaaleigenaar of serviceleverancier.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 29 “MATERIAAL EN SERVICES VAN DERDEN WORDEN GELEVERD IN DE STAAT WAARIN DEZE VERKEREN. SAMSUNG GEEFT MET BETREKKING TOT HET MATERIAAL EN DE SERVICES DIE WORDEN GELEVERD GEEN ENKELE GARANTIE WAT BETREFT GESCHIKTHEID VOOR ENIG DOEL, UITDRUKKELIJK NOCH GEÏMPLICEERD. SAMSUNG ONTKENT UITDRUKKELIJK ELKE GEÏMPLICEERDE GARANTIE, INCLUSIEF MAAR NIET BEPERKT TOT GARANTIES VAN VERKOOPBAARHEID OF GESCHIKTHEID VOOR EEN BEPAALD DOEL. SAMSUNG GEEFT GEEN ENKELE GARANTIE MET BETREKKING TOT DE NAUWKEURIGHEID, GELDIGHEID, ACTUALITEIT, LEGALITEIT OF VOLLEDIGHEID VAN ENIG MATERIAAL OF ENIGE SERVICE DIE VIA DIT APPARAAT BESCHIKBAAR WORDT GESTELD EN SAMSUNG KAN ONDER GEEN ENKELE OMSTANDIGHEID, INCLUSIEF NALATIGHEID, AANSPRAKELIJK WORDEN GESTELD VOOR ENIGE DIRECTE, INDIRECTE, INCIDENTELE OF SPECIALE SCHADE OF GEVOLGSCHADE, ADVOCATENHONORARIA, ONKOSTEN OF ENIGE ANDERE SCHADE DIE VOORTVLOEIT UIT, OF IN VERBAND STAAT MET, ENIGE INFORMATIE HIERIN, OF ALS GEVOLG VAN HET GEBRUIK VAN ENIG MATERIAAL OF ENIGE SERVICE DOOR U OF EEN DERDE, ZELFS NIET WANNEER WIJ VAN DE KANS OP DERGELIJKE SCHADE OP DE HOOGTE ZOUDEN ZIJN GESTELD.” Services van derden kunnen op elk gewenst moment door Samsung worden beëindigd en Samsung geeft geen enkele garantie dat enig materiaal of enige service gedurende een bepaalde periode beschikbaar zal zijn. Materiaal en services worden door derden verzonden via netwerken en verzendfaciliteiten waarover Samsung geen controle heeft. Zonder de algemeenheid van deze verklaring van vrijwaring te beperken, wijst Samsung uitdrukkelijk alle verantwoordelijkheid of aansprakelijkheid van de hand met betrekking tot enige onderbreking of staking van enig materiaal of enige service die via dit apparaat beschikbaar wordt gesteld. Samsung is verantwoordelijk noch aansprakelijk voor klantenservice met betrekking tot het materiaal en de services. Alle vragen en serviceverzoeken met betrekking tot het materiaal of de services dienen rechtstreeks aan de leveranciers van het materiaal of de services te worden gericht.De conformiteitsbeoordelingsprocedure waarnaar wordt verwezen in Artikel 10 en die wordt beschreven in Bijlage [IV] van Richtlijn 1999/5/ EC is uitgevoerd in samenwerking met de volgende aangemelde instantie(s): BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK* Kenmerk: 0168 De technische documentatie wordt beheerd door: Samsung Electronics QA Lab. en wordt op verzoek ter beschikking gesteld. (Vertegenwoordiging in de EU) Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK* 2011. 02. 14 Joong-Hoon Choi / Lab Manager (plaats en datum van uitgifte) (naam en handtekening van bevoegde persoon) * Dit is niet het adres van het Samsung Servicecenter. Voor het adres of het telefoonnummer van het Samsung Servicecenter raadpleegt u het garantiebewijs of neemt u contact op met de detailhandel waar u het product hebt aangeschaft. Conformiteitsverklaring (R&TTE-richtlijn) Wij, Samsung Electronics verklaren onder onze eigen verantwoordelijkheid dat het product Mobiele GSM WCDMA WiFi-toestel : GT-P7100 waarop deze verklaring van toepassing is, voldoet aan de volgende standaarden en/of andere normatieve documenten. Veiligheid EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A11 : 2009 SAR EN 50371 : 2002 EN 62311 : 2008 IEC 62209-2 : 2010 Aanbeveling van de Raad 1999/519/EC EMC EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008) EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005) EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009) EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007) EN 55022 : 2006 + A1 : 2007 EN 55024 : 1998 + A1 : 2001 + A2 : 2003 Radio EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003) EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006) EN 300 440-1 V1.5.1 (2009-03) EN 300 440-2 V1.3.1 (2009-03) EN 301 908-1 V4.2.1 (2010-03) EN 301 908-2 V4.2.1 (2010-03) EN 301 893 V1.5.1 (2008-12) Hierbij verklaren we dat [alle essentiële radiotests zijn uitgevoerd en dat] bovengenoemd product voldoet aan alle essentiële eisen die er in Richtlijn 1999/5/EC aan worden gesteld.Printed in Korea GH68-33611A Dutch. 04/2011. Rev. 1.0 * Sommige beschrijvingen in deze gebruiksaanwijzing kunnen afwijken van uw apparaat. Dit is afhankelijk van het land waar u het apparaat hebt gekocht, de geïnstalleerde software of uw serviceprovider. * Drukfouten voorbehouden. www.samsung.com GT-P7100 quick start guide2 Using this manual Using this manual Thank you for purchasing this Samsung mobile device. This device will provide you with high quality mobile communication and entertainment based on Samsung’s exceptional technology and high standards. This user manual has been specially designed to guide you through the functions and features of your device. Read me first • Please read all safety precautions and this manual carefully before using your device to ensure safe and proper use. • The descriptions in this manual are based on the default settings of your device. • Images and screenshots used in this user manual may differ in appearance from the actual product. • Content in this user manual may differ from the product, or from software provided by service providers or carriers, and is subject to change without prior notice. Refer to www.samsung.com for the latest version of the user manual.Using this manual 3 • Available features and additional services may vary by device, software, or service provider. • Formatting and delivery of this user manual is based on Google Android operating systems and may vary depending on the user’s operating system. • Applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications. Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by third-party applications. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by user editing of registry settings. • Sound sources, wallpapers, and images provided in this device are licenced for limited use between Samsung and their respective owners. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Samsung is not liable for such copyright infringement by the user. • Please keep this manual for future reference. Copyright Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics This user manual is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this user manual may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics.4 Using this manual Trademarks • SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. • Google, the stylized Google logo, Android, and the stylized Android logo are trademarks of Google Inc. • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. • Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. • Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.Contents 5 Contents Your device and accessories ................................................................ 6 What’s in the box ................................................................................................................ 7 Getting to know your device ........................................................................................... 8 Inserting the SIM card .................................................................................................... 11 Charging your device ...................................................................................................... 12 Turning the device on and off ...................................................................................... 15 Safety precautions ............................................................................... 176 Your device and accessories Your device and accessories Your GALAXY Tab 10.1v™ device comes with a number of accessories, including a headset, PC data cable, and adapter. This guide describes the parts of your device, how to charge the battery, how to turn the device on and off, and other useful information. For more information, refer to www.samsung.com. In this section What’s in the box on page 7 Getting to know your device on page 8 Inserting the SIM card on page 11 Charging your device on page 12 Turning the device on and off on page 15Your device and accessories 7 What’s in the box Check your product box for the following items: • Mobile device • USB power adapter • PC data cable • Headset • Quick start guide • The items supplied with your device may vary depending on the software and accessories available in your region or offered by your service provider. • You can obtain additional accessories from your local Samsung dealer. • The supplied accessories perform best for your device. • Accessories other than the supplied ones may not be compatible with your device.8 Your device and accessories Getting to know your device Power button 3.5mm headset jack Speaker Light sensor Touchscreen Multifunction jack Front-facing camera LEDYour device and accessories 9 Volume button Microphone Camera flash Rear camera lens Internal antenna SIM card slot Speaker10 Your device and accessories Before you use the device for the first time, you must charge the battery. (See “Charging your device” on page 12.) Your carrier’s support site and the user manual (available from www.samsung.com) describe basic features of the device, including turning it on for the first time. Be sure to keep the front and back camera lenses clean with lint-free cloth; smudges and fingerprints will distort your pictures. The back camera’s LED flash is next to the lens. Taking pictures and shooting videos is described in the user manual. › About the touch screen Your device’s touch screen lets you easily select items or perform functions. • To avoid scratching the touch screen, do not use sharp tools. • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with water. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water.Your device and accessories 11 • For optimal use of the touch screen, remove the screen protection film before using your device. • Your touch screen has a layer that detects small electrical charges emitted by the human body. For best performance, tap the touch screen with your fingertip. The touch screen will not react to touches of sharp tools, such as a stylus or pen. Inserting the SIM card You must insert a SIM before you use the device. 1 Open the cover to the SIM card slot on the side of the device. 2 Insert the SIM card and close the cover of the SIM card slot.12 Your device and accessories Charging your device Your device has a built-in battery. Before you can use your device, you must charge it fully. • Use only Samsung-approved chargers. Unauthorised chargers can cause batteries to explode or damage your device. • When your battery is low, the device will emit a warning tone and display a low battery message. The battery icon will also be empty and turn red. If the battery level becomes too low, the device will automatically power off. Recharge your battery to continue using your device.Your device and accessories 13 › Charge the device 1 Connect the PC data cable to the USB power adapter and then plug the end of the PC data cable into the multifunction jack. Improperly connecting the travel adapter can cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty.14 Your device and accessories 2 Plug the USB power adapter into a power outlet. • You can use the device while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the battery. • While the device is charging, the touch screen and the touch keys may not function due to an unstable power supply. If this happens, unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet or unplug the PC data cable from the device. • While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. • If your device is not charging properly, bring your device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre. 3 When the device is fully charged, disconnect it from the adapter.Your device and accessories 15 Turning the device on and off You use the Power button to turn the device on and off. Power button › Turn on the device If you turn on your device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your device.16 Your device and accessories › Unblock a SIM If you enter the wrong SIM-unlock PIN three times, the SIM card is blocked and you can’t use your device. You must obtain a PIN Unblocking Key (PUK) from your carrier to unblock the SIM and set a new PIN. › Turn off the device Press and hold the Power button and then select OK. For more about working with the touchscreen and menus, see the user manual.Safety precautions 17 Safety precautions To prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your device, read all of the following information before using your device. Warning: Prevent electric shock, fire, and explosion Do not use damaged power cords or plugs, or loose electrical sockets Do not touch the power cord with wet hands, or disconnect the charger by pulling on the cord Do not bend or damage the power cord Do not use your device while charging or touch your device with wet hands Do not short-circuit the charger or the battery Do not drop or cause an impact to the charger or the battery Do not charge the battery with chargers that are not approved by the manufacturer Do not use your device during a thunderstorm Your device may malfunction and your risk of electric shock is increased. Do not handle a damaged or leaking Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery For safe disposal of your Li-Ion batteries, contact your nearest authorised service centre.18 Safety precautions Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care • Use only Samsung-approved batteries and chargers specifically designed for your device. Incompatible batteries and chargers can cause serious injuries or damage to your device. • Never dispose of batteries or devices in a fire. Follow all local regulations when disposing of used batteries or devices. • Never place batteries or devices on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when overheated. • Never crush or puncture the battery. Avoid exposing the battery to high external pressure, which can lead to an internal short circuit and overheating. Protect the device, batteries, and chargers from damage • Avoid exposing your device and batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures. • Extreme temperatures can cause the deformation of the device and reduce the charging capacity and life of your device and batteries. • Prevent batteries from contacting metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your batteries and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage. • Never use a damaged charger or battery. Caution: Follow all safety warnings and regulations when using your device in restricted areas Turn off your device where prohibited Comply with all regulations that restrict the use of a mobile device in a particular area. Do not use your device near other electronic devices Most electronic devices use radio frequency signals. Your device may interfere with other electronic devices.Safety precautions 19 Do not use your device near a pacemaker • Avoid using your device within a 15 cm range of a pacemaker if possible, as your device can interfere with the pacemaker. • If you must use your device, keep at least 15 cm away from the pacemaker. • To minimise the possible interference with a pacemaker, use your device on the opposite side of your body from the pacemaker. Do not use your device in a hospital or near medical equipment that can be interfered with by radio frequency If you personally use any medical equipment, contact the manufacturer of the equipment to ensure the safety of your equipment from radio frequency. If you are using a hearing aid, contact the manufacturer for information about radio interference Some hearing aids may be interfered with by the radio frequency of your device. Contact the manufacturer to ensure the safety of your hearing aid. Turn off the device in potentially explosive environments • Always comply with regulations, instructions and signs in potentially explosive environments. • Do not use your device at refuelling points (service stations), near fuels or chemicals, and at blasting areas. • Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or accessories. Turn off your device when in an aircraft Using your device in an aircraft is illegal. Your device may interfere with the electronic navigation instruments of the aircraft.20 Safety precautions Electronic devices in a motor vehicle may malfunction due to the radio frequency of your device Electronic devices in your car may malfunction due to radio frequency of your device. Contact the manufacturer for more information. Proper care and use of your mobile device Keep your device dry • Humidity and all types of liquids may damage device parts or electronic circuits. • When wet, turn off your device. Dry your device with a towel and take it to a service centre. • Liquids will change the colour of the label that indicates water damage inside the device. Water damage to your device can void your manufacturer’s warranty. Do not use or store your device in dusty, dirty areas Dust can cause your device to malfunction. Do not store your device on slopes If your device falls, it can be damaged. Do not store your device in hot or cold areas. Use your device at -20 °C to 45 °C • Your device can explode if left inside a closed vehicle, as the inside temperature can reach up to 80 °C. • Do not expose your device to direct sunlight for extended periods of time (such as on the dashboard of a car). • Store the battery at -20 °C to 45 °C.Safety precautions 21 Do not store your device with such metal objects as coins, keys and necklaces • Your device may become deformed or malfunction. • If the battery terminals are in contact with metal objects, it may cause a fire. Do not store your device near magnetic fields • Your device may malfunction or the battery may discharge from exposure to magnetic fields. • Magnetic stripe cards, including credit cards, phone cards, passbooks, and boarding passes, may be damaged by magnetic fields. • Do not use carrying cases or accessories with magnetic closures or allow your device to come in contact with magnetic fields for extended periods of time. Do not store your device near or in heaters, microwaves, hot cooking equipment, or high pressure containers • The battery may leak. • Your device may overheat and cause a fire. Do not drop your device or cause impacts to your device • The screen of your device may be damaged. • If bent or deformed, your device may be damaged or parts may malfunction. Do not use a flash close to the eyes of people or animals Using a flash close to the eyes may cause temporary loss of vision or damage to the eyes.22 Safety precautions Ensure maximum battery and charger life • Avoid charging batteries for more than a week, as overcharging may shorten battery life. • Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use. • Disconnect chargers from power sources when not in use. • Use batteries only for their intended purposes. Use manufacturer-approved batteries, chargers, accessories and supplies • Using generic batteries or chargers may shorten the life of your device or cause the device to malfunction. • Samsung cannot be responsible for the user’s safety when using accessories or supplies that are not approved by Samsung. Do not bite or suck on the device or the battery • Doing so may damage the device or cause explosion. • If children use the device, make sure that they use the device properly. When using the device: • Speak directly into the mouthpiece. • Avoid contact with your device’s internal antenna. Touching the antenna may cause the device to transmit more radio frequency than necessary. • Hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly, use special features that reduce the number of keys you have to press (such as predictive text), and take frequent breaks.Safety precautions 23 Protect your hearing • Excessive exposure to loud sounds can cause hearing damage. • Exposure to loud sounds while driving may distract your attention and cause an accident. • Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source and use only the minimum volume setting necessary to hear your conversation or music. Use caution when using the device while walking or moving Always be aware of your surroundings to avoid injury to yourself or others. Do not carry your device in your back pockets or around your waist You can be injured or damage the device if you fall. Do not disassemble, modify, or repair your device • Any changes or modifications to your device can void your manufacturer’s warranty. For service, take your device to a Samsung Service Centre. • Do not disassemble or puncture the battery, as this can cause explosion or fire. Do not paint or put stickers on your device Paint and stickers can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. If you are allergic to paint or metal parts of the product, you may experience itching, eczema, or swelling of the skin. When this happens, stop using the product and consult your physician.24 Safety precautions When cleaning your device: • Wipe your device or charger with a towel or a rubber. • Do not use chemicals or detergents. Do not use the device if the screen is cracked or broken Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to have it repaired. Do not use the device for anything other than its intended use Avoid disturbing others when using the device in public Do not allow children to use your device Your device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as they could hurt themselves and others, damage the device. Install mobile devices and equipment with caution • Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted. • Avoid placing your device and accessories near or in an air bag deployment area. Improperly installed wireless equipment can cause serious injury when air bags inflate rapidly. Allow only qualified personnel to service your device Allowing unqualified personnel to service your device may result in damage to your device and will void your manufacturer’s warranty.Safety precautions 25 Handle SIM cards with care • Do not remove a card while the device is transferring or accessing information, as this could result in loss of data and/or damage to the card or device. • Protect cards from strong shocks, static electricity, and electrical noise from other devices. • Do not touch gold-coloured contacts or terminals with your fingers or metal objects. If dirty, wipe the card with a soft cloth. Be sure to back up important data Samsung is not responsible for data loss. Do not distribute copyright-protected material Do not distribute copyright-protected material that you have recorded to others without the permission of the content owners. Doing this may violate copyright laws. The manufacturer is not liable for any legal issues caused by the user’s illegal use of copyrighted material.26 Safety precautions Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) certification information Your device conforms to European Union (EU) standards that limit human exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy emitted by radio and telecommunications equipment. These standards prevent the sale of mobile devices that exceed a maximum exposure level (known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR) of 2.0 W/kg. During testing, the maximum SAR recorded for this model was 0.939 W/kg. In normal use, the actual SAR is likely to be much lower, as the device has been designed to emit only the RF energy necessary to transmit a signal to the nearest base station. By automatically emitting lower levels when possible, your device reduces your overall exposure to RF energy. The Declaration of Conformity statement at the back of this manual demonstrates your device’s compliance with the European Radio & Terminal Telecommunications Equipment (R&TTE) directive. When carrying the product or using it while worn on the body maintain a distance of 5 mm from the body to ensure compliance with RF exposure requirements.Safety precautions 27 Correct disposal of this product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. This EEE is compliant with RoHS.28 Safety precautions Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. The rechargeable battery incorporated in this product is not user replaceable. For information on its replacement, please contact your service provider. Disclaimer Some content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorised by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorised by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works, exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device. “THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT CONTENT OR SERVICES SO PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING Safety precautions 29 NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.” Third party services may be terminated or interrupted at any time, and Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung has no control. Without limiting the generality of this disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any interruption or suspension of any content or service made available through this device. Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers.The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10 and detailed in Annex[IV] of Directive 1999/5/EC has been followed with the involvement of the following Notified Body(ies): BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK* Identification mark: 0168 The technical documentation kept at : Samsung Electronics QA Lab. which will be made available upon request. (Representative in the EU) Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK* 2011. 02. 14 Joong-Hoon Choi / Lab Manager (place and date of issue) (name and signature of authorised person) * It is not the address of Samsung Service Centre. For the address or the phone number of Samsung Service Centre, see the warranty card or contact the retailer where you purchased your product. Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE) We, Samsung Electronics declare under our sole responsibility that the product Portable GSM WCDMA Wi-Fi Device : GT-P7100 to which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the following standards and/or other normative documents. SAFETY EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A11 : 2009 SAR EN 50371 : 2002 EN 62311 : 2008 IEC 62209-2 : 2010 Council Recommendation 1999/519/EC EMC EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008) EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005) EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009) EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007) EN 55022 : 2006 + A1 : 2007 EN 55024 : 1998 + A1 : 2001 + A2 : 2003 RADIO EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003) EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006) EN 300 440-1 V1.5.1 (2009-03) EN 300 440-2 V1.3.1 (2009-03) EN 301 908-1 V4.2.1 (2010-03) EN 301 908-2 V4.2.1 (2010-03) EN 301 893 V1.5.1 (2008-12) We hereby declare that [all essential radio test suites have been carried out and that] the above named product is in conformity to all the essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC.Printed in Korea GH68-33610A English (EU). 03/2011. Rev. 1.0 Some of the contents in this manual may differ from your device depending on the software of the device or your service provider. www.samsung.com GT-P7100 GebruiksaanwijzingDeze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruiken 2 Deze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruiken Gefeliciteerd met uw aankoop van het mobiele Samsung-apparaat. Met dit krachtige apparaat, dat u overal kunt gebruiken, hebt u het beste van het web en mobiel computergebruik in handen. Een lichtgewicht, uiterst veelzijdig platform dat past bij een actieve levensstijl. Het mobiele Samsung-apparaat is ontworpen met het Android-besturingssysteem van Google en geeft u toegang tot duizenden handige en onderhoudende applicaties zodat u nog meer kunt genieten van mobiel internet. Dankzij de geïntegreerde draadloze toegang en een gevoelig aanraakscherm kunt u onderweg boeken en kranten lezen, op de hoogte blijven van het laatste nieuws, sport en weer, uw zakelijke en multimediabestanden beheren en op internet zoeken naar kaarten, bedrijfslocaties en meer. Lees dit eerst ● Lees alle veiligheidsinformatie en deze gebruiksaanwijzing zorgvuldig door zodat u verzekerd bent van veilig en correct gebruik voordat u het apparaat in gebruik neemt. ● De beschrijvingen in deze gebruiksaanwijzing zijn gebaseerd op de standaardinstellingen van het apparaat. ● Afbeeldingen en screenshots die in deze gebruiksaanwijzing worden gebruikt, kunnen er anders uitzien dan het daadwerkelijke product. ● De inhoud van deze gebruiksaanwijzing kan van product tot product verschillen of anders zijn dan de software die door serviceproviders wordt geleverd en is onderhevig aan wijzigingen zonder voorafgaande mededelingen. Ga naar www.samsung.com voor de meest recente versie van deze gebruiksaanwijzing.Deze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruiken 3 ● Welke functies en extra diensten beschikbaar zijn, is afhankelijk van het apparaat, de software en uw provider. ● De opmaak en presentatie van deze gebruiksaanwijzing is gebaseerd op het Android-besturingssysteem van Google en kan verschillen afhankelijk van het besturingssysteem van de gebruiker. ● Applicaties en de bijbehorende functies kunnen per land, regio of hardwarespecificatie verschillen. Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor prestatieproblemen die worden veroorzaakt door applicaties van derden. ● Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor prestatie- of compatibiliteitsproblemen die worden veroorzaakt door het bewerken van de instellingen in het register of door het gebruik van aangepaste besturingssysteemsoftware. Wanneer u probeert het besturingssysteem aan te passen, kan dit ertoe leiden dat uw apparaat en applicaties niet meer correct werken. ● U kunt de software voor uw mobiele apparaat upgraden door naar www.samsung.com te gaan. ● Software, geluidsbronnen, achtergronden, afbeeldingen en andere inhoud in dit apparaat zijn onder licentie verstrekt met beperkte gebruiksrechten tussen Samsung en de betreffende eigenaren. Het overnemen en gebruiken van deze materialen voor commerciële of andere doeleinden maakt inbreuk op de copyrightwetgeving. Samsung is niet verantwoordelijk voor inbreuk op het copyright door de gebruiker. ● Bewaar de gebruiksaanwijzing, zodat u deze later kunt raadplegen.Deze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruiken 4 Symbolen in deze gebruiksaanwijzing Bekijk voordat u begint de symbolen die in deze gebruiksaanwijzing zijn opgenomen: Waarschuwing—situaties die letsel kunnen veroorzaken bij u of anderen Let op—situaties die schade aan het apparaat of andere apparatuur kunnen veroorzaken Opmerking—opmerkingen, gebruikstips of aanvullende informatie ► Raadpleeg: pagina's met verwante informatie, bijvoorbeeld: ► p. 12 (betekent “zie pagina 12“) → Gevolgd door: de volgorde van de opties of menu's die u moet selecteren om een stap uit te voeren, bijvoorbeeld: open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Over tablet (staat voor Instellingen, gevolgd door Over tablet)Deze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruiken 5 Copyright Copyright © 2012 Samsung Electronics Deze snelstartgids is beschermd onder internationale auteursrechtwetten. Geen enkel onderdeel van deze snelstartgids mag worden gereproduceerd, gedistribueerd, vertaald of verzonden in welke vorm dan ook of op welke elektronische of mechanische wijze dan ook, inclusief door deze te fotokopiëren, op te nemen of op te slaan in een systeem voor het opslaan en ophalen van informatie, zonder voorafgaande schriftelijke toestemming van Samsung Electronics. Handelsmerken ● SAMSUNG en het SAMSUNG-logo zijn geregistreerde handelsmerken van Samsung Electronics. ● Het Android-logo, Google™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™, YouTube™, Google Play™ Store, en Google Talk™ zijn handelsmerken van Google, Inc. ● Bluetooth® is wereldwijd een geregistreerd handelsmerk van Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ● Windows Media Player ® is een geregistreerd handelsmerk van Microsoft Corporation. ● Wi-Fi ®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, het Wi-Fi CERTIFIED-logo en het Wi-Fi-logo zijn geregistreerde handelsmerken van de Wi-Fi Alliance. ● Alle overige handelsmerken en auteursrechten zijn het eigendom van de betreffende eigenaren.Inhoud 6 Het apparaat in elkaar zetten ....................................... 9 Uitpakken .......................................................................................... 9 De SIM-kaart of USIM-kaart plaatsen ...................................... 10 De batterij opladen ...................................................................... 10 Aan de slag ..................................................................... 13 Het toestel in- en uitschakelen .................................................. 13 Kennismaken met het toestel .................................................... 14 Het aanraakscherm gebruiken .................................................. 18 Het startscherm ............................................................................. 20 Applicaties openen ....................................................................... 23 De instellingen van het apparaat aanpassen ......................... 24 Tekst ingeven ................................................................................. 28 Web ................................................................................. 30 Browser ............................................................................................ 30 Pulse ................................................................................................. 34 Play Store ........................................................................................ 35 YouTube ........................................................................................... 36 Maps ................................................................................................. 36 Latitude ........................................................................................... 38 Plaatsen ........................................................................................... 38 Navigatie ......................................................................................... 39 Communiceren .............................................................. 40 Google Mail .................................................................................... 40 E-mail ............................................................................................... 42 Talk ................................................................................................... 44 Google+ ........................................................................................... 45 Messenger ...................................................................................... 45 InhoudInhoud 7 Entertainment ............................................................... 46 Play Music ....................................................................................... 46 Camera ............................................................................................ 48 Galerij ............................................................................................... 54 Movie Studio .................................................................................. 55 Persoonlijke gegevens ................................................. 58 Personen ......................................................................................... 58 Agenda ............................................................................................ 60 Connectiviteit ................................................................ 62 Pc-verbindingen ............................................................................ 62 Wi-Fi .................................................................................................. 63 Wi-Fi Direct ..................................................................................... 65 Bluetooth ........................................................................................ 66 Mobiel netwerk delen .................................................................. 68 GPS ................................................................................................... 70 VPN-verbindingen ........................................................................ 71 Hulpmiddelen ............................................................... 73 Klok ................................................................................................... 73 Calculator ........................................................................................ 74 Downloads ...................................................................................... 74 Zoeken ............................................................................................. 74 Quickoffice HD ............................................................................... 75 Instellingen .................................................................... 77 Het menu Instellingen openen .................................................. 77 Wi-Fi .................................................................................................. 77 Bluetooth ........................................................................................ 77 Datagebruik ................................................................................... 77 Meer... ............................................................................................... 78 Geluid ............................................................................................... 79Inhoud 8 Weergave ........................................................................................ 80 Opslagruimte ................................................................................. 80 Accu .................................................................................................. 80 Apps ................................................................................................. 80 Accounts & synchronisatie .......................................................... 81 Locatieservices .............................................................................. 81 Beveiliging ...................................................................................... 81 Taal en invoer ................................................................................. 82 Back-up maken en opnieuw instellen ..................................... 85 Datum en tijd ................................................................................. 85 Toegankelijkheid ........................................................................... 86 Opties voor ontwikkelaars .......................................................... 86 Over tablet ...................................................................................... 87 Problemen oplossen .................................................... 88 Veiligheidsvoorschriften ............................................. 92 Index ............................................................................ 102Het apparaat in elkaar zetten 9 Het apparaat in elkaar zetten Uitpakken Controleer of de doos de volgende onderdelen bevat: ● Mobiel apparaat ● Aan de slag-gids Gebruik alleen door Samsung goedgekeurde software. Gekraakte of illegale software kan schade of storingen veroorzaken die niet worden gedekt door de garantie van de fabrikant. ● De bijgeleverde onderdelen bij uw apparaat en de beschikbare accessoires kunnen verschillen, afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. ● Bij de plaatselijke Samsung-dealer kunt u extra accessoires kopen. ● De meegeleverde accessoires werken het beste met uw toestel. ● Accessoires die niet door de fabrikant worden verstrekt, zijn mogelijk niet compatibel met het toestel.Het apparaat in elkaar zetten 10 De SIM-kaart of USIM-kaart plaatsen Wanneer u bij een provider een abonnement afsluit, ontvangt u een SIM-kaart (Subscriber Identity Module). Hierop zijn uw abonnementsgegevens opgeslagen, zoals de PIN-code en optionele diensten. Voor het gebruik van UMTS- of HSDPA-services kunt u een USIM-kaart (Universal Subscriber Identity Module) kopen. De SIM-kaart of USIM-kaart plaatsen: 1 Open het klepje van de SIM-kaartsleuf. 2 Plaats de SIM- of USIM-kaart met de goudkleurige contactpunten naar beneden gericht. 3 Sluit het klepje voor de SIM-kaart. De batterij opladen Het toestel heeft een ingebouwde batterij. Voordat u het apparaat voor het eerst gaat gebruiken of als de batterij langere tijd niet is gebruikt, moet u de batterij opladen. Gebruik alleen door Samsung goedgekeurde opladers. Bij gebruik van niet-goedgekeurde opladers bestaat het risico dat batterijen ontploffen of dat het toestel schade oploopt.Het apparaat in elkaar zetten 11 ● Laad de batterij alleen op met een oplader. U kunt de batterij niet opladen met de USB-kabel. ● Als de batterij bijna leeg is, laat het toestel een waarschuwingstoon horen en wordt er een bericht weergegeven. Het batterijpictogram is ook leeg. Als de batterij zo zwak is dat het toestel niet meer kan worden gebruikt, wordt het toestel automatisch uitgeschakeld. Laad de batterij op als u het apparaat weer wilt gebruiken. ● Als de batterij volledig leeg is, kunt u het apparaat niet inschakelen zelfs als de USB-stroomadapter is aangesloten. Laat een batterij die volledig leeg is enige minuten opladen voordat u probeert het apparaat in te schakelen. 1 Steek de USB-kabel in de USB-voedingsadapter en steek het uiteinde van de USB-kabel vervolgens in de multifunctionele aansluiting. De vorm van de USB-adapter kan verschillen afhankelijk van uw regio. Als u de USB-kabel onjuist aansluit, kan dit grote schade aan het apparaat of de USB-stroomadapter veroorzaken. Schade veroorzaakt door verkeerd gebruik valt niet onder de garantie.Het apparaat in elkaar zetten 12 2 Sluit de USB-stroomadapter op een stopcontact aan. ● U kunt het toestel tijdens het opladen van de batterij blijven gebruiken. Hierdoor kan het echter wel langer duren voordat de batterij volledig is opgeladen. ● Het is mogelijk dat het aanraakscherm tijdens het opladen niet werkt wegens een onregelmatige stroomvoorziening. Koppel in dat geval de USB-stroomadapter los van het stopcontact of koppel de USB-kabel van het apparaat los. ● Tijdens het opladen kan het toestel warm worden. Dit is normaal en heeft geen nadelige invloed op de levensduur of prestaties van het toestel. ● Als uw toestel niet goed oplaadt, kunt u met het toestel en de oplader naar een Samsung Servicecenter gaan. 3 Wanneer de batterij volledig is opgeladen, haalt u eerst de USB-voedingsadapter en USB-kabel uit het toestel en vervolgens trekt u de stekker uit het stopcontact. Om energie te besparen, koppelt u de USB-stroomadapter los wanneer deze niet wordt gebruikt. De USBstroomadapter heeft geen aan/uit-schakelaar, dus u moet de USB-stroomadapter uit het stopcontact halen wanneer de adapter niet wordt gebruikt om energieverspilling te voorkomen. Het apparaat moet in de buurt blijven van het stopcontact tijdens het opladen.13 Aan de slag Aan de slag Het toestel in- en uitschakelen Houd de aan/uit-toets ingedrukt om het apparaat in te schakelen. Als u het toestel voor het eerst inschakelt, volgt u de instructies op het scherm om het toestel in te stellen. Om het apparaat uit te schakelen, houdt u de Aan/uittoets ingedrukt en selecteert u OK. ● Volg alle waarschuwingen en aanwijzingen van geautoriseerd personeel op plaatsen waar het gebruik van draadloze apparatuur onderhevig is aan beperkingen, bijvoorbeeld in vliegtuigen en ziekenhuizen. ● Als u alleen gebruik wilt maken van de diensten waarvoor geen netwerk vereist is, activeert u de vliegmodus. ›Naar de vliegmodus overschakelen Met de vliegmodus (offline-modus) schakelt u de draadloze functies van het toestel uit, zodat u op plaatsen waar geen draadloze apparatuur mag worden gebruikt (bijvoorbeeld in vliegtuigen en ziekenhuizen), kunt werken met functies waarvoor geen netwerk nodig is. Om de vliegmodus in- of uit te schakelen gaat u naar Instellingen →Meer... en selecteert u het selectievakje naast Vliegmodus.14 Aan de slag Kennismaken met het toestel ›Indeling 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 9 10 4 11 12 13 1415 Aan de slag Nummer Functie 1 Lichtsensor 2 Aan/uit/reset/vergrendelingstoets 3 Headsetaansluiting 1 4 Luidspreker 5 LED 6 Cameralens voorzijde 7 Aanraakscherm 8 Multifunctionele aansluiting 9 Cameralens achterzijde 10 Interne antenne 11 SIM-kaartsleuf 12 Microfoon 13 Volumetoets 14 Flitser › Toetsen Toets Functie Aan/uit/ reset 2 / vergrendelen Het toestel inschakelen (ingedrukt houden); het apparaat resetten (8-10 seconden ingedrukt houden); het aanraakscherm vergrendelen. Volume Het volume van het toestel regelen. 2. Als er fatale fouten optreden, de verbinding wordt verbroken of uw apparaat vastloopt, moet u het apparaat mogelijk resetten voordat u het weer kunt gebruiken. 1. Als u een headset incorrect aansluit op het toestel, kan de headsetaansluiting of de headset worden beschadigd.16 Aan de slag › Pictogrammen Welke pictogrammen op het scherm worden weergegeven, is afhankelijk van de regio en provider. Pictogram Betekenis Geen signaal Signaalsterkte GPRS-netwerkverbinding EDGE-netwerkverbinding UMTS-netwerkverbinding Open Wi-Fi-toegangspunten beschikbaar Wi-Fi-toegangspunt verbonden Bluetooth ingeschakeld GPS ingeschakeld Gesynchroniseerd met het web Bezig met gegevens uploaden Bezig met gegevens downloaden Verbonden met computer USB-tethering ingeschakeld Wi-Fi-tethering ingeschakeld Nieuw e-mailbericht Nieuw Google Mail-bericht17 Aan de slag Pictogram Betekenis Roaming (buiten het gebruikelijke servicegebied) Vliegmodus (offline-modus) ingeschakeld Muziek wordt afgespeeld Fout opgetreden of voorzichtigheid vereist Batterijlading 3 Huidige tijd 3. Als u een oplader gebruikt die niet is goedgekeurd door Samsung, wordt dit symbool niet weergegeven.18 Aan de slag Het aanraakscherm gebruiken Met het aanraakscherm van het toestel kunt u eenvoudig items selecteren en functies uitvoeren. Hier krijgt u informatie over het aanraakscherm. ● Raak het aanraakscherm niet met uw vingertoppen aan en gebruik geen scherpe voorwerpen op het aanraakscherm. Dit kan het aanraakscherm beschadigen of ervoor zorgen dat dit niet meer goed werkt. ● Zorg dat het aanraakscherm niet in aanraking komt met andere elektrische apparaten. Door elektrostatische ontladingen kan het aanraakscherm worden beschadigd. ● Zorg dat het aanraakscherm niet met water in aanraking komt. Het aanraakscherm kan in vochtige omstandigheden of door water beschadigd raken. ● Laat het aanraakscherm niet op standby staan voor langere periodes. Dit kan resulteren in echo-afbeeldingen of ghosting. Schade veroorzaakt door verkeerd gebruik valt niet onder de garantie. ● Om het aanraakscherm optimaal te kunnen gebruiken, moet u de beschermende folie verwijderen voordat u het apparaat gebruikt. ● Het aanraakscherm heeft een laag die kleine elektrische ladingen die door het menselijk lichaam worden veroorzaakt, detecteert. Voor de beste prestaties tikt u met uw vingertop op het aanraakscherm. Het aanraakscherm reageert niet als het door scherpe hulpmiddelen zoals een stylus of een pen wordt aangeraakt. U gebruikt de volgende technieken om het aanraakscherm te bedienen: ● Tikken: eenmaal met uw vinger aanraken om een menu, optie of applicatie te selecteren of starten. ● Aangeraakt houden: tik op een item en blijf dit langer dan 2 seconden aanraken. ● Slepen: tik met uw vinger en veeg hiermee omhoog, omlaag, naar links of naar rechts om items in lijsten te verplaatsen.19 Aan de slag ● Verslepen: raak een item aan en verschuif uw vinger om het item te verplaatsen. ● Dubbeltikken: tik tweemaal snel achtereen met uw vinger om tijdens het weergeven van foto’s of webpagina’s in of uit te zoomen. ● Samenknijpen: plaats twee vingers ver uit elkaar en breng ze naar elkaar toe. ›Het aanraakscherm draaien Het toestel beschikt over een bewegingssensor waarmee de oriëntatie van het toestel wordt gedetecteerd. Als u het toestel draait, wordt het scherm automatisch naar de desbetreffende stand overgeschakeld. Als u wilt instellen dat de interface de oriëntatie behoudt, tikt u op de rechterkant van de systeembalk en tikt u vervolgens op de digitale klok om het meldingenpaneel te openen. Sleep de schuifbalk naar AAN naast het Scherm automatisch draaien. ›Het aanraakscherm vergrendelen of ontgrendelen Wanneer u het toestel gedurende een ingestelde tijdsduur niet gebruikt, wordt het aanraakscherm automatisch uitgeschakeld en vergrendeld om onbedoelde invoer te voorkomen. Druk op de aan/uit-toets om het aanraakscherm handmatig te vergrendelen. Om te ontgrendelen schakelt u het scherm in door op de aan/uittoets te drukken, aangeraakt te houden ( ) en naar ( ) rechts te slepen. U kunt de functie voor het vergrendelen van het scherm inschakelen om te voorkomen dat andere gebruikers uw persoonlijke gegevens en informatie op uw toestel gebruiken of openen. ► p. 2620 Aan de slag Het startscherm Wanneer het toestel zich in de standby-stand bevindt, ziet u het startscherm. Op het startscherm kunt u pictogrammen, widgets, snelkoppelingen naar applicaties en andere items bekijken. Scroll naar links of rechts naar een paneel van het startscherm. 1 2 3 Het bovenstaande scherm kan er anders uitzien, afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. Nummer Functie 1 Zoek naar applicaties en bestanden op het apparaat en specifieke gegevens op het web met de widget Google Search. 2 De lijst met applicaties openen. 3 Systeembalk (zie volgende gedeelte).21 Aan de slag Systeembalk Via de systeembalk kunt u snel door schermen navigeren, applicaties openen, systeemgegevens weergeven en meer. 3 2 1 4 Nummer Functie 1 Teruggaan naar het vorige scherm. 2 Teruggaan naar het startscherm. 3 De lijst met recente applicaties openen. 4 Symbolen en de huidige status van uw toestel weergeven; het meldingenvenster openen. › Een applicatiesnelkoppeling aan het startscherm toevoegen 1 Open de applicatielijst en houd een applicatiepictogram vast. 2 Verplaats het pictogram naast de gewenste locatie of verplaats het naar een ander paneel van het startscherm.22 Aan de slag › Een widget aan het startscherm toevoegen Widgets zijn kleine applicaties op het startscherm die handige functies en informatie verschaffen. ● Voor sommige widgets wordt verbinding met webservices gemaakt. Als u een webwidget gebruikt, worden er mogelijk extra kosten in rekening gebracht. ● Welke widgets beschikbaar zijn, is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. 1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer WIDGETS om het widgetpaneel te openen. 2 Scroll naar links of rechts op het widgetpaneel. 3 Blijf een widget aanraken om het toe te voegen aan het startscherm. ›Items verplaatsen op het startscherm 1 Blijf een item dat u wilt verplaatsen, aanraken tot het raster van het startscherm wordt weergegeven. 2 Sleep het item naar de gewenste plek. › Een item op het startscherm verwijderen 1 Tik op het gewenste item en blijf het even aanraken. verschijnt boven aan het startscherm. 2 Sleep het item naar . 3 Wanneer het item rood kleurt, laat u het los.23 Aan de slag ›Werken met het meldingenpaneel Tik vanuit het startscherm of tijdens het gebruiken van de applicatie op de rechterkant van de systeembalk en tik vervolgens op de digitale klok om het meldingenpaneel te openen. Selecteer een optie op het meldingenpaneel. U kunt de huidige status van het toestel zien en de volgende opties gebruiken: ● Vliegmodus: de vliegmodus (offline-modus) in- en uitschakelen. ● Wi-Fi: de Wi-Fi-functie in- en uitschakelen. ● Scherm automatisch draaien: de functie voor automatisch draaien aan- en uitzetten. ● (Helderheid): de helderheid van het scherm aanpassen. ● Meldingen: instellen dat het toestel u waarschuwt voor verschillende gebeurtenissen. ● Instellingen: het menu Instellingen openen. Welke opties beschikbaar zijn, is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. Applicaties openen 1 Selecteer in het startscherm om de lijst met applicaties te openen. 2 Scroll naar links of naar rechts naar een ander scherm. 3 Selecteer een applicatie. Kies WIDGETS om het widgetspaneel weer te geven. 4 Selecteer om terug te gaan naar het vorige scherm. Selecteer om terug te gaan naar het startscherm. › Onlangs gebruikte applicaties openen 1 Selecteer om de applicaties weer te geven die u onlangs hebt gebruikt. 2 Selecteer een applicatie. Om een applicatie uit de lijst te verwijderen houdt u deze aangeraakt → Verwijderen uit lijst.24 Aan de slag De instellingen van het apparaat aanpassen Haal meer uit uw toestel door dit aan uw voorkeuren aan te passen. ›De schermtaal wijzigen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→Taal en invoer→Taal. 2 Selecteer de gewenste taal. ›De huidige tijd en datum instellen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→ Datum en tijd. 2 Selecteer de tijdzone, stel de tijd en datum in en pas eventueel andere instellingen aan. ›De aanraaktoon in- of uitschakelen Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→Geluid →Touch-geluiden. ›Het volume van het apparaat aanpassen 1 Druk de volumetoets omhoog of omlaag. 2 Selecteer en sleep de schuifregelaars om het volumeniveau voor elk geluid aan te passen.25 Aan de slag › Een achtergrond voor het startscherm selecteren 1 Blijf het startscherm op een willekeurig plaats aanraken. 2 Selecteer een optie. ● Achtergronden: achtergrondafbeeldingen die standaard aanwezig zijn op het apparaat. ● Galerij: foto’s die u heeft genomen of van internet gedownloade afbeeldingen. ● Live achtergronden: geanimeerde afbeeldingen die bij het apparaat worden geleverd. 3 Selecteer een item. 4 Selecteer Achtergrond instellen. Als u een item heeft geselecteerd van Galerij, verplaats dit of wijzig eventueel de grootte door het blauwe kader te verslepen en selecteer vervolgens BIJSNIJDEN. Samsung is niet verantwoordelijk voor het gebruik van standaardafbeeldingen of -achtergronden op uw toestel. ›De helderheid van het scherm aanpassen Uw apparaat bevat een lichtsensor, waarmee het niveau van het omgevingslicht kan worden vastgesteld en de helderheid van het scherm automatisch kan worden aanpast. U kunt de helderheid van het scherm ook automatisch instellen. Als het scherm op een hoog helderheidsniveau is ingesteld, raakt de batterij van het toestel sneller leeg. Instellen dat het apparaat de helderheid automatisch aanpast 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→ Weergave→Helderheid. 2 Schakel het selectievakje naast Automatische helderheid in. 3 Selecteer OK. Het apparaat verhoogt automatisch de helderheid in een omgeving met veel licht en verlaagt de helderheid automatisch in een omgeving met weinig licht.26 Aan de slag De helderheid automatisch aanpassen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→ Weergave→Helderheid. 2 Schakel het selectievakje naast Automatische helderheid in. 3 Sleep de schuifregelaar om de helderheid aan te passen. 4 Selecteer OK. › Schermvergrendeling instellen U kunt het aanraakscherm met een ontgrendelpatroon of wachtwoord vergrendelen om te voorkomen dat anderen het toestel zonder uw toestemming gebruiken. ● Wanneer u een schermvergrendeling hebt ingesteld, zal het toestel telkens bij het inschakelen of het ontgrendelen van het scherm om dit patroon vragen. ● Als u uw PIN-code of wachtwoord vergeet, moet u het toestel bij een Samsung Servicecenter laten resetten. ● Samsung is niet verantwoordelijk voor verlies van beveiligingscodes of privégegevens of andere schade die door illegale software wordt veroorzaakt. Een ontgrendelingspatroon instellen 1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→ Beveiliging→Schermvergrendeling→Patroon. 2 Volg de instructies en voorbeeldpatronen op het scherm en selecteer Volgende. 3 Teken een patroon door met uw vinger te vegen en zo ten minste 4 punten met elkaar te verbinden en selecteer Doorgaan. 4 Teken het patroon nogmaals om het te bevestigen en selecteer Bevestigen.27 Aan de slag Een ontgrendelings-PIN-code instellen 1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→ Beveiliging→Schermvergrendeling→PIN. 2 Geef een nieuwe PIN-code (numeriek) in en selecteer Doorgaan. 3 Geef de PIN-code nogmaals in en selecteer OK. Een ontgrendelingswachtwoord instellen 1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→ Beveiliging→Schermvergrendeling→Wachtwoord. 2 Geef een nieuw wachtwoord (alfanumeriek) in en selecteer Doorgaan. 3 Geef het wachtwoord nogmaals in en selecteer OK. ›De SIM- of USIM-kaart vergrendelen U kunt het toestel vergrendelen door de PIN-code die u bij de SIM- of USIM-kaart hebt gekregen, te inschakelen. 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→ Beveiliging→SIM-vergrendeling instellen→SIM-kaart vergrendelen. 2 Geef uw PIN-code in en selecteer OK. Als de PIN-blokkering is ingeschakeld, moet u telkens bij het inschakelen van het toestel de PIN-code ingeven. ● Als u te vaak een onjuiste PIN-code ingeeft, wordt de SIM- of USIM-kaart geblokkeerd. In dat geval moet u een PUKcode (PIN Unlock Key) ingeven om de blokkering van de SIM- of USIM-kaart op te heffen. ● Als u een onjuiste PUK-code voor de SIM- of USIMkaart ingeeft, moet u de blokkering van de kaart bij de serviceprovider laten opheffen.28 Aan de slag Tekst ingeven U kunt tekst invoeren door tekens op het virtuele toetsenbord te selecteren of woorden in de microfoon in te spreken. In sommige talen kunt u geen tekst ingeven. Als u tekst wilt ingeven, moet u de schrijftaal wijzigen in een van de ondersteunde talen. › Tekstinvoer met het Android-toetsenbord Geef tekst in door alfanumerieke toetsen te selecteren en u kunt de volgende toetsen gebruiken: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 8 9 Nummer Functie 1 De cursor verplaatsen naar het volgende tekstinvoerveld. 2 Hiermee kunt u wisselen tussen de cijfer-/ symboolstand en de ABC-stand. 3 Wisselen tussen hoofdletters en kleine letters; tekstinvoer in hoofdletters vergrendelen (dubbeltikken). 4 De tekstinvoermethode wijzigen; keyboardinstellingen openen. 5 Een emoticon invoegen; open de lijst met emoticons (tikken en vasthouden). 6 Uw invoer wissen. 7 Een nieuwe regel beginnen.29 Aan de slag Nummer Functie 8 Tekst via spraak ingeven. Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar wanneer u de functie voor spraakinvoer activeert. 9 Een spatie invoegen. › Tekst kopiëren en plakken U kunt uit een tekstveld tekst kopiëren en plakken in een andere applicatie. 1 Blijf een deel van de tekst aanraken. 2 Sleep of om de tekst te selecteren die moet worden gekopieerd. 3 Selecteer KOPIËREN of KNIPPEN om de tekst op het klembord te plaatsen. 4 In een andere applicatie klikt u op het punt waar de tekst moet worden ingevoegd en houdt u dit vast. 5 Selecteer PLAKKEN om de tekst van het klembord in het tekstveld te plakken.Web 30 Web Browser Leer hoe u uw favoriete webpagina's kunt openen en opslaan. ● Er worden mogelijk extra kosten in rekening gebracht voor het gebruik van internet en het downloaden van mediabestanden. Neem contact op met uw serviceprovider voor informatie. ● Het webbrowsermenu kan afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider een andere naam hebben. ● Welke pictogrammen beschikbaar zijn, is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. ›Webpagina’s bekijken 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Browser om uw startpagina te openen. Als u een specifieke webpagina wilt openen, selecteert u het URL-invoerveld en voert u het webadres van de webpagina in. 2 Navigeer door webpagina's met de volgende toetsen: Het bovenstaande scherm kan er anders uitzien, afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider.Web 31 Nummer Functie 1 Het huidige tabblad sluiten. 2 Terug- of vooruitgaan naar webpagina's in de geschiedenis. 3 De huidige webpagina opnieuw laden; als webpagina’s worden geladen, wordt dit pictogram gewijzigd in . 4 Een nieuw venster openen. 5 Zoeken naar informatie. 6 Een lijst met webbrowseropties openen. 7 Een lijst met opgeslagen favorieten en de recente browsergeschiedenis openen. 8 De huidige webpagina instellen als favoriet. Gebruik tijdens het browsen van een webpagina de volgende opties: ● Als u wilt in- of uitzoomen, plaatst u twee vingers op het scherm en beweegt u ze uit elkaar (beweeg uw vingers naar elkaar toe om uit te zoomen). Als u kantelbewegingen hebt geactiveerd, kunt u in- of uitzoomen door twee punten te blijven aanraken met uw vingers en het toestel naar voren en naar achteren te kantelen. ● Als u de huidige webpagina opnieuw wilt laden, selecteert u →Vernieuwen. ● Als u achteruit of vooruit naar webpagina’s in de browsergeschiedenis wilt, selecteert u →Volgende. ● Om een nieuw tabblad te openen selecteert u →Nieuw tabblad. ● Als u een nieuw tabblad wilt openen waarin geen cookies worden opgeslagen, selecteert u →Nieuw incognitotabblad.Web 32 ● Als u het webadres van de webpagina naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u →Pagina delen. ● Als u naar tekst op de webpagina wilt zoeken, selecteert u → Zoeken op pagina. ● Als u wilt overschakelen naar de desktopweergave, selecteert u →Desktopversie opvragen. ● Als u de huidige webpagina wilt opslaan en later offline wilt lezen, selecteert u →Opslaan voor offline lezen. ● Als u de details van een pagina wilt weergeven, selecteert u → Pagina-infomatie. ● Als u de browserinstellingen wilt aanpassen, selecteert u → Instellingen. ›Met spraak informatie zoeken De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Browser. 2 Selecteer het URL-invoerveld. 3 Selecteer en spreek een trefwoord in de microfoon van het apparaat. Er wordt naar informatie en webpagina's gezocht die met het trefwoord samenhangen. ›Meerdere pagina's openen U kunt meerdere pagina's openen en schakelen tussen deze pagina's. 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Browser. 2 Selecteer om een nieuw tabblad te openen. 3 Open een andere webpagina in het nieuwe venster. 4 Als u wilt schakelen tussen de geopende vensters, selecteert u de titel van een venster.Web 33 › Favoriete webpagina's opslaan Als u het webadres van de webpagina kent, kunt u dit handmatig als favoriet toevoegen. 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Browser. 2 Voer een webadres in of navigeer naar een webpagina. 3 Selecteer om de huidige pagina als favoriet toe te voegen. 4 Voer een naam in voor de favoriet. 5 Voer het webadres in voor uw favoriete webpagina en kies vervolgens een locatie om de favoriet toe te voegen (indien noodzakelijk). 6 Selecteer OK. Als u opties voor favorieten wilt gebruiken, selecteert u en blijft u een favoriet aanraken: ● Selecteer Openen om de webpagina in het huidige venster te openen. ● Selecteer Openen op nieuw tabblad om de webpagina in een nieuw venster te openen. ● Selecteer Bladwijzer bewerken om de favoriet te bewerken. ● Als u een snelkoppeling naar de favoriet wilt toevoegen aan het startscherm, selecteert u Snelkoppeling naar startpagina toevoegen. ● Als u het webadres (de URL) van de webpagina naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u Link delen. ● Als u het webadres (de URL) van de webpagina wilt kopiëren, selecteert u Link-URL kopiëren. ● Als u de favoriet wilt verwijderen, selecteert u Bladwijzer verwijderen. ● Als u de webpagina wilt gebruiken als startpagina van de browser, selecteert u Instellen als startpagina.Web 34 › Recente geschiedenis openen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Browser. 2 Selecteer →GESCHIEDENIS. 3 Selecteer een webpagina die u wilt openen. Pulse Zo leest u nieuwsartikelen op uw apparaat en voegt u feeds toe voor uw favoriete nieuwsonderwerpen. › Feeds lezen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Pulse. 2 Als u deze applicatie voor het eerst start, selecteert u Okay en tikt u op het scherm om de hint te wissen. 3 Selecteer om feeds bij te werken. Als u de feeds wilt lezen die u hebt toegevoegd aan uw lijst met favorieten, selecteert u . 4 Scroll omhoog of omlaag om een feedbron te selecteren. 5 Scroll naar links of rechts en selecteer een feed. Gebruik bij het lezen van de feed de volgende opties: ● Selecteer om de feed aan uw favorietenlijst toe te voegen. ● Selecteer of om de feed naar sociale netwerksites te uploaden. ● Als u de feed naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u . ● Als u wilt teruggaan naar een feedlijst, selecteert u . › Feedbronnen beheren 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Pulse. 2 Selecteer om de lijst met feedbronnen weer te geven. 3 Selecteer of om een feedbron toe te voegen of te verwijderen.Web 35 Play Store U kunt de functionaliteit van uw apparaat uitbreiden door extra applicaties op basis van het Android-platform te installeren. Met Play Store kunt u makkelijk en snel games en mobiele applicaties aanschaffen. De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. › Een applicatie downloaden en installeren 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Play Store. U kunt ook WINKEL in de rechterbovenhoek van de lijst met applicaties selecteren. 2 Als u deze applicatie voor het eerst start, selecteert u Accepteren. 3 Zoek een applicatie en download deze naar het apparaat. Wanneer de download is voltooid, installeert het apparaat de applicatie automatisch. › Een applicatie verwijderen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Play Store. 2 Selecteer . 3 Selecteer het item dat u wilt verwijderen. 4 Selecteer Verwijderen→OK.Web 36 YouTube Leer hoe u video's via YouTube kunt bekijken en uploaden. De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. › Video's kijken 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer YouTube. 2 Selecteer een video. 3 Tik op een videoscherm en selecteer om een volledig scherm weer te geven. 4 Regel het afspelen met de virtuele toetsen. › Video's uploaden 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer YouTube. 2 Selecteer ACCOUNT. 3 Selecteer uw Google-account als dit is gekoppeld aan YouTube. U kunt ook Account toevoegen selecteren en een account instellen om u aan te melden bij YouTube. 4 Selecteer UPLOADEN en selecteer een video. 5 Geef de details voor de upload in en selecteer Uploaden. Maps Leer hoe u met Google Maps™ uw locatie zoekt, op de kaart naar straten, steden of landen zoekt en een routebeschrijving krijgt. ● De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. ● U moet locatieservices inschakelen om uw locatie te vinden en op de kaart te kunnen zoeken. ► p. 70Web 37 › Zoeken naar een specifieke locatie 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Maps. De kaart geeft uw huidige locatie weer. 2 Selecteer . 3 Geef een trefwoord voor de locatie in. Als u een locatie wilt zoeken met uw stem, selecteert u . 4 Selecteer de locatie waarvoor u de details wilt weergeven. ● Selecteer Zoekresultaten om alle zoekresultaten weer te geven. ● Als u uw huidige locatie wilt weergeven, selecteert u . ● Als u een plaats in de buurt wilt zoeken, selecteert u . ● Als u een routebeschrijving naar een specifieke bestemming wilt ophalen, selecteert u . ● Als u lagen aan de kaart wilt toevoegen, selecteert u . ● Als u een lijst met andere opties wilt openen, selecteert u . ● Als u wilt in- of uitzoomen, plaatst u twee vingers op het scherm en breng ze langzaam bij elkaar of verder uit elkaar. U kunt ook dubbeltikken op het scherm. Als u wilt terugkeren naar het oorspronkelijk formaat, dubbeltikt u op het scherm. ● Als u een ster aan de locatie wilt toevoegen, selecteert u de ballon met de locatienaam → . › Routebeschrijvingen naar een specifieke bestemming opvragen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Maps. 2 Selecteer . 3 Geef het adres van de startlocatie en de eindbestemming in. Als u een adres uit uw contactenlijst of plaatsen met een ster wilt invoegen of de locatie op de kaart wilt aanwijzen, selecteer dan → een optie.Web 38 4 Selecteer een reismethode (auto, bus of lopen) en selecteer Tonen. De route wordt aangegeven op de kaart. Afhankelijk van de geselecteerde reismethode kunnen meerdere routes worden weergegeven. 5 Wanneer u klaar bent, selecteert u →Kaart wissen. Latitude Leer hoe u uw locatie met uw vrienden kunt delen en locaties van vrienden kunt bekijken via Google Latitude™. De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Latitude. Het toestel meldt zich automatisch bij Latitude aan. 2 Selecteer →Vrienden toevoegen→ een optie. 3 Selecteer een vriend die u wilt toevoegen of geef een e-mailadres in en selecteer Ja. Wanneer uw vriend de uitnodiging accepteert, kunt u locaties delen. 4 Selecteer een vriend in de lijst. De locaties van uw vrienden worden op de kaart gemarkeerd door hun foto’s. Plaatsen Hier vindt u informatie over hoe u een plaats in de buurt kunt zoeken. De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Plaatsen. 2 Selecteer een categorie. Uw toestel zoekt naar plaatsen in de buurt van uw huidige locatie, die betrekking hebben op de categorie.Web 39 3 Selecteer een plaatsnaam om de details te bekijken. Gebruik de volgende opties tijdens het bekijken van gegevens: ● Selecteer om de plaats op de kaart weer te geven. ● Selecteer om de route naar die plaats weer te geven. ● Als u het telefoonnummer van de plaats wilt weergeven, selecteert u . Navigatie Hier leest u hoe u het GPS-navigatiesysteem kunt gebruiken om met uw stem uw bestemming te zoeken en weer te geven. ● Navigatiekaarten, uw huidige locatie en andere navigatiegegevens kunnen afwijken van uw werkelijk locatiegegevens. U moet altijd letten op de omstandigheden op de weg, verkeer en andere factoren die mogelijk invloed hebben op uw rijden, en alle veiligheidswaarschuwingen en regels volgen tijdens het rijden. ● De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Navigatie. 2 Als u deze applicatie voor het eerst start, selecteert u Accepteren. 3 Geef met een van de volgende methoden uw bestemming in: ● Bestemming inspreken: spreek uw bestemming in, bijvoorbeeld “Navigeren naar bestemming“. ● Bestemming typen: voer uw bestemming in met het virtuele toetsenbord. ● Contacten: selecteer uw bestemming met een adres van uw contacten. ● Plaatsen met ster: selecteer uw bestemming in de lijst met plaatsen met een ster. 4 Volg de instructies op het scherm om de navigatieservice te gebruiken.Communiceren 40 Communiceren Google Mail U kunt nieuwe e-mailberichten van Gmail™ naar uw Postvak IN downloaden. Wanneer u deze applicatie opent, verschijnt het scherm van het Postvak IN. In de titelbalk wordt het totale aantal ongelezen berichten weergegeven en de ongelezen berichten worden vet weergegeven. ● De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. ● Het menu Google Mail kan, afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider, een andere naam hebben. › Een e-mailbericht verzenden 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Google Mail→ . 2 Selecteer het ontvangersveld en geef een e-mailadres in. 3 Selecteer het onderwerpveld en geef een onderwerp in. 4 Selecteer het tekstveld en geef de e-mailtekst in. ● Selecteer om een foto bij te sluiten. ● Selecteer rechts van een bijlagenaam om de foto in de bijlage te verwijderen. 5 Selecteer VERZENDEN om het bericht te verzenden. Als u offline bent of zich buiten het servicegebied bevindt, wordt het bericht in de berichtenthread bewaard totdat u weer online en in uw servicegebied bent.Communiceren 41 › Een e-mailbericht weergeven 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Google Mail. 2 Selecteer om de berichtenlijst bij te werken. 3 Selecteer een e-mailbericht. In de berichtweergave hebt u de volgende opties: ● Als u een nieuw bericht wilt opstellen, selecteert u . ● Als u een e-mailonderwerp wilt zoeken, selecteert u . ● Als u het bericht wilt archiveren, selecteert u . ● Als u het bericht wilt verwijderen, selecteert u . ● Als u een label aan het bericht wilt toevoegen, selecteert u . ● Scroll naar links of rechts om naar de volgende of de vorige pagina te gaan. ● Als u het bericht wilt beantwoorden, selecteert u . ● Als u uw antwoord naar alle ontvangers van het bericht wilt sturen, selecteert u . ● Als u het bericht naar anderen wilt doorsturen, selecteert u . ● Als u een ster aan het bericht wilt toevoegen, selecteert u . ● Als u een bijlage wilt weergeven, selecteert u WEERGEVEN. Als u het bericht op uw apparaat wilt opslaan, selecteert u OPSLAAN. ● Als u het bericht op ongelezen wilt zetten, selecteert u → Markeren als ongelezen. ● Als u het bericht wilt markeren als belangrijk, selecteert u → Markeren als belangrijk. ● Als u het bericht wilt verbergen, selecteert u →Negeren. ● Als u het bericht wilt registreren in de spamlijst, selecteert u → Spam rapporteren. ● Als u de berichten opnieuw wilt laden, selecteert u → Vernieuwen. ● Als u een label aan een bericht wilt toevoegen, selecteert u → Labels beheren. ● Als u de e-mailinstellingen wilt aanpassen, selecteert u → Instellingen. Beschikbare opties kunnen verschillen afhankelijk van de account.Communiceren 42 E-mail Hier vindt u informatie over hoe u e-mailberichten via uw persoonlijke of zakelijke e-mailaccount kunt verzenden en bekijken. › Een e-mailaccount instellen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer E-mail. 2 Geef uw e-mailadres en wachtwoord in. 3 Selecteer Volgende (voor algemene e-mailaccounts) of Handmatig instellen (voor e-mailaccounts van andere bedrijven). 4 Volg de instructies op het scherm. 5 Als u meer e-mailaccounts wilt toevoegen, selecteert u → Instellingen→ACCOUNT TOEVOEGEN en herhaalt u stap 2-4. Als u klaar bent met het instellen van de e-mailaccount, worden de e-mailberichten naar uw toestel gedownload. Als u meer dan twee accounts hebt gemaakt, kunt u kiezen welke e-mailaccount u gebruikt. Selecteer linksboven in het scherm een accountnaam en selecteer de account waarvoor u de berichten wilt ophalen. › Een e-mailbericht verzenden 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer E-mail→ . 2 Voeg ontvangers van uw bericht toe. Geef e-mailadressen handmatig in en scheid ze van elkaar met een puntkomma. 3 Selecteer + CC/BCC en voeg meer ontvangers toe. 4 Selecteer het onderwerpveld en geef een onderwerp in. 5 Selecteer het tekstveld en geef uw berichttekst in. 6 Selecteer → bestand om toe te voegen. 7 Selecteer VERZENDEN om het bericht te verzenden. Als u offline bent of zich buiten het servicegebied bevindt, wordt het bericht in het Postvak UIT bewaard totdat u weer online en in uw servicegebied bent.Communiceren 43 › Een e-mailbericht weergeven Wanneer u een e-mailaccount opent, kunt u eerder opgehaalde e-mailberichten offline bekijken of verbinding met de e-mailserver maken om nieuwe berichten te bekijken. Nadat u e-mailberichten hebt opgehaald, kunt u ze offline bekijken. 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer E-mail. 2 Selecteer om de berichtenlijst bij te werken. 3 Selecteer een e-mailbericht. In de berichtweergave hebt u de volgende opties: ● U gaat naar het vorige of volgende bericht door Nieuwer of Ouder te selecteren. ● Als u een nieuw bericht wilt opstellen, selecteert u . ● Als u een e-mailonderwerp wilt zoeken, selecteert u . ● Als u het bericht wilt verwijderen, selecteert u . ● Om het bericht naar een andere map te verplaatsen selecteert u → een map. ● Als u het bericht wilt beantwoorden, selecteert u . ● Als u uw antwoord naar alle ontvangers van het bericht wilt sturen, selecteert u . ● Als u het bericht naar anderen wilt doorsturen, selecteert u . ● Als u een ster aan het bericht wilt toevoegen, selecteert u . ● Als u het bericht op ongelezen wilt zetten, selecteert u → Markeren als ongelezen. ● Als u de berichten opnieuw wilt laden, selecteert u → Vernieuwen. ● Als u de e-mailinstellingen wilt aanpassen, selecteert u → Instellingen. ● Selecteer het tabblad bijlage om een bijlage weer te geven of op te slaan. Als u een bijlage wilt weergeven, selecteert u WEERGEVEN. Als u het bericht op uw apparaat wilt opslaan, selecteert u OPSLAAN. De beschikbare opties kunnen verschillen in de liggende en staande weergave.Communiceren 44 Talk Chat met vrienden en familie via Google Talk™. De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw regio of serviceprovider. ›Uw status instellen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Talk. 2 Voeg uw Google-account toe (indien noodzakelijk). 3 Pas uw status, afbeelding en weergavebericht aan. › Vrienden aan de vriendenlijst toevoegen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Talk→ . 2 Geef een e-mailadres van de vriend in en selecteer GEREED. Wanneer uw vriend de uitnodiging accepteert, wordt de vriend aan uw vriendenlijst toegevoegd. › Een chatsessie starten 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Talk. 2 Selecteer een vriend uit de vriendenlijst. Het chatscherm wordt geopend. 3 Geef een bericht in en verstuur het. ● Om meer vrienden aan een chatsessie toe te voegen selecteert u →Toevoegen aan chat. ● Selecteer in de vriendenlijst een vriend om tussen actieve chatsessies om te schakelen. ● Als u videochatten wilt gebruiken, selecteert u . ● Als u chatten wilt gebruiken, selecteert u . ● Om de chatsessie te beëindigen, selecteert u →Chat beëindigen.Communiceren 45 Google+ Hier vindt u informatie over het gebruik van de sociale netwerkservice Google. U kunt groepen maken en chatberichten verzenden en ontvangen en uw foto's te uploaden. 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Google+. Als u deze applicatie voor het eerst start, volgt u de instructies op het scherm om de accountinstellingen te voltooien. 2 Selecteer een functie voor sociale netwerken. Messenger Hier vindt u informatie over chatten met vrienden en familie via de chatservice Google+. 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Messenger. Als u deze applicatie voor het eerst start, volgt u de instructies op het scherm om de accountinstellingen te voltooien. 2 Geef een bericht in en verstuur het.46 Entertainment Entertainment Play Music Zo luistert u met Play Music naar uw favoriete muziek als u onderweg bent. ● Afhankelijk van de software in uw toestel worden bepaalde bestandsindelingen niet ondersteund. ● Als een bestand groter is dan het beschikbare geheugen, kan er een fout optreden bij het openen van het bestand. ● De afspeelkwaliteit kan verschillen afhankelijk van het inhoudstype. ● Sommige bestanden kunnen mogelijk niet goed worden afgespeeld, afhankelijk van de manier waarop ze zijn gecodeerd. ›Muziekbestanden op uw apparaat zetten U moet eerst bestanden overzetten naar uw toestel: ● Draadloos downloaden van internet. ► p. 30 ● Ontvangen via Bluetooth. ► p. 67 ● Synchroniseren met Windows Media Player 11. ► p. 62 ›Muziek afspelen Nadat u muziekbestanden hebt overgezet naar uw toestel: 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Play Music. 2 Selecteer een muziekcategorie. U kunt de weergavemodus boven aan het scherm wijzigen.47 Entertainment 3 Selecteer een muziekbestand. 4 Regel het afspelen met de volgende symbolen: Pictogram Functie De shufflestand inschakelen. De herhaalstand wijzigen (uit, een bestand herhalen of alle bestanden herhalen). Het afspelen opnieuw starten; ga terug naar het vorige bestand (dubbeltikken). Het afspelen onderbreken. Selecteer om door te gaan met afspelen. Ga verder naar het volgende bestand. Gebruik de volgende opties tijdens het afspelen van muziek: ● Als u een geluidseffect wilt kiezen, selecteert u → Geluidseffecten. ● Als u een muziekbestand wilt toevoegen aan een afspeellijst, selecteert u →Toev. aan afspeellijst. ● Als u het muziekbestand wilt verwijderen, selecteert u → Verwijderen. › Een afspeellijst maken 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Play Music. 2 Selecteer een muziekcategorie → een muziekbestand. 3 Selecteer →Toev. aan afspeellijst→Nieuwe afspeellijst. 4 Geef een titel voor uw nieuwe afspeellijst in en selecteer OK.48 Entertainment Camera Hier wordt beschreven hoe u foto's en video's kunt maken en weergeven. ● De camera wordt automatisch uitgeschakeld wanneer u deze een bepaalde tijd niet gebruikt. ● De geheugencapaciteit kan variëren naar gelang de opnameomstandigheden of de scène die wordt opgenomen. › Een foto nemen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Camera. 2 Richt de lens op het onderwerp en pas eventueel de compositie aan. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Nummer Functie 1 Statusinstelling weergeven. 2 De image-viewer openen om de foto’s en video’s te bekijken die u heeft gemaakt. 3 Wisselen tussen de cameralens aan de voorzijde en aan de achterzijde. 4 Een foto nemen. 5 De camera-instellingen wijzigen.49 Entertainment Nummer Functie 6 In- of uitzoomen. ● Om in te zoomen schuift u omhoog naar . ● Om uit te zoomen schuift u omlaag naar . 7 Overschakelen naar de camcorder of panoramamodus. 3 Selecteer de blauwe knop om een foto te maken. De foto wordt automatisch opgeslagen. › Een panoramafoto maken 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Camera. 2 Selecteer het panoramapictogram om naar panoramamodus over te schakelen. 3 Richt de lens op het punt waar u wilt beginnen met het maken van een panoramafoto. 4 Selecteer de groene knop om te gaan opnemen en verplaats de lens langzaam in één richting tot deze het eindpunt van het panorama heeft bereikt. 5 Selecteer de groene knop opnieuw om de opname te stoppen. De foto wordt automatisch opgeslagen. Nadat de foto is gemaakt, selecteert u de afbeeldingsviewer om deze weer te geven. ● Als u de foto direct naar de anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u een optie aan de rechterkant van het scherm. ● Tik nogmaals op het scherm of selecteer het pictogram van de image-viewer aan de rechterkant om meer foto’s weer te geven. Als u meer foto’s wilt zien, scrollt u naar links of rechts. U kunt ook op het scherm tikken en de miniaturen van foto’s onder aan het scherm selecteren.50 Entertainment ● Als u wilt in- of uitzoomen, plaatst u twee vingers op het scherm en breng ze langzaam bij elkaar of verder uit elkaar. U kunt ook dubbeltikken op het scherm. Als u wilt terugkeren naar het oorspronkelijk formaat, dubbeltikt u op het scherm. ● Als u een foto naar anderen wilt verzenden om te delen, selecteert u → een optie. ● Als u een foto wilt verwijderen, selecteert u →Verwijderen. ● Als u een diashow wilt starten, selecteert u →Diavoorstelling. Klik op het scherm om de diashow te stoppen. ● Als u de foto wilt bewerken met de afbeeldingseditor, selecteert u →Bewerken. ● Als u de afbeelding linksom wilt draaien, selecteert u → Linksom draaien. ● Als u de afbeelding rechtsom wilt draaien, selecteert u → Rechtsom draaien. ● Als u een gedeelte uit de afbeelding wilt snijden, selecteert u →Bijsnijden. ● Als u de afbeelding als achtergrond of afbeelding voor een contact wilt instellen, selecteert u →Foto instellen als. ● Als u details van een foto wilt weergeven, selecteert u → Details. › Camera-instellingen wijzigen Selecteer voor het maken van een foto en selecteer een van de volgende pictogrammen om de camerainstellingen aan te passen: Pictogram Optie Functie Flitsmodus De flitserinstelling wijzigen. U kunt de flitser handmatig in- of uitschakelen. Witbalans De kleurbalans aan de lichtomstandigheden aanpassen. Belichting De belichtingswaarde aanpassen om de helderheid te wijzigen. Scène modus De scènestand wijzigen. 51 Entertainment Pictogram Optie Functie Camerainstellingen ● Locatie opslaan: locatiegegevens opnemen bij de foto's. ● Grootte van foto: selecteer de grootte van uw foto’s. ● Scherpstelmodus: een scherpstelmodus selecteren. U kunt close-ups maken, of instellen dat de camera automatisch op het onderwerp of menselijke gezichten scherpstelt. ● Standaardwaarden herstellen: de camera-instellingen resetten. Selecteer OK om de camerainstellingen te resetten. Selecteer om terug te keren naar het voorbeeldscherm. › Een video opnemen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Camera. 2 Camcorderpictogram om naar camcordermodus over te schakelen. 3 Richt de lens op het onderwerp en pas eventueel de compositie aan. 1 2 3 4 5 652 Entertainment Nummer Functie 1 De image-viewer openen om de foto’s en video’s te bekijken die u heeft gemaakt. 2 Overschakelen naar de voorste camera en een video van uzelf opnemen. 3 Een video opnemen. 4 De camera-instellingen wijzigen. 5 In- of uitzoomen. ● Om in te zoomen schuift u omhoog naar . ● Om uit te zoomen schuift u omlaag naar . 6 Schakel over naar de camera- of panoramamodus. 4 Selecteer de rode knop om de opname te starten. 5 Selecteer de rode knop opnieuw om de opname te stoppen. De video wordt automatisch opgeslagen. Nadat een video is gemaakt, selecteert u de afbeeldingsviewer om deze weer te geven. ● Als u de video direct naar de anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u een optie aan de rechterkant van het scherm. ● Tik nogmaals op het scherm of selecteer het pictogram van de image-viewer aan de rechterkant om meer video’s weer te geven. Als u meer video’s wilt zien, scrollt u naar links of rechts. U kunt ook op het scherm tikken en de miniaturen van video’s onder aan het scherm selecteren. ● Als u een video wilt afspelen, selecteert u . ● Als u een video naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u → een optie. ● Als u een video wilt verwijderen, selecteert u →Verwijderen. ● Als u details van een video wilt weergeven, selecteert u → Details.53 Entertainment › Camcorderinstellingen aanpassen Selecteer voor het maken van een video en selecteer een van de volgende pictogrammen om de camerainstellingen aan te passen: Pictogram Optie Functie Flitsmodus De flitserinstelling wijzigen. U kunt de flitser handmatig in- of uitschakelen. Witbalans De kleurbalans aan de lichtomstandigheden aanpassen. Effecten Een speciaal effect toepassen. Time-lapseinterval Stelt de intervaltijd in voor het opnemen van een serie video’s. Videokwaliteit Selecteer een optie voor videokwaliteit. Camerainstellingen ● Locatie opslaan: locatiegegevens opnemen bij de foto's. ● Standaardwaarden herstellen: de camera-instellingen resetten. Selecteer OK om de camerainstellingen te resetten. Selecteer om terug te keren naar het voorbeeldscherm.54 Entertainment Galerij Hier vindt u informatie over het bekijken van foto's en video's in het geheugen van het toestel. ● Afhankelijk van de software in uw toestel worden bepaalde bestandsindelingen niet ondersteund. ● Als een bestand groter is dan het beschikbare geheugen, kan er een fout optreden bij het openen van het bestand. ● De afspeelkwaliteit kan verschillen afhankelijk van het inhoudstype. ● Sommige bestanden kunnen mogelijk niet goed worden afgespeeld, afhankelijk van de manier waarop ze zijn gecodeerd. › Een foto bekijken 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Galerij. 2 Selecteer een map → een afbeelding. Gebruik de volgende opties tijdens het bekijken van een foto: ● Als u meer foto's wilt zien, scrollt u naar links of rechts. ● Als u wilt in- of uitzoomen, plaatst u twee vingers op het scherm en breng ze langzaam bij elkaar of verder uit elkaar. U kunt ook dubbeltikken op het scherm. Als u wilt terugkeren naar het oorspronkelijk formaat, dubbeltikt u op het scherm. Als u kantelbewegingen heeft geactiveerd, kunt u in- of uitzoomen door twee punten aan te raken met uw vingers en het apparaat naar voren en achteren te kantelen. ● Als u een foto naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u → een optie. ● Als u een foto wilt verwijderen, selecteert u →Verwijderen. ● Als u een diashow wilt starten, selecteert u →Diavoorstelling. Klik op het scherm om de diashow te stoppen. ● Als u de foto wilt bewerken met de afbeeldingseditor, selecteert u →Bewerken. ● Als u de afbeelding linksom wilt draaien, selecteert u → Linksom draaien.55 Entertainment ● Als u de afbeelding rechtsom wilt draaien, selecteert u → Rechtsom draaien. ● Als u een gedeelte uit de afbeelding wilt snijden, selecteert u →Bijsnijden. ● Als u de afbeelding als achtergrond of afbeelding voor een contact wilt instellen, selecteert u →Foto instellen als. ● Als u details van een foto wilt weergeven, selecteert u → Details. › Een video afspelen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Galerij. 2 Selecteer een map → een video. 3 Regel het afspelen met de virtuele toetsen. Gebruik de volgende opties tijdens het afspelen van een video: ● Als u een video naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u → een optie. ● Als u een foto wilt verwijderen, selecteert u →Verwijderen. ● Als u details van een video wilt weergeven, selecteert u → Details. Movie Studio U kunt video's bewerken en verschillende effecten toepassen. ● Sommige videobestanden in Galerij kunnen mogelijk niet worden weergegeven afhankelijk van de videoresoluties en codecs. ● De afspeelkwaliteit kan verschillen afhankelijk van het inhoudstype. ● Sommige bestanden kunnen mogelijk niet goed worden afgespeeld, afhankelijk van de manier waarop ze zijn gecodeerd.56 Entertainment › Een film maken 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Movie Studio. 2 Selecteer Nieuw project maken. 3 Voer een naam in voor het project en selecteer OK. 4 Selecteer TOEVOEGEN→ een optie. ● Selecteer Een video opnemen om een nieuwe video te maken. ● Als u een nieuwe foto wilt maken, selecteert u Een foto maken. ● Selecteer Videoclip importeren om een videobestand toe te voegen. ● Selecteer Afbeelding importeren om een afbeeldingsbestand toe te voegen. Selecteer om nog een video vóór of na een item toe te voegen. 5 Gebruik de volgende opties om een item te bewerken: ● Selecteer om de tijdsruimte waarin een afbeelding verschijnt te wijzigen de afbeeldingsminiatuur en sleep de blauwe hendels naar links of rechts. ● Als u een segment van een video wilt bijsnijden tikt u op de videominiatuur en versleept u de hendels aan beide kanten. ● Als u afbeeldingen of video's opnieuw wilt ordenen, blijft u een item aanraken en sleept u het naar een nieuwe locatie. ● Om een titel aan een afbeelding of video toe te voegen tikt u op een item een selecteert u TITEL→Titel toevoegen. ● Om effecten tussen afbeeldingen of video’s toe te voegen tikt u op een item en selecteert u EFFECT→ een effectoptie. U kunt ook overlangs effecten toevoegen door aan beide zijden van het item te selecteren. ● Om een geluidsspoor aan uw film toe te voegen selecteert u onder aan de tijdlijn. ● Om afbeeldingen of video’s te verwijderen klikt u op een item en selecteert u vervolgens →Verwijderen.57 Entertainment 6 Selecteer GEREED (indien noodzakelijk) als u klaar bent. 7 Als u klaar bent met bewerken, selecteer dan →Film exporteren. 8 Een resolutieoptie selecteren →Exporteren. › Een film afspelen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Movie Studio. 2 Selecteer een geëxporteerde film. 3 Selecteer →Geëxporteerde film afspelen. Als u de film naar anderen wilt verzenden tijdens het afspelen, selecteert u → een optie. › Een film delen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Movie Studio. 2 Selecteer een geëxporteerde film. 3 Selecteer →Film delen.Persoonlijke gegevens 58 Persoonlijke gegevens Personen Hier vindt u informatie over hoe u een lijst met uw persoonlijke of zakelijke contacten kunt maken en beheren. U kunt voor uw contacten namen, telefoonnummers, e-mailadressen, verjaardagen en nog veel meer opslaan. › Een contact maken 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen. 2 Voeg uw Google-account toe (indien noodzakelijk). 3 Selecteer ALLE→ . 4 Selecteer OK als u het nieuwe contact wilt synchroniseren met uw huidige account. Om het contact aan een andere account toe te voegen selecteert u Nieuw account toevoegen en volgt u de instructies op het scherm om een account toe te voegen. Als u meer dan één account hebt, selecteert u de account waaraan u het contact wilt toevoegen. 5 Geef de contactgegevens in. 6 Selecteer GEREED om een contact aan het geheugen toe te voegen. › Een contact zoeken 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen. 2 Selecteer en voer de contactgegevens in het tekstinvoerveld in. 3 Selecteer de naam van het contact. Zodra u een contact hebt gevonden, kunt u de volgende opties gebruiken: ● Als u het contact wilt instellen als favoriet, selecteert u . ● Als u de contactgegevens wilt bewerken, selecteert u .Persoonlijke gegevens 59 ● Als u het contact naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u → Delen→ een optie. ● Als u de contactpersoon wilt verwijderen, selecteert u → Verwijderen. ›Uw profiel instellen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen. 2 Selecteer ALLE→Mijn profiel instellen. 3 Geef uw persoonlijke gegevens op en selecteer GEREED. › Een contactgroep maken 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen. 2 Selecteer GROEPEN→ . 3 Voer een naam in voor de groep en zoek leden uit de contactenlijst. 4 Selecteer GEREED wanneer u klaar bent. › Contacten importeren of exporteren U kunt bestanden (in vcf-indeling) importeren van of exporteren naar het interne geheugen van uw apparaat. Contactbestanden importeren 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen. 2 Selecteer →Importeren/exporteren→Importeren van SIM-kaart of Importeren uit opslag. 3 Selecteer een account waar u het contact aan wilt toevoegen. 4 Selecteer een optie voor het importeren van één contact, meerdere contacten of alle contacten en selecteer OK. 5 Selecteer de contacten die u wilt importeren en selecteer OK.Persoonlijke gegevens 60 Contactbestanden exporteren 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen. 2 Selecteer →Importeren/exporteren→Exporteren naar opslag. 3 Selecteer OK ter bevestiging. Agenda Zo maakt en beheert u dagelijkse, wekelijkse of maandelijkse gebeurtenissen. › Een afspraak maken 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Agenda. 2 Voeg uw Google-account toe (indien noodzakelijk). 3 Selecteer . 4 Geef de details in voor de afspraak en selecteer GEREED. ›De weergavestand wijzigen 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Agenda. 2 Selecteer een weergavemodus boven in de agenda. ● DAG: blokken van een uur voor één hele dag. ● WEEK: blokken van een uur voor de dagen van één hele week. ● MAAND: een volledige maand in een weergave. ● AGENDA: een lijst met alle afspraken en feestdagen die gepland zijn voor een bepaalde periode.Persoonlijke gegevens 61 › Een gebeurtenis weergeven 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Agenda. 2 Selecteer een datum in de agenda. 3 Selecteer een afspraak om de details te bekijken. ● Selecteer om de gebeurtenis te bewerken. ● Selecteer →OK om de gebeurtenis te verwijderen. › Een alarm voor een afspraak stoppen Als u een herinnering instelt voor een agendagebeurtenis, wordt er een alarm weergegeven op de ingestelde tijd. 1 Selecteer op de systeembalk. 2 Selecteer de afspraakmelding. 3 Selecteer een afspraak om de details te bekijken. Als u het alarm voor een afspraak op de sluimerstand wilt zetten of wilt uitschakelen, selecteert u 5 min. uitstellen of Allemaal verwijderen.Connectiviteit 62 Connectiviteit Pc-verbindingen Hier vindt u informatie over hoe u het apparaat met de meegeleverde USB-kabel in diverse USB-verbindingsstanden op een pc kunt aansluiten. Door het apparaat op een PC aan te sluiten kunt u bestanden met Windows Media Player synchroniseren en gegevens direct van en naar het apparaat verzenden. Als u pc-verbinding wilt gebruiken, moet u de modus voor USBfouten opsporen uitschakelen. Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→Opties voor ontwikkelaars en schakel het selectievakje uit naast USB-foutopsporing. Verwijder de USB-kabel niet uit een computer terwijl het toestel bezig is met het overbrengen of openen van gegevens. Hierdoor kunnen gegevens verloren gaan of kan het toestel beschadigd raken. Voor de beste resultaten sluit u de USB-kabel rechtstreeks aan op een USB-poort op een computer. Bij gebruik van een USB-hub kan de gegevensoverdracht mislukken. › Synchroniseren met Windows Media Player Controleer of Windows Media Player op de pc is geïnstalleerd. 1 Sluit de USB-kabel aan op de multifunctionele aansluiting van het apparaat en op een pc met Windows Media Player. Er wordt een pop-upbericht op de computer weergegeven zodra de verbinding tot stand is gekomen. 2 Open Windows Media Player om muziekbestanden te synchroniseren. 3 Bewerk of typ de naam van het apparaat in het pop-upvenster (indien nodig). 4 Selecteer de gewenste muziekbestanden en sleep deze naar de synchronisatielijst. 5 Start de synchronisatie.Connectiviteit 63 Wi-Fi Hier vindt u informatie over het gebruik van de draadloze netwerkvoorzieningen van uw toestel, waarmee u verbinding kunt maken met elk draadloos LAN (WLAN) dat compatibel is met de IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n-normen. Overal waar er een draadloos toegangspunt of 'hotspot' aanwezig is, kunt u verbinding met internet of andere netwerkapparaten maken. Het toestel gebruikt een niet-geharmoniseerde frequentie en is bedoeld voor gebruik in alle Europese landen. Het WLAN mag in de EU zonder beperkingen binnenshuis worden gebruikt, maar kan niet buitenshuis worden gebruikt. ›De Wi-Fi-functie inschakelen Open de applicatielijst, selecteer Instellingen en sleep vervolgens de schuifbalk naar AAN naast Wi-Fi. Een Wi-Fi-functie die op de achtergrond wordt uitgevoerd, verbruikt ook batterijvermogen. Activeer de functie daarom alleen wanneer dit nodig is, om de batterij te sparen. › Zoek een Wi-Fi-netwerk en maak hiermee verbinding 1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi. Het apparaat zoekt automatisch naar beschikbare Wi-Finetwerken. 2 Selecteer een netwerk. 3 Voer het wachtwoord voor het netwerk in (indien noodzakelijk). 4 Selecteer Verbinden.Connectiviteit 64 ›Handmatig een Wi-Fi-netwerk toevoegen 1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi→ NETWERK TOEVOEGEN. 2 Voer een SSID voor het netwerk in en selecteer het type beveiliging. 3 Stel de beveiligingsinstellingen in, afhankelijk van het geselecteerde beveiligingstype. 4 Selecteer Opslaan. › Verbinding maken met een Wi-Fi-netwerk met behulp van Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) U kunt via WPS verbinding maken met een beveiligd netwerk. Verbinding maken via een WPS-knop 1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi. 2 Selecteer een netwerk dat wordt aangegeven als WPS in de lijst en schakel het selectievakje naast Geavanceerde opties weergeven in. 3 Selecteer de vervolgkeuzelijst naast WPS en selecteer vervolgens Knop indrukken→Verbinden. 4 Druk dan binnen 2 minuten op een WPS-knop op het toegangspunt. Verbinding maken via een WPS PIN 1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi. 2 Selecteer een netwerk dat wordt aangegeven als WPS en schakel het selectievakje naast Geavanceerde opties weergeven in. 3 Selecteer de vervolgkeuzelijst naast WPS en selecteer vervolgens Pincode van toegangspunt of Pincode van dit apparaat. 4 Geef op het toegangspunt de PIN-code in en druk op de startknop.Connectiviteit 65 › Statische IP-instellingen instellen 1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi. 2 Selecteer een netwerk en schakel het selectievakje naast Geavanceerde opties weergeven in. 3 Selecteer de vervolgkeuzelijst naast IP-instellingen in. 4 Selecteer passief. 5 Wijzig de IP-instellingen voor het netwerk, zoals IP-adres, lengte van voorvoegsel voor netwerk, Gateway en DNS. 6 Selecteer Verbinden. ›Wi-Fi-instellingen aanpassen 1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi→ →Geavanceerd. 2 Wijzig de volgende opties: Optie Functie Netwerkmelding Instellen dat u een melding ontvangt als er een open Wi-Fi-netwerk beschikbaar is. Wifi behouden in slaapstand Instellen of de Wi-Fi-functie ingeschakeld moet blijven in de slaapstand. MAC-adres Het MAC-adres voor het apparaat weergeven. IP-adres Het IP-adres van het huidige netwerk weergeven. Wi-Fi Direct Hier vindt u informatie over het gebruik van de functie Wi-Fi Direct waarmee u twee apparaten via Wi-Fi kunt verbinden zonder een toegangspunt. 1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→Meer... 2 Schakel het selectievakje naast Wifi Direct→OK.Connectiviteit 66 3 Selecteer een bestand of item, zoals een mediabestand of webadres, in een geschikte applicatie. 4 Selecteer een optie voor het verzenden van gegevens via Wi-Fi. De methode van datatransmissie kan per applicatie verschillen. Bluetooth Bluetooth is een draadloze communicatietechnologie die werkt over een korte afstand. Met Bluetooth kunt u gegevens uitwisselen over een afstand van ongeveer 10 meter zonder dat er een fysieke verbinding nodig is. Bij Bluetooth is het niet nodig om de apparaten op elkaar te richten. Als de apparaten zich binnen elkaars bereik bevinden, kunnen er gegevens worden overgedragen, ook als de apparaten zich in aparte ruimten bevinden. ● Samsung is niet verantwoordelijk voor het verlies, de onderschepping of het misbruik van gegevens die via de Bluetooth-functie zijn verzonden of ontvangen. ● Zorg altijd dat u gegevens deelt met en ontvangt van vertrouwde apparaten die